AT90USB128_doc7593 - Features • High Performance, Low...

Info iconThis preview shows page 1. Sign up to view the full content.

View Full Document Right Arrow Icon
This is the end of the preview. Sign up to access the rest of the document.

Unformatted text preview: Features • High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller • Advanced RISC Architecture • • • • • • – 135 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution – 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers – Fully Static Operation – Up to 16 MIPS Throughput at 16 MHz – On-Chip 2-cycle Multiplier Non-volatile Program and Data Memories – 64/128K Bytes of In-System Self-Programmable Flash • Endurance: 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles – Optional Boot Code Section with Independent Lock Bits • USB Bootloader programmed by default in the Factory • In-System Programming by On-chip Boot Program hardware activated after reset • True Read-While-Write Operation • All supplied parts are preprogramed with a default USB bootloader – 2K/4K (64K/128K Flash version) Bytes EEPROM • Endurance: 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles – 4K/8K (64K/128K Flash version) Bytes Internal SRAM – Up to 64K Bytes Optional External Memory Space – Programming Lock for Software Security JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface – Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard – Extensive On-chip Debug Support – Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface USB 2.0 Full-speed/Low-speed Device and On-The-Go Module – Complies fully with: – Universal Serial Bus Specification REV 2.0 – On-The-Go Supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification Rev 1.0 – Supports data transfer rates up to 12 Mbit/s and 1.5 Mbit/s USB Full-speed/Low Speed Device Module with Interrupt on Transfer Completion – Endpoint 0 for Control Transfers : up to 64-bytes – 6 Programmable Endpoints with IN or Out Directions and with Bulk, Interrupt or Isochronous Transfers – Configurable Endpoints size up to 256 bytes in double bank mode – Fully independant 832 bytes USB DPRAM for endpoint memory allocation – Suspend/Resume Interrupts – Power-on Reset and USB Bus Reset – 48 MHz PLL for Full-speed Bus Operation – USB Bus Disconnection on Microcontroller Request USB OTG Reduced Host : – Supports Host Negotiation Protocol (HNP) and Session Request Protocol (SRP) for OTG dual-role devices – Provide Status and control signals for software implementation of HNP and SRP – Provides programmable times required for HNP and SRP Peripheral Features – Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and Compare Mode – Two16-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler, Compare- and Capture Mode 8-bit Microcontroller with 64/128K Bytes of ISP Flash and USB Controller AT90USB646 AT90USB647 AT90USB1286 AT90USB1287 7593K–AVR–11/09 • • • • • 2 – Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator – Four 8-bit PWM Channels – Six PWM Channels with Programmable Resolution from 2 to 16 Bits – Output Compare Modulator – 8-channels, 10-bit ADC – Programmable Serial USART – Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface – Byte Oriented 2-wire Serial Interface – Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator – On-chip Analog Comparator – Interrupt and Wake-up on Pin Change Special Microcontroller Features – Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection – Internal Calibrated Oscillator – External and Internal Interrupt Sources – Six Sleep Modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, Standby, and Extended Standby I/O and Packages – 48 Programmable I/O Lines – 64-lead TQFP and 64-lead QFN Operating Voltages – 2.7 - 5.5V Operating temperature – Industrial (-40°C to +85°C) Maximum Frequency – 8 MHz at 2.7V - Industrial range – 16 MHz at 4.5V - Industrial range AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 1. Pin Configurations PA0 (AD0) PA1 (AD1) PA2 (AD2) 50 49 VCC 53 52 51 PF7 (ADC7/TDI) GND 54 PF6 (ADC6/TDO) 56 55 58 PF4 (ADC4/TCK) PF3 (ADC3) 59 PF5 (ADC5/TMS) PF2 (ADC2) 60 57 PF0 (ADC0) 62 PF1 (ADC1) AREF 63 1 (INT.7/AIN.1/UVcon) PE7 61 AVCC (INT.6/AIN.0) PE6 GND Pinout AT90USB64/128-TQFP 64 Figure 1-1. 2 48 47 INDEX CORNER PA3 (AD3) PA4 (AD4) UVcc 3 46 PA5 (AD5) D- 4 45 PA6 (AD6) D+ 5 44 PA7 (AD7) UGnd 6 43 PE2 (ALE/HWB) UCap 7 42 PC7 (A15/IC.3/CLKO) VBus 8 41 PC6 (A14/OC.3A) AT90USB90128/64 TQFP64 28 29 30 31 32 (ICP1) PD4 (XCK1) PD5 (T1) PD6 (T0) PD7 PE0 (WR) (TXD1/INT3) PD3 33 27 (PCINT6/OC.1B) PB6 (RXD1/INT2) PD2 PE1 (RD) 25 34 16 26 15 (OC0B/SCL/INT0) PD0 (PCINT5/OC.1A) PB5 (OC2B/SDA/INT1) PD1 PC0 (A8) 24 35 XTAL1 PC1 (A9) 14 23 36 (PCINT4/OC.2A) PB4 XTAL2 (PDO/PCINT3/MISO) PB3 22 PC2 (A10) GND 37 13 21 12 VCC (PDI/PCINT2/MOSI) PB2 20 PC3 (A11/T.3) RESET PC4 (A12/OC.3C) 38 19 39 11 (INT.5/TOSC2) PE5 (SS/PCINT0) PB0 (PCINT1/SCLK) PB1 18 PC5 (A13/OC.3B) (INT4/TOSC1) PE4 40 17 9 10 (PCINT7/OC.0A/OC.1C) PB7 (IUID) PE3 3 7593K–AVR–11/09 VCC PA0 (AD0) PA1 (AD1) PA2 (AD2) 52 51 50 49 PF7 (ADC7/TDI) GND 55 54 PF6 (ADC6/TDO) 56 53 PF4 (ADC4/TCK) PF5 (ADC5/TMS) 57 PF2 (ADC2) PF3 (ADC3) 60 59 PF1 (ADC1) 61 58 AREF PF0 (ADC0) 62 AVCC GND 63 Pinout AT90USB64/128-QFN 64 Figure 1-2. (INT.6/AIN.0) PE6 1 48 PA3 (AD3) (INT.7/AIN.1/UVcon) PE7 2 47 PA4 (AD4) 46 PA5 (AD5) 45 PA6 (AD6) UVcc 3 D- 4 D+ 5 44 PA7 (AD7) UGnd 6 43 PE2 (ALE/HWB) UCap 7 42 PC7 (A15/IC.3/CLKO) VBus 8 41 PC6 (A14/OC.3A) 40 PC5 (A13/OC.3B) 39 PC4 (A12/OC.3C) INDEX CORNER AT90USB128/64 (IUID) PE3 9 (SS/PCINT0) PB0 10 (PCINT1/SCLK) PB1 11 38 PC3 (A11/T.3) (PDI/PCINT2/MOSI) PB2 12 37 PC2 (A10) (PDO/PCINT3/MISO) PB3 13 36 PC1 (A9) (PCINT4/OC.2A) PB4 14 35 PC0 (A8) (PCINT5/OC.1A) PB5 15 34 PE1 (RD) (PCINT6/OC.1B) PB6 16 33 PE0 (WR) 17 Note: 1.1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (PCINT7/OC.0A/OC.1C) PB7 (INT4/TOSC1) PE4 (INT.5/TOSC2) PE5 RESET VCC GND XTAL2 XTAL1 (OC0B/SCL/INT0) PD0 (OC2B/SDA/INT1) PD1 (RXD1/INT2) PD2 (TXD1/INT3) PD3 (ICP1) PD4 (XCK1) PD5 (T1) PD6 (T0) PD7 (64-lead QFN top view) The large center pad underneath the MLF packages is made of metal and internally connected to GND. It should be soldered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If the center pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the board. Disclaimer Typical values contained in this datasheet are based on simulations and characterization of other AVR microcontrollers manufactured on the same process technology. Min and Max values will be available after the device is characterized. 2. Overview The AT90USB64/128 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the 4 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 AT90USB64/128 achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed. Block Diagram PF7 - PF0 VCC PC7 - PC0 PA7 - P A0 POR TA DRIVERS POR TF DRIVERS RESET Block Diagram XT AL2 Figure 2-1. XT AL1 2.1 POR TC DRIVERS GND DATA DIR. REG. PORT F DATA REGISTER PORT F DATA DIR. REG. PORT A DATA REGISTER PORT A DATA REGISTER PORT C DATA DIR. REG. PORT C 8-BIT DA TA BUS POR - BOD RESET AVCC INTERNAL OSCILLA TOR CALIB. OSC ADC AGND AREF JTAG TAP PROGRAM COUNTER ON-CHIP DEBUG PROGRAM FLASH SRAM BOUNDARYSCAN INSTRUCTION REGISTER OSCILLA TOR WATCHDOG TIMER ST ACK POINTER TIMING AND CONTROL MCU CONTROL REGISTER TIMER/ COUNTERS GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTERS X PROGRAMMING LOGIC INSTRUCTION DECODER CONTROL LINES Z INTERRUPT UNIT ALU EEPROM Y PLL ST ATUS REGISTER + - ANALOG COMP ARATOR USART1 USB SPI DATA DIR. REG. PORTE DATA REGISTER PORTE POR TE DRIVERS PE7 - PE0 DATA DIR. REG. PORTB DATA REGISTER PORTB POR TB DRIVERS PB7 - PB0 DATA REGISTER PORTD TWO-WIRE SERIAL INTERFACE DATA DIR. REG. PORTD POR TD DRIVERS PD7 - PD0 5 7593K–AVR–11/09 The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers. The AT90USB64/128 provides the following features: 64/128K bytes of In-System Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 2K/4K bytes EEPROM, 4K/8K bytes SRAM, 48 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real Time Counter (RTC), four flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes and PWM, one USART, a byte oriented 2-wire Serial Interface, a 8-channels, 10-bit ADC with optional differential input stage with programmable gain, programmable Watchdog Timer with Internal Oscillator, an SPI serial port, IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG test interface, also used for accessing the On-chip Debug system and programming and six software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or Hardware Reset. In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except Asynchronous Timer and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions. In Standby mode, the Crystal/Resonator Oscillator is running while the rest of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption. In Extended Standby mode, both the main Oscillator and the Asynchronous Timer continue to run. The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high-density nonvolatile memory technology. The Onchip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed in-system through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program running on the AVR core. The boot program can use any interface to download the application program in the application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel AT90USB64/128 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications. The AT90USB64/128 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C compilers, macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits. 6 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 2.2 2.2.1 Pin Descriptions VCC Digital supply voltage. 2.2.2 GND Ground. 2.2.3 AVCC Analog supply voltage. 2.2.4 Port A (PA7..PA0) Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port A output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port A pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port A also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 79. 2.2.5 Port B (PB7..PB0) Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port B has better driving capabilities than the other ports. Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 80. 2.2.6 Port C (PC7..PC0) Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port C output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port C also serves the functions of special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 83. 2.2.7 Port D (PD7..PD0) Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 84. 7 7593K–AVR–11/09 2.2.8 Port E (PE7..PE0) Port E is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 87. 2.2.9 Port F (PF7..PF0) Port F serves as analog inputs to the A/D Converter. Port F also serves as an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port, if the A/D Converter is not used. Port pins can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port F output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a reset occurs. Port F also serves the functions of the JTAG interface. 2.2.10 DUSB Full speed / Low Speed Negative Data Upstream Port. Should be connected to the USB Dconnector pin with a serial 22 Ohms resistor. 2.2.11 D+ USB Full speed / Low Speed Positive Data Upstream Port. Should be connected to the USB D+ connector pin with a serial 22 Ohms resistor. 2.2.12 UGND USB Pads Ground. 2.2.13 UVCC USB Pads Internal Regulator Input supply voltage. 2.2.14 UCAP USB Pads Internal Regulator Output supply voltage. Should be connected to an external capacitor (1µF). 2.2.15 VBUS USB VBUS monitor and OTG negociations. 2.2.16 RESET Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 8-1 on page 58. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. 2.2.17 XTAL1 Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit. 8 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 2.2.18 XTAL2 Output from the inverting Oscillator amplifier. 2.2.19 AVCC AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port F and the A/D Converter. It should be externally connected to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC through a low-pass filter. 2.2.20 AREF This is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter. 3. About Code Examples This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documentation for more details. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, "IN", "OUT", "SBIS", "SBIC", "CBI", and "SBI" instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically "LDS" and "STS" combined with "SBRS", "SBRC", "SBR", and "CBR". 9 7593K–AVR–11/09 4. AVR CPU Core 4.1 Introduction This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts. 4.2 Architectural Overview Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture Data Bus 8-bit Flash Program Memory Program Counter Status and Control 32 x 8 General Purpose Registrers Control Lines Direct Addressing Instruction Decoder Indirect Addressing Instruction Register Interrupt Unit SPI Unit Watchdog Timer ALU Analog Comparator I/O Module1 Data SRAM I/O Module 2 I/O Module n EEPROM I/O Lines In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory. 10 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle. Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section. The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation. Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format. Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction. Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must reside in the Boot Program section. During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture. The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps. A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority. The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers, SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the AT90USB64/128 has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. 4.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description. 11 7593K–AVR–11/09 4.4 Status Register The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code. The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software. The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I T H S V N Z C Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SREG • Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference. • Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the BLD instruction. • Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N ⊕ V The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. 12 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. 4.5 General Purpose Register File The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the Register File: • One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input • Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input • Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input • One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU. Figure 4-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers 7 0 Addr. R0 0x00 R1 0x01 R2 0x02 … R13 0x0D General R14 0x0E Purpose R15 0x0F Working R16 0x10 Registers R17 0x11 … R26 0x1A R27 0x1B X-register Low Byte X-register High Byte R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte R31 0x1F Z-register High Byte Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and most of them are single cycle instructions. As shown in Figure 4-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file. 4.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 4-3. 13 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 4-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers 15 X-register XH XL 7 0 R27 (0x1B) YH YL 7 0 R29 (0x1D) 0 7 0 R28 (0x1C) 15 ZH 7 Z-register 0 R26 (0x1A) 15 Y-register 0 7 0 ZL 7 R31 (0x1F) 0 0 R30 (0x1E) In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details). 4.6 Stack Pointer The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack Pointer. The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x0100. The initial value of the stack pointer is the last address of the internal SRAM. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by three when the return address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by three when data is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI. The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present. Bit 12 11 10 9 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 14 13 SP14 7 Initial Value 14 SP7 Read/Write 15 SP15 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 4.6.1 Extended Z-pointer Register for ELPM/SPM - RAMPZ Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RAMPZ 7 RAMPZ 6 RAMPZ 5 RAMPZ 4 RAMPZ 3 RAMPZ 2 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RAMPZ 0 For ELPM/SPM instructions, the Z-pointer is a concatenation of RAMPZ, ZH, and ZL, as shown in Figure 4-4. Note that LPM is not affected by the RAMPZ setting. Figure 4-4. Bit ( Individually) The Z-pointer used by ELPM and SPM 7 0 7 RAMPZ Bit (Z-pointer) 23 0 7 ZH 16 0 ZL 15 8 7 0 The actual number of bits is implementation dependent. Unused bits in an implementation will always read as zero. For compatibility with future devices, be sure to write these bits to zero. 4.7 Instruction Execution Timing This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the chip. No internal clock division is used. Figure 4-5 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit. Figure 4-5. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions T1 T2 T3 T4 clkCPU 1st Instruction Fetch 1st Instruction Execute 2nd Instruction Fetch 2nd Instruction Execute 3rd Instruction Fetch 3rd Instruction Execute 4th Instruction Fetch Figure 4-6 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register. 15 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 4-6. Single Cycle ALU Operation T1 T2 T3 T4 clkCPU Total Execution Time Register Operands Fetch ALU Operation Execute Result Write Back 4.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Program Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12 are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section “Memory Programming” on page 366 for details. The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 68. The list also determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to “Interrupts” on page 68 for more information. The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the BOOTRST Fuse, see “Memory Programming” on page 366. When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed. There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority. The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered. When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any pending interrupt is served. 16 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software. When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence.. Assembly Code Example in r16, SREG cli ; store SREG value ; disable interrupts during timed sequence sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write sbi EECR, EEPE out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit) C Code Example char cSREG; cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */ /* disable interrupts during timed sequence */ __disable_interrupt(); EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */ EECR |= (1<<EEPE); SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */ When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example. 17 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Example sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable sleep; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt ; note: will enter sleep before any pending ; interrupt(s) C Code Example __enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */ __sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */ /* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */ 4.8.1 Interrupt Response Time The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is five clock cycles minimum. After five clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During these five clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is increased by five clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the selected sleep mode. A return from an interrupt handling routine takes five clock cycles. During these five clock cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set. 18 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 5. AVR AT90USB64/128 Memories This section describes the different memories in the AT90USB64/128. The AVR architecture has two main memory spaces, the Data Memory and the Program Memory space. In addition, the AT90USB64/128 features an EEPROM Memory for data storage. All three memory spaces are linear and regular. Table 5-1. Memory Mapping. Memory Mnemonic AT90USB64 AT90USB128 Flash size 64 K bytes 128K bytes Start Address - 0x00000 End Address Flash end 0x0FFFF(1) 0x7FFF(2) Size - 32 bytes Start Address - 0x0000 End Address - 0x001F Size - 64 bytes Start Address - 0x0020 End Address - 0x005F Size - 160 bytes Start Address - 0x0060 End Address - 0x00FF Size ISRAM size 4 K bytes Start Address ISRAM start 0x0100 End Address ISRAM end 0x10FF Size XMem size 0-64 K bytes Start Address XMem start 0x1100 End Address XMem end 0xFFFF E2 size 2 K bytes Start Address - 0x0000 End Address E2 end 0x07FF Size Flash 32 Registers I/O Registers Ext I/O Registers Internal SRAM External Memory Size EEPROM Notes: 0x1FFFF(1) 0xFFFF(2) 8 K bytes 0x20FF 0x2100 4K bytes 0x0FFF 1. Byte address. 2. Word (16-bit) address. 5.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory The AT90USB64/128 contains 128K bytes On-chip In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory for program storage. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is organized as 64K x 16. For software security, the Flash Program memory space is divided into two sections, Boot Program section and Application Program section. The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The AT90USB64/128 Program Counter (PC) is 16 bits wide, thus addressing the 128K program 19 7593K–AVR–11/09 memory locations. The operation of Boot Program section and associated Boot Lock bits for software protection are described in detail in “Memory Programming” on page 366. “Memory Programming” on page 366 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial downloading using the SPI pins or the JTAG interface. Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see the LPM – Load Program Memory instruction description and ELPM - Extended Load Program Memory instruction description). Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in “Instruction Execution Timing” on page 15. Figure 5-1. Program Memory Map Program Memory 0x00000 Application Flash Section Boot Flash Section Flash End 5.2 SRAM Data Memory Figure 5-2 shows how the AT90USB64/128 SRAM Memory is organized. The AT90USB64/128 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in the Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from $060 - $0FF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. The first 4,352/8,448 Data Memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O Memory, Extended I/O Memory, and the internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the Register file, the next 64 location the standard I/O Memory, then 160 locations of Extended I/O memory and the next 4,096/8,192 locations address the internal data SRAM. 20 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 An optional external data SRAM can be used with the AT90USB64/128. This SRAM will occupy an area in the remaining address locations in the 64K address space. This area starts at the address following the internal SRAM. The Register file, I/O, Extended I/O and Internal SRAM occupies the lowest 4,352/8,448 bytes, so when using 64KB (65,536 bytes) of External Memory, 61,184/57,088 Bytes of External Memory are available. See “External Memory Interface” on page 30 for details on how to take advantage of the external memory map. When the addresses accessing the SRAM memory space exceeds the internal data memory locations, the external data SRAM is accessed using the same instructions as for the internal data memory access. When the internal data memories are accessed, the read and write strobe pins (PE0 and PE1) are inactive during the whole access cycle. External SRAM operation is enabled by setting the SRE bit in the XMCRA Register. Accessing external SRAM takes one additional clock cycle per byte compared to access of the internal SRAM. This means that the commands LD, ST, LDS, STS, LDD, STD, PUSH, and POP take one additional clock cycle. If the Stack is placed in external SRAM, interrupts, subroutine calls and returns take three clock cycles extra because the three-byte program counter is pushed and popped, and external memory access does not take advantage of the internal pipeline memory access. When external SRAM interface is used with wait-state, one-byte external access takes two, three, or four additional clock cycles for one, two, and three wait-states respectively. Interrupts, subroutine calls and returns will need five, seven, or nine clock cycles more than specified in the instruction set manual for one, two, and three wait-states. The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with Displacement, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the Register file, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers. The direct addressing reaches the entire data space. The Indirect with Displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given by the Y- or Z-register. When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-increment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented. The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O registers, and the 8,192 bytes of internal data SRAM in the AT90USB64/128 are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The Register File is described in “General Purpose Register File” on page 13. 21 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 5-2. Data Memory Map Data Memory 32 Registers 64 I/O Registers 160 E xt I/O Reg. $0000 - $001F $0020 - $005F $0060 - $00FF ISRAM start Internal S RAM (8192 x 8) ISRAM end XMem start External S RAM (0 - 6 4 K x 8 ) $FFFF 5.2.1 22 Data Memory Access Times This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The internal data SRAM access is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 5-3. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 5-3. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles T1 T2 T3 clkCPU Address Compute Address Address valid Write Data WR Read Data RD Memory Access Instruction 5.3 Next Instruction EEPROM Data Memory The AT90USB64/128 contains 2K/4K bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data space, in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the EEPROM Address Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and the EEPROM Control Register. For a detailed description of SPI, JTAG and Parallel data downloading to the EEPROM, see page 380, page 385, and page 369 respectively. 5.3.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space. The write access time for the EEPROM is given in Table 5-3. A self-timing function, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This causes the device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. See “Preventing EEPROM Corruption” on page 28. for details on how to avoid problems in these situations. In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed. Refer to the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. 23 7593K–AVR–11/09 5.3.2 The EEPROM Address Register – EEARH and EEARL Bit 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 – – – – EEAR11 EEAR10 EEAR9 EEAR8 EEARH EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 EEARL 7 Read/Write 15 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 X X X X X Initial Value R X X X X X X X • Bits 15..12 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bits 11..0 – EEAR8..0: EEPROM Address The EEPROM Address Registers – EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in the 4K bytes EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 4096. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed. 5.3.3 The EEPROM Data Register – EEDR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSB 0 LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EEDR R/W 0 • Bits 7..0 – EEDR7.0: EEPROM Data For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEAR. 5.3.4 The EEPROM Control Register – EECR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 X X 0 0 X 0 EECR • Bits 7..6 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bits 5, 4 – EEPM1 and EEPM0: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits The EEPROM Programming mode bit setting defines which programming action that will be triggered when writing EEPE. It is possible to program data in one atomic operation (erase the old value and program the new value) or to split the Erase and Write operations in two different operations. The Programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 5-2. While EEPE is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be reset to 0b00 unless the EEPROM is busy programming. 24 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 5-2. EEPROM Mode Bits EEPM1 EEPM0 Programming Time 0 0 3.4 ms Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic Operation) 0 1 1.8 ms Erase Only 1 0 1.8 ms Write Only 1 1 – Operation Reserved for future use • Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I bit in SREG is set. Writing EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready interrupt generates a constant interrupt when EEPE is cleared. • Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Programming Enable The EEMPE bit determines whether setting EEPE to one causes the EEPROM to be written. When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four clock cycles will write data to the EEPROM at the selected address If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will have no effect. When EEMPE has been written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles. See the description of the EEPE bit for an EEPROM write procedure. • Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Programming Enable The EEPROM Write Enable Signal EEPE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When address and data are correctly set up, the EEPE bit must be written to one to write the value into the EEPROM. The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a logical one is written to EEPE, otherwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when writing the EEPROM (the order of steps 3 and 4 is not essential): 1. Wait until EEPE becomes zero. 2. Wait until SELFPRGEN in SPMCSR becomes zero. 3. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional). 4. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional). 5. Write a logical one to the EEMPE bit while writing a zero to EEPE in EECR. 6. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMPE, write a logical one to EEPE. The EEPROM can not be programmed during a CPU write to the Flash memory. The software must check that the Flash programming is completed before initiating a new EEPROM write. Step 2 is only relevant if the software contains a Boot Loader allowing the CPU to program the Flash. If the Flash is never being updated by the CPU, step 2 can be omitted. See “Memory Programming” on page 366 for details about Boot programming. C aution: A n interrupt between step 5 and step 6 will make the write cycle fail, since the EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the Global Interrupt Flag cleared during all the steps to avoid these problems. 25 7593K–AVR–11/09 When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by hardware. The user software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed. • Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable The EEPROM Read Enable Signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be written to a logic one to trigger the EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction, and the requested data is available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the next instruction is executed. The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change the EEAR Register. The calibrated Oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Table 5-3 lists the typical programming time for EEPROM access from the CPU. Table 5-3. EEPROM Programming Time Symbol EEPROM write (from CPU) Number of Calibrated RC Oscillator Cycles Typ Programming Time 26,368 3.3 ms The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for writing to the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. The examples also assume that no Flash Boot Loader is present in the software. If such code is present, the EEPROM write function must also wait for any ongoing SPM command to finish. 26 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Assembly Code Example(1) EEPROM_write: ; Wait for completion of previous write sbic EECR,EEPE rjmp EEPROM_write ; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register out EEARH, r18 out EEARL, r17 ; Write data (r16) to Data Register out EEDR,r16 ; Write logical one to EEMPE sbi EECR,EEMPE ; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE sbi EECR,EEPE ret C Code Example(1) void EEPROM_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData) { /* Wait for completion of previous write */ while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)) ; /* Set up address and Data Registers */ EEAR = uiAddress; EEDR = ucData; /* Write logical one to EEMPE */ EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */ EECR |= (1<<EEPE); } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. 27 7593K–AVR–11/09 The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. Assembly Code Example(1) EEPROM_read: ; Wait for completion of previous write sbic EECR,EEPE rjmp EEPROM_read ; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register out EEARH, r18 out EEARL, r17 ; Start eeprom read by writing EERE sbi EECR,EERE ; Read data from Data Register in r16,EEDR ret C Code Example(1) unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned int uiAddress) { /* Wait for completion of previous write */ while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)) ; /* Set up address register */ EEAR = uiAddress; /* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */ EECR |= (1<<EERE); /* Return data from Data Register */ return EEDR; } Note: 5.3.5 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. Preventing EEPROM Corruption During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied. An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage is too low. EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation: Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal BOD does not match the needed detection level, an external low VCC reset Protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient. 28 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 5.4 I/O Memory The I/O space definition of the AT90USB64/128 is shown in “Register Summary” on page 427. All AT90USB64/128 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The AT90USB64/128 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only. The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in later sections. 5.4.1 General Purpose I/O Registers The AT90USB64/128 contains three General Purpose I/O Registers. These registers can be used for storing any information, and they are particularly useful for storing global variables and Status Flags. General Purpose I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS, and SBIC instructions. 5.4.2 General Purpose I/O Register 2 – GPIOR2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSB 0 LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 General Purpose I/O Register 1 – GPIOR1 Bit 7 MSB LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 GPIOR1 R/W Initial Value 5.4.4 GPIOR2 R/W Initial Value 5.4.3 R/W 0 General Purpose I/O Register 0 – GPIOR0 Bit 7 MSB LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GPIOR0 R/W 0 29 7593K–AVR–11/09 5.5 External Memory Interface With all the features the External Memory Interface provides, it is well suited to operate as an interface to memory devices such as External SRAM and Flash, and peripherals such as LCDdisplay, A/D, and D/A. The main features are: • • • • 5.5.1 Four different wait-state settings (including no wait-state). Independent wait-state setting for different external Memory sectors (configurable sector size). The number of bits dedicated to address high byte is selectable. Bus keepers on data lines to minimize current consumption (optional). Overview When the eXternal MEMory (XMEM) is enabled, address space outside the internal SRAM becomes available using the dedicated External Memory pins (see Figure 2-1 on page 5, Table 10-3 on page 79, and Table 10-9 on page 83). The memory configuration is shown in Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4. External Memory with Sector Select Memory Configuration A 0x0000 Internal memory ISRAM end XMem start Lower sector SRW01 SRW00 SRL[2..0] External Memory (0-60K x 8) Upper sector SRW11 SRW10 0xFFFF 5.5.2 Using the External Memory Interface The interface consists of: • AD7:0: Multiplexed low-order address bus and data bus. • A15:8: High-order address bus (configurable number of bits). • ALE: Address latch enable. • RD: Read strobe. • WR: Write strobe. The control bits for the External Memory Interface are located in two registers, the External Memory Control Register A – XMCRA, and the External Memory Control Register B – XMCRB. 30 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 When the XMEM interface is enabled, the XMEM interface will override the setting in the data direction registers that corresponds to the ports dedicated to the XMEM interface. For details about the port override, see the alternate functions in section “I/O-Ports” on page 72. The XMEM interface will auto-detect whether an access is internal or external. If the access is external, the XMEM interface will output address, data, and the control signals on the ports according to Figure 5-6 (this figure shows the wave forms without wait-states). When ALE goes from high-to-low, there is a valid address on AD7:0. ALE is low during a data transfer. When the XMEM interface is enabled, also an internal access will cause activity on address, data and ALE ports, but the RD and WR strobes will not toggle during internal access. When the External Memory Interface is disabled, the normal pin and data direction settings are used. Note that when the XMEM interface is disabled, the address space above the internal SRAM boundary is not mapped into the internal SRAM. Figure 5-5 illustrates how to connect an external SRAM to the AVR using an octal latch (typically “74 x 573” or equivalent) which is transparent when G is high. 5.5.3 Address Latch Requirements Due to the high-speed operation of the XRAM interface, the address latch must be selected with care for system frequencies above 8 MHz @ 4V and 4 MHz @ 2.7V. When operating at conditions above these frequencies, the typical old style 74HC series latch becomes inadequate. The External Memory Interface is designed in compliance to the 74AHC series latch. However, most latches can be used as long they comply with the main timing parameters. The main parameters for the address latch are: • D to Q propagation delay (tPD). • Data setup time before G low (tSU). • Data (address) hold time after G low (TH). The External Memory Interface is designed to guaranty minimum address hold time after G is asserted low of th = 5 ns. Refer to tLAXX_LD/tLLAXX_ST in “External Data Memory Timing” Tables 307 through Tables 30-13 on pages 407 - 409. The D-to-Q propagation delay (tPD) must be taken into consideration when calculating the access time requirement of the external component. The data setup time before G low (tSU) must not exceed address valid to ALE low (tAVLLC) minus PCB wiring delay (dependent on the capacitive load). Figure 5-5. External SRAM Connected to the AVR D[7:0] AD7:0 D ALE G AVR A15:8 RD WR Q A[7:0] SRAM A[15:8] RD WR 31 7593K–AVR–11/09 5.5.4 Pull-up and Bus-keeper The pull-ups on the AD7:0 ports may be activated if the corresponding Port register is written to one. To reduce power consumption in sleep mode, it is recommended to disable the pull-ups by writing the Port register to zero before entering sleep. The XMEM interface also provides a bus-keeper on the AD7:0 lines. The bus-keeper can be disabled and enabled in software as described in “External Memory Control Register B – XMCRB” on page 35. When enabled, the bus-keeper will keep the previous value on the AD7:0 bus while these lines are tri-stated by the XMEM interface. 5.5.5 Timing External Memory devices have different timing requirements. To meet these requirements, the XMEM interface provides four different wait-states as shown in Table 5-5. It is important to consider the timing specification of the External Memory device before selecting the wait-state. The most important parameters are the access time for the external memory compared to the set-up requirement. The access time for the External Memory is defined to be the time from receiving the chip select/address until the data of this address actually is driven on the bus. The access time cannot exceed the time from the ALE pulse must be asserted low until data is stable during a read sequence (See tLLRL+ tRLRH - tDVRH in Tables 30-6 through Tables 30-13 on pages 407 409). The different wait-states are set up in software. As an additional feature, it is possible to divide the external memory space in two sectors with individual wait-state settings. This makes it possible to connect two different memory devices with different timing requirements to the same XMEM interface. For XMEM interface timing details, please refer to Tables 30-6 through Tables 30-13 and Figure 30-7 to Figure 30-10 in the “External Data Memory Timing” on page 407. Note that the XMEM interface is asynchronous and that the waveforms in the following figures are related to the internal system clock. The skew between the internal and external clock (XTAL1) is not guarantied (varies between devices temperature, and supply voltage). Consequently, the XMEM interface is not suited for synchronous operation. Figure 5-6. External Data Memory Cycles without Wait-state (SRWn1=0 and SRWn0=0) T1 T2 T3 T4 System Clock (CLKCPU ) ALE A15:8 Prev. addr. DA7:0 Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 1) Prev. data XX Data Write Address WR Data Read Address Data RD Note: 32 1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper sector) or SRW01 (lower sector), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper sector) or SRW00 (lower sector). The ALE pulse in period T4 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 5-7. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 0 and SRWn0 = 1(1) T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 System Clock (CLKCPU ) ALE A15:8 Prev. addr. DA7:0 Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 1) Prev. data XX Write Address Data WR Address Read Data Data RD Note: 1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper sector) or SRW01 (lower sector), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper sector) or SRW00 (lower sector). The ALE pulse in period T5 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). Figure 5-8. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 0(1) T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 System Clock (CLKCPU ) ALE A15:8 Prev. addr. DA7:0 Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 1) Prev. data XX Data Write Address WR Data Read Address Data RD Note: 1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper sector) or SRW01 (lower sector), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper sector) or SRW00 (lower sector). The ALE pulse in period T6 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). 33 7593K–AVR–11/09 External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 1(1) Figure 5-9. T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 System Clock (CLKCPU ) ALE A15:8 Prev. addr. DA7:0 Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Prev. data Address DA7:0 (XMBK = 1) Prev. data XX Write Address Data WR Address Read Data Data RD Note: 5.5.6 1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper sector) or SRW01 (lower sector), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper sector) or SRW00 (lower sector). The ALE pulse in period T7 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). External Memory Control Register A – XMCRA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SRE SRL2 SRL1 SRL0 SRW11 SRW10 SRW01 SRW00 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XMCRA • Bit 7 – SRE: External SRAM/XMEM Enable Writing SRE to one enables the External Memory Interface.The pin functions AD7:0, A15:8, ALE, WR, and RD are activated as the alternate pin functions. The SRE bit overrides any pin direction settings in the respective data direction registers. Writing SRE to zero, disables the External Memory Interface and the normal pin and data direction settings are used. • Bit 6..4 – SRL2:0: Wait-state Sector Limit It is possible to configure different wait-states for different External Memory addresses. The external memory address space can be divided in two sectors that have separate wait-state bits. The SRL2, SRL1, and SRL0 bits select the split of the sectors, see Table 5-4 and Figure 5-4. By default, the SRL2, SRL1, and SRL0 bits are set to zero and the entire external memory address space is treated as one sector. When the entire SRAM address space is configured as one sector, the wait-states are configured by the SRW11 and SRW10 bits. 34 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 5-4. Sector limits with different settings of SRL2..0 SRL2 SRL1 SRL0 Sector Limits 0 0 x Lower sector = N/A Upper sector = 0x2100 - 0xFFFF 0 1 0 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0x3FFF Upper sector = 0x4000 - 0xFFFF 0 1 1 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0x5FFF Upper sector = 0x6000 - 0xFFFF 1 0 0 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0x7FFF Upper sector = 0x8000 - 0xFFFF 1 0 1 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0x9FFF Upper sector = 0xA000 - 0xFFFF 1 1 0 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0xBFFF Upper sector = 0xC000 - 0xFFFF 1 1 1 Lower sector = 0x2100 - 0xDFFF Upper sector = 0xE000 - 0xFFFF • Bit 3..2 – SRW11, SRW10: Wait-state Select Bits for Upper Sector The SRW11 and SRW10 bits control the number of wait-states for the upper sector of the external memory address space, see Table 5-5. • Bit 1..0 – SRW01, SRW00: Wait-state Select Bits for Lower Sector The SRW01 and SRW00 bits control the number of wait-states for the lower sector of the external memory address space, see Table 5-5. Wait States(1) Table 5-5. SRWn1 SRWn0 0 0 No wait-states 0 1 Wait one cycle during read/write strobe 1 0 Wait two cycles during read/write strobe 1 1 Wait two cycles during read/write and wait one cycle before driving out new address Note: 5.5.7 Wait States 1. n = 0 or 1 (lower/upper sector). For further details of the timing and wait-states of the External Memory Interface, see Figures 5-6 through Figures 5-9 for how the setting of the SRW bits affects the timing. External Memory Control Register B – XMCRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 XMBK – – – – XMM2 XMM1 XMM0 Read/Write R/W R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XMCRB • Bit 7– XMBK: External Memory Bus-keeper Enable Writing XMBK to one enables the bus keeper on the AD7:0 lines. When the bus keeper is enabled, AD7:0 will keep the last driven value on the lines even if the XMEM interface has tristated the lines. Writing XMBK to zero disables the bus keeper. XMBK is not qualified with SRE, 35 7593K–AVR–11/09 so even if the XMEM interface is disabled, the bus keepers are still activated as long as XMBK is one. • Bit 6..3 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. When writing to this address location, write these bits to zero for compatibility with future devices. • Bit 2..0 – XMM2, XMM1, XMM0: External Memory High Mask When the External Memory is enabled, all Port C pins are default used for the high address byte. If the full 60KB address space is not required to access the External Memory, some, or all, Port C pins can be released for normal Port Pin function as described in Table 5-6. As described in “Using all 64KB Locations of External Memory” on page 37, it is possible to use the XMMn bits to access all 64KB locations of the External Memory. Table 5-6. Port C Pins Released as Normal Port Pins when the External Memory is Enabled XMM2 0 0 # Bits for External Memory Address Released Port Pins 0 8 (Full 56KB space) None 0 1 7 PC7 0 1 0 6 PC7 - PC6 0 1 1 5 PC7 - PC5 1 0 0 4 PC7 - PC4 1 0 1 3 PC7 - PC3 1 1 0 2 PC7 - PC2 1 36 XMM0 0 5.5.8 XMM1 1 1 No Address high bits Full Port C Using all Locations of External Memory Smaller than 64 KB Since the external memory is mapped after the internal memory as shown in Figure 5-4, the external memory is not addressed when addressing the first 8,448/4,352 bytes (128/64Kbytes version) of data space. It may appear that the first 8,448/4,352 bytes of the external memory are inaccessible (external memory addresses 0x0000 to 0x10FF or 0x0000 to 0x20FF). However, when connecting an external memory smaller than 64 KB, for example 32 KB, these locations are easily accessed simply by addressing from address 0x8000 to 0xA1FF. Since the External Memory Address bit A15 is not connected to the external memory, addresses 0x8000 to 0xA1FF will appear as addresses 0x0000 to 0x21FF for the external memory. Addressing above address 0xA1FF is not recommended, since this will address an external memory location that is already accessed by another (lower) address. To the Application software, the external 32 KB memory will appear as one linear 32 KB address space from 0x2200 to 0xA1FF. This is illustrated in Figure 5-10. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 5-10. Address Map with 32 KB External Memory Memory Configuration A AVR Memory Map 0x0000 External 32K S RAM 0x0000 Internal Memory 0x20FF 0x2100 0x7FFF 0x8000 ISRAM end XMem start External 0x7FFF Memory ISRAM end + 0x8000 XMem start + 0x8000 (Unused) 0xFFFF 5.5.9 Using all 64KB Locations of External Memory Since the External Memory is mapped after the Internal Memory as shown in Figure 5-4, only 56KB of External Memory is available by default (address space 0x0000 to 0x20FF is reserved for internal memory). However, it is possible to take advantage of the entire External Memory by masking the higher address bits to zero. This can be done by using the XMMn bits and control by software the most significant bits of the address. By setting Port C to output 0x00, and releasing the most significant bits for normal Port Pin operation, the Memory Interface will address 0x0000 - 0x2FFF. See the following code examples. Care must be exercised using this option as most of the memory is masked away. 37 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Example(1) ; ; ; ; ; OFFSET is defined to 0x4000 to ensure external memory access Configure Port C (address high byte) to output 0x00 when the pins are released for normal Port Pin operation ldi r16, 0xFF out DDRC, r16 ldi r16, 0x00 out PORTC, r16 ; release PC7:6 ldi r16, (1<<XMM1) sts XMCRB, r16 ; write 0xAA to address 0x0001 of external ; memory ldi r16, 0xaa sts 0x0001+OFFSET, r16 ; re-enable PC7:6 for external memory ldi r16, (0<<XMM1) sts XMCRB, r16 ; store 0x55 to address (OFFSET + 1) of ; external memory ldi r16, 0x55 sts 0x0001+OFFSET, r16 C Code Example(1) #define OFFSET 0x4000 void XRAM_example(void) { unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *) (OFFSET + 1); DDRC = 0xFF; PORTC = 0x00; XMCRB = (1<<XMM1); *p = 0xaa; XMCRB = 0x00; *p = 0x55; } Note: 38 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 6. System Clock and Clock Options 6.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution Figure 6-1 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their distribution. All of the clocks need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 51. The clock systems are detailed below. Figure 6-1. Clock Distribution USB Asynchronous Timer/Counter General I/O Modules ADC CPU Core RAM Flash and EEPROM clkADC clkI/O clkUSB (48MHz) USB PLL X24 AVR Clock Control Unit clkASY clkCPU clkFLASH clkPllin (2MHz) Reset Logic PLL Clock Prescaler System Clock Prescaler Watchdog Timer Watchdog clock Source clock Clock Multiplexer Timer/Counter Oscillator Crystal Oscillator External Clock Watchdog Oscillator Calibrated RC Oscillator 6.1.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core. Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing general operations and calculations. 6.1.2 I/O Clock – clkI/O The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, SPI, and USART. The I/O clock is also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted. Also, TWI address recognition is handled in all sleep modes. 6.1.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually active simultaneously with the CPU clock. 39 7593K–AVR–11/09 6.1.4 Asynchronous Timer Clock – clkASY The Asynchronous Timer clock allows the Asynchronous Timer/Counter to be clocked directly from an external clock or an external 32 kHz clock crystal. The dedicated clock domain allows using this Timer/Counter as a real-time counter even when the device is in sleep mode. 6.1.5 ADC Clock – clkADC The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion results. 6.1.6 USB Clock – clkUSB The USB is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This clock is generated with an on-chip PLL running at 48MHz. The PLL always multiply its input frequency by 24. Thus the PLL clock register should be programmed by software to generate a 2MHz clock on the PLL input. 6.2 Clock Sources The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash Fuse bits as shown below. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator, and routed to the appropriate modules. Table 6-1. Device Clocking Options Select(1) Device Clocking Option CKSEL3..0 Low Power Crystal Oscillator 1111 - 1000 Reserved 0111 - 0110 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator 0101 - 0100 Reserved 0011 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator 0010 External Clock 0000 Reserved 0001 Note: 1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed. 6.2.1 Default Clock Source The device is shipped with Low Power Crystal Oscillator (8.0MHz-max) enabled and with the fuse CKDIV8 programmed, resulting in 1.0MHz system clock (with a 8 MHz cristal). The default fuse configuration is CKSEL = "1110", SUT = "01", CKDIV8 = "0". This default setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using any available programming interface. 6.2.2 Clock Startup Sequence Any clock source needs a sufficient VCC to start oscillating and a minimum number of oscillating cycles before it can be considered stable. To ensure sufficient VCC, the device issues an internal reset with a time-out delay (tTOUT) after the device reset is released by all other reset sources. “On-chip Debug System” on page 56 describes the start conditions for the internal reset. The delay (tTOUT) is timed from the Watchdog Oscillator and the number of cycles in the delay is set by the SUTx and CKSELx fuse bits. The 40 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 selectable delays are shown in Table 6-2. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in “AT90USB64/128 Typical Characteristics” on page 412. Table 6-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles Typ Time-out (VCC = 5.0V) Typ Time-out (VCC = 3.0V) Number of Cycles 0 ms 0 ms 0 4.1 ms 4.3 ms 512 65 ms 69 ms 8K (8,192) Main purpose of the delay is to keep the AVR in reset until it is supplied with minimum Vcc. The delay will not monitor the actual voltage and it will be required to select a delay longer than the Vcc rise time. If this is not possible, an internal or external Brown-Out Detection circuit should be used. A BOD circuit will ensure sufficient Vcc before it releases the reset, and the time-out delay can be disabled. Disabling the time-out delay without utilizing a Brown-Out Detection circuit is not recommended. The oscillator is required to oscillate for a minimum number of cycles before the clock is considered stable. An internal ripple counter monitors the oscillator output clock, and keeps the internal reset active for a given number of clock cycles. The reset is then released and the device will start to execute. The recommended oscillator start-up time is dependent on the clock type, and varies from 6 cycles for an externally applied clock to 32K cycles for a low frequency crystal. The start-up sequence for the clock includes both the time-out delay and the start-up time when the device starts up from reset. When starting up from Power-save or Power-down mode, Vcc is assumed to be at a sufficient level and only the start-up time is included. 6.3 Low Power Crystal Oscillator Pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be configured for use as an On-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 6-2. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used. This Crystal Oscillator is a low power oscillator, with reduced voltage swing on the XTAL2 output. It gives the lowest power consumption, but is not capable of driving other clock inputs, and may be more susceptible to noise in noisy environments. In these cases, refer to the “These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at startup. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application.” on page 43. C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 6-3. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor values given by the manufacturer should be used. 41 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 6-2. Crystal Oscillator Connections C2 XTAL2 C1 XTAL1 GND The Low Power Oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency range. The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 6-3. Low Power Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes(3) Table 6-3. Frequency Range(1) (MHz) Recommended Range for Capacitors C1 and C2 (pF) 0.4 - 0.9 100(2) – 0.9 - 3.0 101 12 - 22 3.0 - 8.0 110 12 - 22 8.0 - 16.0 Notes: CKSEL3..1 111 12 - 22 1. The frequency ranges are preliminary values. Actual values are TBD. 2. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators. 3. If 8 MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 Fuse can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. It must be ensured that the resulting divided clock meets the frequency specification of the device. The CKSEL0 Fuse together with the SUT1..0 Fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table 6-4. Table 6-4. Start-up Times for the Low Power Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection Start-up Time from Power-down and Power-save Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) CKSEL0 SUT1..0 Ceramic resonator, fast rising power 258 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(1) 0 00 Ceramic resonator, slowly rising power 258 CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) 0 01 Ceramic resonator, BOD enabled 1K CK 14CK(2) 0 10 Ceramic resonator, fast rising power 1K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(2) 0 11 Ceramic resonator, slowly rising power 1K CK 14CK + 65 ms(2) 1 00 Oscillator Source / Power Conditions 42 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 6-4. Start-up Times for the Low Power Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection (Continued) Start-up Time from Power-down and Power-save Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) CKSEL0 SUT1..0 Crystal Oscillator, BOD enabled 16K CK 14CK 1 01 Crystal Oscillator, fast rising power 16K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 1 10 Crystal Oscillator, slowly rising power 16K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 11 Oscillator Source / Power Conditions Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These options are not suitable for crystals. 2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at start-up. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. Table 6-5. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection Start-up Time from Powerdown and Power-save Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) SUT1..0 BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00 Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms Power Conditions Slowly rising power 01 (1) 6 CK 10 14CK + 65 ms Reserved Note: 6.4 11 1. The device is shipped with this option selected. Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator The device can utilize a 32.768 kHz watch crystal as clock source by a dedicated Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator. The crystal should be connected as shown in Figure 6-2. When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses and CKSEL0 as shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6. Start-up Times for the Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection Power Conditions BOD enabled Start-up Time from Power-down and Power-save 1K CK Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) (1) 14CK CKSEL0 SUT1..0 0 00 (1) 0 01 0 10 0 11 Fast rising power 1K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms Slowly rising power 1K CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) Reserved BOD enabled 32K CK 14CK 1 00 Fast rising power 32K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 1 01 Slowly rising power 32K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 10 1 11 Reserved 43 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 6.5 1. These options should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator The calibrated internal RC Oscillator by default provides a 8.0 MHz clock. The frequency is nominal value at 3V and 25°C. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed. See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 47 for more details. This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL Fuses as shown in Table 6-7. If selected, it will operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads the calibration byte into the OSCCAL Register and thereby automatically calibrates the RC Oscillator. At 3V and 25°C, this calibration gives a frequency of 8 MHz ±10%. The oscillator can be calibrated to any frequency in the range 7.3 - 8.1 MHz within ±10% accuracy, by changing the OSCCAL register. When this Oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used for the Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed calibration value, see the section “Calibration Byte” on page 369 Table 6-7. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes(1)(3) Frequency Range(2) (MHz) 7.3 - 8.1 Notes: CKSEL3..0 0010 1. The device is shipped with this option selected. 2. The frequency ranges are preliminary values. Actual values are TBD. 3. If 8 MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 Fuse can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 6-5 on page 43. 44 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 6-8. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection Start-up Time from Powerdown and Power-save Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) SUT1..0 BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00 Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01 Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) 10 Power Conditions Reserved Note: 6.5.1 11 1. The device is shipped with this option selected. Oscillator Calibration Register – OSCCAL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Device Specific Calibration Value OSCCAL • Bits 7..0 – CAL7..0: Oscillator Calibration Value The Oscillator Calibration Register is used to trim the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator to remove process variations from the oscillator frequency. The factory-calibrated value is automatically written to this register during chip reset, giving an oscillator frequency of 8.0 MHz at 25°C. The application software can write this register to change the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated to any frequency in the range 7.3 - 8.1 MHz within ±10% accuracy. Calibration outside that range is not guaranteed. Note that this oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash write accesses, and these write times will be affected accordingly. If the EEPROM or Flash are written, do not calibrate to more than 8.8 MHz. Otherwise, the EEPROM or Flash write may fail. The CAL7 bit determines the range of operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the lowest frequency range, setting this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two frequency ranges are overlapping, in other words a setting of OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher frequency than OSCCAL = 0x80. The CAL6..0 bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected range. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency in that range, and a setting of 0x7F gives the highest frequency in the range. Incrementing CAL6..0 by 1 will give a frequency increment of less than 2% in the frequency range 7.3 - 8.1 MHz. 6.6 External Clock The device can utilize a external clock source as shown in Figure 6-3. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL Fuses must be programmed as shown in Table 6-1. 45 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 6-3. External Clock Drive Configuration NC XTAL2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SIGNAL XTAL1 GND When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 6-9. Table 6-9. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection Start-up Time from Powerdown and Power-save Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) SUT1..0 BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00 Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01 Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 65 ms 10 Power Conditions Reserved 11 When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock frequency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behavior. If changes of more than 2% is required, ensure that the MCU is kept in Reset during the changes. Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to “System Clock Prescaler” on page 47 for details. 6.7 Clock Output Buffer The device can output the system clock on the CLKO pin. To enable the output, the CKOUT Fuse has to be programmed. This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used to drive other circuits on the system. The clock also will be output during reset, and the normal operation of I/O pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock source, including the internal RC Oscillator, can be selected when the clock is output on CLKO. If the System Clock Prescaler is used, it is the divided system clock that is output. 6.8 Timer/Counter Oscillator The device can operate its Timer/Counter2 from an external 32.768 kHz watch crystal or a external clock source. See Figure 6-2 on page 42 for crystal connection. Applying an external clock source to TOSC1 requires EXCLK in the ASSR Register written to logic one. See “Asynchronous operation of the Timer/Counter” on page 165 for further description on selecting external clock as input instead of a 32 kHz crystal. 46 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 6.9 System Clock Prescaler The AT90USB64/128 has a system clock prescaler, and the system clock can be divided by setting the “Clock Prescale Register – CLKPR” on page 47. This feature can be used to decrease the system clock frequency and the power consumption when the requirement for processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it will affect the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH are divided by a factor as shown in Table 6-10. When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that no glitches occurs in the clock system. It also ensures that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to the new setting. The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the undivided clock, which may be faster than the CPU's clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the state of the prescaler - even if it were readable, and the exact time it takes to switch from one clock division to the other cannot be exactly predicted. From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2 * T2 before the new clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the previous clock period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting. To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed to change the CLKPS bits: 1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in CLKPR to zero. 2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE. Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is not interrupted. 6.9.1 Clock Prescale Register – CLKPR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 0 CLKPS0 Read/Write R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 See Bit Description CLKPR • Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor clear the CLKPCE bit. • Bits 3..0 – CLKPS3..0: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0 These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all synchronous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are given in Table 6-10. The CKDIV8 Fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed, the CLKPS bits will be reset to “0000”. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to 47 7593K–AVR–11/09 “0011”, giving a division factor of 8 at start up. This feature should be used if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the CKDIV8 Fuse setting. The Application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed. Table 6-10. Clock Prescaler Select CLKPS3 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 Clock Division Factor 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 1 1 8 0 1 0 0 16 0 1 0 1 32 0 1 1 0 64 0 1 1 1 128 1 0 0 0 256 1 0 0 1 Reserved 1 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 Reserved 1 1 0 0 Reserved 1 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 1 0 Reserved 1 6.10 CLKPS2 1 1 1 Reserved PLL The PLL is used to generate internal high frequency (48 MHz) clock for USB interface, the PLL input is generated from an external low-frequency (the crystal oscillator or external clock input pin from XTAL1). The internal RC Oscillator can not be used for USB operations. 6.10.1 48 Internal PLL for USB interface The internal PLL in AT90USB64/128 generates a clock frequency that is 24x multiplied from nominally 2 MHz input. The source of the 2 MHz PLL input clock is the output of the internal PLL clock prescaler that generates the 2 MHz (See Section 6.10.2 for PLL interface). AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 6-4. PLL Clocking System PLOCK PLLE Lock Detector PLL clock Prescaler XTAL1 XTAL2 clk 2MHz PLL 24x clk USB (48MHz) OSCILLATORS System Clock RC OSCILLATOR 8 MHz 6.10.2 PLL Control and Status Register – PLLCSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLLP2 $29 ($29) PLLP1 PLLP0 PLLE PLOCK Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 PLLCSR R/W 0 • Bit 7..5 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and always read as zero. • Bit 4..2 – PLLP2:0 PLL Prescaler These bits allow to configure the PLL input prescaler to generate the 2MHz input clock for the PLL. Table 6-11. PLL input prescaler configurations PLLP2 PLLP1 PLLP0 Clock Division Factor External XTAL required for USB operation (MHz) 0 0 0 Reserved - 0 0 1 Reserved - 0 1 0 Reserved - 0 1 1 4 8 1 0 0 Reserved - 1 0 1 8 16(1) 1 1 0 8(2) 16(2) 1 Note: (1) 1 1 Reserved - 1. For AT90USB128x only. Do not use with AT90USB64x. 2. For AT90USB64x only. Do not use with AT90USB128x. 49 7593K–AVR–11/09 • Bit 1 – PLLE: PLL Enable When the PLLE is set, the PLL is started. • Bit 0 – PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector When the PLOCK bit is set, the PLL is locked to the reference clock. After the PLL is enabled, it takes about 100 ms for the PLL to lock. To clear PLOCK, clear PLLE and PLLPx bits. 50 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 7. Power Management and Sleep Modes Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving power. The AVR provides various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s requirements. To enter any of the five sleep modes, the SE bit in SMCR must be written to logic one and a SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM2, SM1, and SM0 bits in the SMCR Register select which sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-down, Power-save, or Standby) will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 7-1 for a summary. If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector. Figure 6-1 on page 39 presents the different clock systems in the AT90USB64/128, and their distribution. The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. 7.0.1 Sleep Mode Control Register – SMCR The Sleep Mode Control Register contains control bits for power management. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – SM2 SM1 SM0 0 SE Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SMCR • Bits 3, 2, 1 – SM2..0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2, 1, and 0 These bits select between the six available sleep modes as shown in Table 7-1. Table 7-1. Sleep Mode Select SM2 SM0 0 0 0 Idle 0 0 1 ADC Noise Reduction 0 1 0 Power-down 0 1 1 Power-save 1 0 0 Reserved 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 Standby(1) 1 Note: SM1 Sleep Mode 1 1 Extended Standby(1) 1. Standby modes are only recommended for use with external crystals or resonators. • Bit 1 – SE: Sleep Enable The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up. 51 7593K–AVR–11/09 7.1 Idle Mode When the SM2..0 bits are written to 000, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the USB, SPI, USART, Analog Comparator, ADC, 2-wire Serial Interface, Timer/Counters, Watchdog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run. Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the Timer Overflow and USART Transmit Complete interrupts. If wake-up from the Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can be powered down by setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. 7.2 ADC Noise Reduction Mode When the SM2..0 bits are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, 2-wire Serial Interface address match, Timer/Counter2 and the Watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode basically halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run (including clkUSB). This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart form the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog System Reset, a Watchdog interrupt, a Brown-out Reset, a 2-wire serial interface interrupt, a Timer/Counter2 interrupt, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT7:4 or a pin change interrupt can wakeup the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode. 7.3 Power-down Mode When the SM2..0 bits are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Powerdown mode. In this mode, the external Oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, the 2wire Serial Interface, and the Watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out Reset, 2-wire Serial Interface address match, an external level interrupt on INT7:4, an external interrupt on INT3:0, a pin change interrupt or an asynchronous USB interrupt sources (VBUSTI, WAKEUPI, IDTI and HWUPI), can wake up the MCU. This sleep mode basically halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only. Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to “External Interrupts” on page 94 for details. When waking up from Power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL Fuses that define the Reset Time-out period, as described in “Clock Sources” on page 40. 7.4 Power-save Mode When the SM2..0 bits are written to 011, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Powersave mode. This mode is identical to Power-down, with one exception: 52 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 If Timer/Counter2 is enabled, it will keep running during sleep. The device can wake up from either Timer Overflow or Output Compare event from Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK2, and the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set. If Timer/Counter2 is not running, Power-down mode is recommended instead of Power-save mode. The Timer/Counter2 can be clocked both synchronously and asynchronously in Power-save mode. If the Timer/Counter2 is not using the asynchronous clock, the Timer/Counter Oscillator is stopped during sleep. If the Timer/Counter2 is not using the synchronous clock, the clock source is stopped during sleep. Note that even if the synchronous clock is running in Power-save, this clock is only available for the Timer/Counter2. 7.5 Standby Mode When the SM2..0 bits are 110 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Standby mode. This mode is identical to Power-down with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles. Note that in Stanby mode the PLL is disabled and the USB interface will not function. 7.6 Extended Standby Mode When the SM2..0 bits are 111 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Extended Standby mode. This mode is identical to Power-save mode with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Extended Standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes. Idle X ADCNRM X X X X(2) X (2) Notes: X(2) X X X(2) X X(2) X(3) X X X (2) X X X X X X X X Interrupts(4) USB Asynchonous Interrupts USB Synchronous Other I/O WDT Interrupt ADC SPM/ EEPROM Ready Timer2 X X(3) X X X(3) X X X Standby(1) Extended Standby X (3) (3) X Power-down Power-save X TWI Address Match Timer Osc Enabled clkASY X Wake-up Sources INT7:0 and Pin Change Oscillators clkADC clkIO clkFLASH Sleep Mode clkCPU Active Clock Domains Main Clock Source Enabled Table 7-2. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source. 2. If Timer/Counter2 is running in asynchronous mode. 3. For INT7:4, only level interrupt. 4. Asynchronous USB interrupts are VBUSTI, WAKEUPI, IDTI and HWUPI. 53 7593K–AVR–11/09 7.7 Power Reduction Register The Power Reduction Register, PRR, provides a method to stop the clock to individual peripherals to reduce power consumption. The current state of the peripheral is frozen and the I/O registers can not be read or written. Resources used by the peripheral when stopping the clock will remain occupied, hence the peripheral should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking up a module, which is done by clearing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same state as before shutdown. Module shutdown can be used in Idle mode and Active mode to significantly reduce the overall power consumption. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped. 7.7.1 Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 – PRTIM1 PRSPI - PRADC Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRR0 • Bit 7 - PRTWI: Power Reduction TWI Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the TWI by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the TWI again, the TWI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation. • Bit 6 - PRTIM2: Power Reduction Timer/Counter2 Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter2 module in synchronous mode (AS2 is 0). When the Timer/Counter2 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown. • Bit 5 - PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0 Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown. • Bit 4 - Res: Reserved bit This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 3 - PRTIM1: Power Reduction Timer/Counter1 Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When the Timer/Counter1 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown. • Bit 2 - PRSPI: Power Reduction Serial Peripheral Interface Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Serial Peripheral Interface by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the SPI again, the SPI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation. • Bit 1 - Res: Reserved bit These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 0 - PRADC: Power Reduction ADC Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down. The analog comparator cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down. 7.7.2 Power Reduction Register 1 - PRR1 Bit 54 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 PRUSB – – – PRTIM3 – – PRUSART1 Read/Write R/W R R R R/W R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRR1 0 • Bit 7 - PRUSB: Power Reduction USB Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USB by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the USB again, the USB should be re initialized to ensure proper operation. • Bit 6..4 - Res: Reserved bits These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 3 - PRTIM3: Power Reduction Timer/Counter3 Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter3 module. When the Timer/Counter3 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown. • Bit 2..1 - Res: Reserved bits These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 0 - PRUSART1: Power Reduction USART1 Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USART1 by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the USART1 again, the USART1 should be re initialized to ensure proper operation. 7.8 Minimizing Power Consumption There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the device’s functions are operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption. 7.8.1 Analog to Digital Converter If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be disabled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to “Analog to Digital Converter - ADC” on page 313 for details on ADC operation. 7.8.2 Analog Comparator When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In other sleep modes, the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the Analog Comparator is set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be disabled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled, independent of sleep mode. Refer to “Analog Comparator” on page 310 for details on how to configure the Analog Comparator. 7.8.3 Brown-out Detector If the Brown-out Detector is not needed by the application, this module should be turned off. If the Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL Fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute sig- 55 7593K–AVR–11/09 nificantly to the total current consumption. Refer to “Brown-out Detection” on page 60 for details on how to configure the Brown-out Detector. 7.8.4 Internal Voltage Reference The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out Detection, the Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as described in the sections above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to “Internal Voltage Reference” on page 62 for details on the start-up time. 7.8.5 Watchdog Timer If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, the module should be turned off. If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to “Interrupts” on page 68 for details on how to configure the Watchdog Timer. 7.8.6 Port Pins When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The most important is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input buffers of the device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed. In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to the section “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 76 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input signal is left floating or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive power. For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal level close to VCC/2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable Registers (DIDR1 and DIDR0). Refer to “Digital Input Disable Register 1 – DIDR1” on page 312 and “Digital Input Disable Register 0 – DIDR0” on page 331 for details. 7.8.7 On-chip Debug System If the On-chip debug system is enabled by the OCDEN Fuse and the chip enters sleep mode, the main clock source is enabled, and hence, always consumes power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. There are three alternative ways to disable the OCD system: • Disable the OCDEN Fuse. • Disable the JTAGEN Fuse. • Write one to the JTD bit in MCUCR. 56 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 8. System Control and Reset 8.1 Resetting the AVR During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from the Reset Vector. The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a JMP – Absolute Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa. The circuit diagram in Figure 8-1 shows the reset logic. Table 8-1 defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry. The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes active. This does not require any clock source to be running. After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT and CKSEL Fuses. The different selections for the delay period are presented in “Clock Sources” on page 40. 8.2 Reset Sources The AT90USB64/128 has five sources of reset: • Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset threshold (VPOT). • External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer than the minimum pulse length. • Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and the Watchdog is enabled. • Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the Brown-out Reset threshold (VBOT) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled. • JTAG AVR Reset. The MCU is reset as long as there is a logic one in the Reset Register, one of the scan chains of the JTAG system. Refer to the section “IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundaryscan” on page 338 for details. 57 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 8-1. Reset Logic DATA BUS PORF BORF EXTRF WDRF JTRF MCU Status Register (MCUSR) Power-on Reset Circuit Brown-out Reset Circuit BODLEVEL [2..0] Pull-up Resistor SPIKE FILTER JTAG Reset Register Watchdog Oscillator Clock Generator Delay Counters CK TIMEOUT CKSEL[3:0] SUT[1:0] Table 8-1. Reset Characteristics Symbol Parameter Condition Min Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling) VPOR VCC Start Voltage to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal VCC Rise Rate to ensure internal Power_on Reset signal RESET Pin Threshold Voltage Minimum pulse width on RESET Pin Notes: 8.3 2.3 V 0.1 V 0.2 Vcc tRST V 0.3 VRST 2.3 -0.1 VCCRR Units 1.3 (1) Max 1.4 Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising) VPOT Typ 5V, 25°C V/ms 0.85 Vcc 400 V ns 1. The POR will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling) Power-on Reset A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detection level is defined in Table 8-1. The POR is activated whenever VCC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the start-up Reset, as well as to detect a failure in supply voltage. A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is properly reset from Power-on if Vcc started from VPOR with a rise rate upper than VCCRR. Reaching the Power-on Reset threshold 58 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay, when VCC decreases below the detection level. Figure 8-2. VCC MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC VPOR VPOT VRST RESET tTOUT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET Figure 8-3. VCC RESET TIME-OUT MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally VPOR VPOT VRST tTOUT INTERNAL RESET Note: 8.4 If VPOR or VCCRR parameter range can not be followed, an External Reset is required. External Reset An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse width (see Table 8-1) will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – VRST – on its positive edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period – tTOUT – has expired. 59 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 8-4. External Reset During Operation CC 8.5 Brown-out Detection AT90USB64/128 has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level during operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the BODLEVEL Fuses. The trigger level has a hysteresis to ensure spike free Brown-out Detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as VBOT+ = VBOT + VHYST/2 and VBOT- = VBOT - VHYST/2.. Table 8-2. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding BODLEVEL 2..0 Fuses Min VBOT 111 Typ VBOT Max VBOT Units BOD Disabled 110 101 Reserved 100 011 2.6 2.8 010 3.2 3.4 3.6 001 3.3 3.5 3.7 000 Table 8-3. 2.4 4.1 4.3 V 4.5 Brown-out Characteristics Symbol Parameter VHYST Brown-out Detector Hysteresis tBOD Min Pulse Width on Brown-out Reset Ibod Brown-out Detector Consumption Min Typ 50 Max Units mV ns 25 µA When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a value below the trigger level (VBOT- in Figure 8-5), the Brown-out Reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 8-5), the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period tTOUT has expired. The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for longer than tBOD given in Table 8-1. 60 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 8-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation VCC VBOT+ VBOT- RESET tTOUT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET 8.6 Watchdog Reset When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to page 63 for details on operation of the Watchdog Timer. Figure 8-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation CC CK 8.6.1 MCU Status Register – MCUSR The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF 0 PORF Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 See Bit Description MCUSR • Bit 4 – JTRF: JTAG Reset Flag This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. 61 7593K–AVR–11/09 • Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag. To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then Reset the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the Reset Flags. 8.7 Internal Voltage Reference AT90USB64/128 features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for Brown-out Detection, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator or the ADC. 8.7.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The start-up time is given in Table 8-4. To save power, the reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations: 1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [2..0] Fuse). 2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the ACBG bit in ACSR). 3. When the ADC is enabled. Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering Power-down mode. Table 8-4. Symbol Internal Voltage Reference Characteristics Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units 1.0 1.1 1.2 V 70 µs VBG tBG Bandgap reference start-up time 40 IBG 62 Bandgap reference voltage Bandgap reference current consumption 10 µA AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 8.8 Watchdog Timer AT90USB64/128 has an Enhanced Watchdog Timer (WDT). The main features are: • Clocked from separate On-chip Oscillator • 3 Operating modes – Interrupt – System Reset – Interrupt and System Reset • Selectable Time-out period from 16ms to 8s • Possible Hardware fuse Watchdog always on (WDTON) for fail-safe mode Watchdog Timer 128kHz OSCILLATOR WATCHDOG RESET WDE OSC/2K OSC/4K OSC/8K OSC/16K OSC/32K OSC/64K OSC/128K OSC/256K OSC/512K OSC/1024K Figure 8-7. WDP0 WDP1 WDP2 WDP3 MCU RESET WDIF WDIE INTERRUPT The Watchdog Timer (WDT) is a timer counting cycles of a separate on-chip 128 kHz oscillator. The WDT gives an interrupt or a system reset when the counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal operation mode, it is required that the system uses the WDR - Watchdog Timer Reset - instruction to restart the counter before the time-out value is reached. If the system doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset will be issued. In Interrupt mode, the WDT gives an interrupt when the timer expires. This interrupt can be used to wake the device from sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer. One example is to limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an interrupt when the operation has run longer than expected. In System Reset mode, the WDT gives a reset when the timer expires. This is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code. The third mode, Interrupt and System Reset mode, combines the other two modes by first giving an interrupt and then switch to System Reset mode. This mode will for instance allow a safe shutdown by saving critical parameters before a system reset. The Watchdog always on (WDTON) fuse, if programmed, will force the Watchdog Timer to System Reset mode. With the fuse programmed the System Reset mode bit (WDE) and Interrupt mode bit (WDIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respectively. To further ensure program security, alterations to the Watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences. The sequence for clearing WDE and changing time-out configuration is as follows: 63 7593K–AVR–11/09 1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the Watchdog change enable bit (WDCE) and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the WDE bit. 2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and Watchdog prescaler bits (WDP) as desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation. The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the Watchdog Timer. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the execution of these functions. Assembly Code Example(1) WDT_off: ; Turn off global interrupt cli ; Reset Watchdog Timer wdr ; Clear WDRF in MCUSR in r16, MCUSR andi r16, ~(0<<WDRF) out MCUSR, r16 ; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE ; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out in r16, WDTCSR ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE) out WDTCSR, r16 ; Turn off WDT ldi r16, (0<<WDE) out WDTCSR, r16 ; Turn on global interrupt sei ret C Code Example(1) void WDT_off(void) { __disable_interrupt(); __watchdog_reset(); /* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */ MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF); /* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */ /* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out */ WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE); /* Turn off WDT */ WDTCSR = 0x00; __enable_interrupt(); } Note: 64 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note: If the Watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway pointer or brown-out condition, the device will be reset and the Watchdog Timer will stay enabled. If the code is not set up to handle the Watchdog, this might lead to an eternal loop of time-out resets. To avoid this situation, the application software should always clear the Watchdog System Reset Flag (WDRF) and the WDE control bit in the initialisation routine, even if the Watchdog is not in use. The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the time-out value of the Watchdog Timer. Assembly Code Example(1) WDT_Prescaler_Change: ; Turn off global interrupt cli ; Reset Watchdog Timer wdr ; Start timed sequence in r16, WDTCSR ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE) out WDTCSR, r16 ; -- Got four cycles to set the new values from here - ; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) ldi r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0) out WDTCSR, r16 ; -- Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles - ; Turn on global interrupt sei ret C Code Example(1) void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void) { __disable_interrupt(); __watchdog_reset(); /* Start timed equence */ WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE); /* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) */ WDTCSR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0); __enable_interrupt(); } Note: 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included. Note: The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP bits, since a change in the WDP bits can result in a time-out when switching to a shorter time-out period. 8.8.1 Watchdog Timer Control Register - WDTCSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 0 WDTCSR 65 7593K–AVR–11/09 • Bit 7 - WDIF: Watchdog Interrupt Flag This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer is configured for interrupt. WDIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG and WDIE are set, the Watchdog Time-out Interrupt is executed. • Bit 6 - WDIE: Watchdog Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Watchdog Interrupt is enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with this setting, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt Mode, and the corresponding interrupt is executed if time-out in the Watchdog Timer occurs. If WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System Reset Mode. The first time-out in the Watchdog Timer will set WDIF. Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear WDIE and WDIF automatically by hardware (the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode). This is useful for keeping the Watchdog Timer security while using the interrupt. To stay in Interrupt and System Reset Mode, WDIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not be done within the interrupt service routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function of the Watchdog System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out, a System Reset will be applied. Table 8-5. Watchdog Timer Configuration WDTON WDE WDIE Mode Action on Time-out 0 0 0 Stopped None 0 0 1 Interrupt Mode Interrupt 0 1 0 System Reset Mode Reset 0 1 1 Interrupt and System Reset Mode Interrupt, then go to System Reset Mode 1 x x System Reset Mode Reset • Bit 4 - WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the WDE bit, and/or change the prescaler bits, WDCE must be set. Once written to one, hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles. • Bit 3 - WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is set. To clear WDE, WDRF must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during conditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the failure. • Bit 5, 2..0 - WDP3..0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0 The WDP3..0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer is running. The different prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in Table 8-6 on page 67. 66 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 . Table 8-6. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select WDP3 WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 Number of WDT Oscillator Cycles Typical Time-out at VCC = 5.0V 0 0 0 0 2K (2048) cycles 16 ms 0 0 0 1 4K (4096) cycles 32 ms 0 0 1 0 8K (8192) cycles 64 ms 0 0 1 1 16K (16384) cycles 0.125 s 0 1 0 0 32K (32768) cycles 0.25 s 0 1 0 1 64K (65536) cycles 0.5 s 0 1 1 0 128K (131072) cycles 1.0 s 0 1 1 1 256K (262144) cycles 2.0 s 1 0 0 0 512K (524288) cycles 4.0 s 1 0 0 1 1024K (1048576) cycles 8.0 s 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Reserved 67 7593K–AVR–11/09 9. Interrupts This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in AT90USB64/128. For a general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling, refer to “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 16. 9.1 Interrupt Vectors in AT90USB64/128 Table 9-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Vector No. Source Interrupt Definition 1 $0000(1) RESET External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Watchdog Reset, and JTAG AVR Reset 2 $0002 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0 3 $0004 INT1 External Interrupt Request 1 4 $0006 INT2 External Interrupt Request 2 5 $0008 INT3 External Interrupt Request 3 6 $000A INT4 External Interrupt Request 4 7 $000C INT5 External Interrupt Request 5 8 $000E INT6 External Interrupt Request 6 9 $0010 INT7 External Interrupt Request 7 10 $0012 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0 11 $0014 USB General USB General Interrupt request 12 $0016 USB Endpoint/Pipe USB ENdpoint/Pipe Interrupt request 13 $0018 WDT Watchdog Time-out Interrupt 14 $001A TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A 15 $001C TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B 16 $001E TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow 17 $0020 TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event 18 $0022 TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A 19 $0024 TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B 20 $0026 TIMER1 COMPC Timer/Counter1 Compare Match C 21 $0028 TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow 22 $002A TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A 23 $002C TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 Compare match B 24 $002E TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow 25 $0030 SPI, STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete 26 $0032 USART1 RX USART1 Rx Complete 27 $0034 USART1 UDRE USART1 Data Register Empty 28 68 Program Address(2) $0036 USART1TX USART1 Tx Complete AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 9-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors (Continued) Vector No. Program Address(2) 29 Source Interrupt Definition $0038 ANALOG COMP Analog Comparator 30 $003A ADC ADC Conversion Complete 31 $003C EE READY EEPROM Ready 32 $003E TIMER3 CAPT Timer/Counter3 Capture Event 33 $0040 TIMER3 COMPA Timer/Counter3 Compare Match A 34 $0042 TIMER3 COMPB Timer/Counter3 Compare Match B 35 $0044 TIMER3 COMPC Timer/Counter3 Compare Match C 36 $0046 TIMER3 OVF Timer/Counter3 Overflow 37 $0048 TWI 2-wire Serial Interface $004A SPM READY Store Program Memory Ready 38 Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the Boot Loader address at reset, see “Memory Programming” on page 366. 2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, Interrupt Vectors will be moved to the start of the Boot Flash Section. The address of each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added to the start address of the Boot Flash Section. Table 9-2 shows reset and Interrupt Vectors placement for the various combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa. 69 7593K–AVR–11/09 Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement(1) Table 9-2. BOOTRST IVSEL Reset Address Interrupt Vectors Start Address 1 0 0x0000 0x0002 1 1 0x0000 Boot Reset Address + 0x0002 0 0 Boot Reset Address 0x0002 0 1 Boot Reset Address Boot Reset Address + 0x0002 Note: 1. The Boot Reset Address is shown in Table 28-8 on page 364. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed. 9.1.1 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Space The General Interrupt Control Register controls the placement of the Interrupt Vector table. 9.1.2 MCU Control Register – MCUCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JTD – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE Read/Write R/W R R R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MCUCR • Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt Vector Select When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the Interrupt Vectors are placed at the start of the Flash memory. When this bit is set (one), the Interrupt Vectors are moved to the beginning of the Boot Loader section of the Flash. The actual address of the start of the Boot Flash Section is determined by the BOOTSZ Fuses. Refer to the section “Memory Programming” on page 366 for details. To avoid unintentional changes of Interrupt Vector tables, a special write procedure must be followed to change the IVSEL bit: a. Write the Interrupt Vector Change Enable (IVCE) bit to one. b. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE. Interrupts will automatically be disabled while this sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled in the cycle IVCE is set, and they remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to IVSEL. If IVSEL is not written, interrupts remain disabled for four cycles. The I-bit in the Status Register is unaffected by the automatic disabling. Note: If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section and Boot Lock bit BLB02 is programmed, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section and Boot Lock bit BLB12 is programed, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. Refer to the section “Memory Programming” on page 366 for details on Boot Lock bits. • Bit 0 – IVCE: Interrupt Vector Change Enable 70 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the IVCE bit will disable interrupts, as explained in the IVSEL description above. See Code Example below. Assembly Code Example Move_interrupts: ; Get MCUCR in r16, MCUCR mov r17, r16 ; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors ori r16, (1<<IVCE) out MCUCR, r16 ; Move interrupts to Boot Flash section ori r17, (1<<IVSEL) out MCUCR, r17 ret C Code Example void Move_interrupts(void) { unsigned char temp; /* Get MCUCR */ temp = MCUCR; /* Enable change of Interrupt Vectors */ MCUCR = temp | (1<<IVCE); /* Move interrupts to Boot Flash section */ MCUCR = temp | (1<<IVSEL); } 71 7593K–AVR–11/09 10. I/O-Ports 10.1 Introduction All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 10-1. Refer to “Electrical Characteristics for AT90USB64/128” on page 398 for a complete list of parameters. Figure 10-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” represents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Registers and bit locations are listed in “Register Description for I/O-Ports” on page 90. Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register – PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the corresponding bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set. Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 73. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 77. Refer to the individual module sections for a full description of the alternate functions. 72 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the other pins in the port as general digital I/O. 10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 10-2 shows a functional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn. Figure 10-2. General Digital I/O(1) PUD Q D DDxn Q CLR WDx RESET DATA BUS RDx 1 Q Pxn D 0 PORTxn Q CLR RESET WRx SLEEP WPx RRx SYNCHRONIZER D Q L Q D RPx Q PINxn Q clk I/O PUD: SLEEP: clkI/O: Note: 10.2.1 PULLUP DISABLE SLEEP CONTROL I/O CLOCK WDx: RDx: WRx: RRx: RPx: WPx: WRITE DDRx READ DDRx WRITE PORTx READ PORTx REGISTER READ PORTx PIN WRITE PINx REGISTER 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. Configuring the Pin Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register Description for I/O-Ports” on page 90, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address. The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin. If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running. 73 7593K–AVR–11/09 If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero). 10.2.2 Toggling the Pin Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port. 10.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) occurs. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully acceptable, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all pullups in all ports. Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11) as an intermediate step. Table 10-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value. Table 10-1. Port Pin Configurations DDxn I/O Pull-up 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z) 0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low. 0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z) 1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink) 1 74 PUD (in MCUCR) 0 10.2.4 PORTxn 1 X Output No Output High (Source) Comment Reading the Pin Value Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn Register bit. As shown in Figure 10-2, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 10-3 shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 10-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value SYSTEM CLK INSTRUCTIONS XXX XXX in r17, PINx SYNC LATCH PINxn r17 0x00 0xFF t pd, max t pd, min Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion. When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indicated in Figure 10-4. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is 1 system clock period. Figure 10-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value SYSTEM CLK r16 INSTRUCTIONS 0xFF out PORTx, r16 nop in r17, PINx SYNC LATCH PINxn r17 0x00 0xFF t pd The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define the port pins from 4 to 7 as input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins. 75 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Example(1) ... ; Define pull-ups and set outputs high ; Define directions for port pins ldi r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0) ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0) out PORTB,r16 out DDRB,r17 ; Insert nop for synchronization nop ; Read port pins in r16,PINB ... C Code Example unsigned char i; ... /* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */ /* Define directions for port pins */ PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0); DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0); /* Insert nop for synchronization*/ __no_operation(); /* Read port pins */ i = PINB; ... Note: 10.2.5 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pullups are set on pins 0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers. Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes As shown in Figure 10-2, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the schmitt-trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep Controller in Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2. SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various other alternate functions as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 77. If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as “Interrupt on Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested logic change. 10.2.6 76 Unconnected Pins If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, float- AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 ing inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle mode). The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up. In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or pull-down. Connecting unused pins directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if the pin is accidentally configured as an output. 10.3 Alternate Port Functions Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 10-5 shows how the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 10-2 can be overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but the figure serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family. Figure 10-5. Alternate Port Functions(1) PUOExn PUOVxn 1 PUD 0 DDOExn DDOVxn 1 Q D DDxn 0 Q CLR WDx PVOExn RESET RDx 1 DATA BUS PVOVxn 1 Pxn Q 0 D 0 PORTxn PTOExn Q CLR DIEOExn WPx DIEOVxn RESET WRx 1 0 RRx SLEEP SYNCHRONIZER D SET Q RPx Q D PINxn L CLR Q CLR Q clk I/O DIxn AIOxn PUOExn: PUOVxn: DDOExn: DDOVxn: PVOExn: PVOVxn: DIEOExn: DIEOVxn: SLEEP: PTOExn: Note: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE SLEEP CONTROL Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE PUD: WDx: RDx: RRx: WRx: RPx: WPx: clkI/O: DIxn: AIOxn: PULLUP DISABLE WRITE DDRx READ DDRx READ PORTx REGISTER WRITE PORTx READ PORTx PIN WRITE PINx I/O CLOCK DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin. 77 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 10-2 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Figure 10-5 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function. Table 10-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions Signal Name Full Name Description PUOE Pull-up Override Enable If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010. PUOV Pull-up Override Value If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn, PORTxn, and PUD Register bits. DDOE Data Direction Override Enable If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by the DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver is enabled by the DDxn Register bit. DDOV Data Direction Override Value If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn Register bit. PVOE Port Value Override Enable If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is controlled by the PORTxn Register bit. PVOV Port Value Override Value If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the setting of the PORTxn Register bit. PTOE Port Toggle Override Enable If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted. DIEOE Digital Input Enable Override Enable If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital Input Enable is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode). DIEOV Digital Input Enable Override Value If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled when DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode). DI Digital Input This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure, the signal is connected to the output of the schmitt trigger but before the synchronizer. Unless the Digital Input is used as a clock source, the module with the alternate function will use its own synchronizer. AIO Analog Input/Output This is the Analog Input/output to/from alternate functions. The signal is connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi-directionally. The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further details. 78 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.3.1 MCU Control Register – MCUCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JTD – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE Read/Write R/W R R R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MCUCR • Bit 4 – PUD: Pull-up Disable When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See “Configuring the Pin” on page 73 for more details about this feature. 10.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port A The Port A has an alternate function as the address low byte and data lines for the External Memory Interface. Table 10-3. Port Pin Port A Pins Alternate Functions Alternate Function PA7 AD7 (External memory interface address and data bit 7) PA6 AD6 (External memory interface address and data bit 6) PA5 AD5 (External memory interface address and data bit 5) PA4 AD4 (External memory interface address and data bit 4) PA3 AD3 (External memory interface address and data bit 3) PA2 AD2 (External memory interface address and data bit 2) PA1 AD1 (External memory interface address and data bit 1) PA0 AD0 (External memory interface address and data bit 0) Table 10-4 and Table 10-5 relates the alternate functions of Port A to the overriding signals shown in Figure 10-5 on page 77. Table 10-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA7..PA4 Signal Name PA7/AD7 PUOE SRE PA6/AD6 PA4/AD4 SRE (1) PA5/AD5 SRE SRE PUOV ~(WR | ADA ) • PORTA7 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA6 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA5 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA4 • PUD DDOE SRE SRE SRE SRE DDOV WR | ADA WR | ADA WR | ADA WR | ADA PVOE SRE SRE SRE SRE PVOV A7 • ADA | D7 OUTPUT • WR A6 • ADA | D6 OUTPUT • WR A5 • ADA | D5 OUTPUT • WR A4 • ADA | D4 OUTPUT • WR DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI D7 INPUT D6 INPUT D5 INPUT D4 INPUT AIO – – – – 79 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 1. ADA is short for ADdress Active and represents the time when address is output. See “External Memory Interface” on page 30 for details. Table 10-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA3..PA0 Signal Name PA2/AD2 PA1/AD1 PA0/AD0 PUOE SRE SRE SRE SRE PUOV ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA3 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA2 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA1 • PUD ~(WR | ADA) • PORTA0 • PUD DDOE SRE SRE SRE SRE DDOV WR | ADA WR | ADA WR | ADA WR | ADA PVOE SRE SRE SRE SRE PVOV A3 • ADA | D3 OUTPUT • WR A2• ADA | D2 OUTPUT • WR A1 • ADA | D1 OUTPUT • WR A0 • ADA | D0 OUTPUT • WR DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI D3 INPUT D2 INPUT D1 INPUT D0 INPUT AIO 10.3.3 PA3/AD3 – – – – Alternate Functions of Port B The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 10-6. Table 10-6. Port Pin Port B Pins Alternate Functions Alternate Functions PB7 OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter0, Output Compare and PWM Output C for Timer/Counter1 or Pin Change Interrupt 7) PB6 OC1B/PCINT6 (Output Compare and PWM Output B for Timer/Counter1 or Pin Change Interrupt 6) PB5 OC1A/PCINT5 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter1 or Pin Change Interrupt 5) PB4 OC2A/PCINT4 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter2 or Pin Change Interrupt 4) PB3 PDO/MISO/PCINT3 (Programming Data Output or SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output or Pin Change Interrupt 3) PB2 PDI/MOSI/PCINT2 (Programming Data Input orSPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input or Pin Change Interrupt 2) PB1 SCK/PCINT1 (SPI Bus Serial Clock or Pin Change Interrupt 1) PB0 SS/PCINT0 (SPI Slave Select input or Pin Change Interrupt 0) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7, Bit 7 OC0A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB7 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 Output Compare. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB7 set “one”) to serve this function. The OC0A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. 80 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 OC1C, Output Compare Match C output: The PB7 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare C. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB7 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1C pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT7, Pin Change Interrupt source 7: The PB7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • OC1B/PCINT6, Bit 6 OC1B, Output Compare Match B output: The PB6 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB6 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT6, Pin Change Interrupt source 6: The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • OC1A/PCINT5, Bit 5 OC1A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB5 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB5 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT5, Pin Change Interrupt source 5: The PB5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • OC2A/PCINT4, Bit 4 OC2A, Output Compare Match output: The PB4 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter2 Output Compare. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB4 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC2A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT4, Pin Change Interrupt source 4: The PB4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • PDO/MISO/PCINT3 – Port B, Bit 3 PDO, SPI Serial Programming Data Output. During Serial Program Downloading, this pin is used as data output line for the AT90USB64/128. MISO: Master Data input, Slave Data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a master, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB3. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB3. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB3 bit. PCINT3, Pin Change Interrupt source 3: The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • PDI/MOSI/PCINT2 – Port B, Bit 2 PDI, SPI Serial Programming Data Input. During Serial Program Downloading, this pin is used as data input line for the AT90USB64/128. MOSI: SPI Master Data output, Slave Data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB2. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB2. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB2 bit. PCINT2, Pin Change Interrupt source 2: The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • SCK/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 1 SCK: Master Clock output, Slave Clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB1. When the SPI0 is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB1. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB1 bit. 81 7593K–AVR–11/09 PCINT1, Pin Change Interrupt source 1: The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • SS/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 0 SS: Slave Port Select input. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB0. As a slave, the SPI is activated when this pin is driven low. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB0. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB0 bit. Table 10-7 and Table 10-8 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals shown in Figure 10-5 on page 77. SPI MSTR INPUT and SPI SLAVE OUTPUT constitute the MISO signal, while MOSI is divided into SPI MSTR OUTPUT and SPI SLAVE INPUT. PCINT0, Pin Change Interrupt source 0: The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.. Table 10-7. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7..PB4 Signal Name PB7/PCINT7/OC0A/ OC1C PB6/PCINT6/OC 1B PB5/PCINT5/OC 1A PB4/PCINT4/OC 2A PUOE 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 0 0 0 DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE OC0/OC1C ENABLE OC1B ENABLE OC1A ENABLE OC2A ENABLE PVOV OC0/OC1C OC1B OC1A OC2A DIEOE PCINT7 • PCIE0 PCINT6 • PCIE0 PCINT5 • PCIE0 PCINT4 • PCIE0 DIEOV 1 1 1 1 DI PCINT7 INPUT PCINT6 INPUT PCINT5 INPUT PCINT4 INPUT AIO – – – – Table 10-8. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB0 Signal Name PB2/PDI/PCINT2/ MOSI PB1/PCINT1/ SCK PB0/PCINT0/ SS PUOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR PUOV PORTB3 • PUD PORTB2 • PUD PORTB1 • PUD PORTB0 • PUD DDOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR 0 PVOV SPI SLAVE OUTPUT SPI MSTR OUTPUT SCK OUTPUT 0 DIEOE PCINT3 • PCIE0 PCINT2 • PCIE0 PCINT1 • PCIE0 PCINT0 • PCIE0 DIEOV 1 1 1 1 DI SPI MSTR INPUT PCINT3 INPUT SPI SLAVE INPUT PCINT2 INPUT SCK INPUT PCINT1 INPUT SPI SS PCINT0 INPUT AIO 82 PB3/PD0/PCINT3/ MISO – – – – AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.3.4 Alternate Functions of Port C The Port C alternate function is as follows: Table 10-9. Port C Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PC7 A15/IC.3/CLKO(External Memory interface address bit 15 or Input Capture Timer 3 or CLKO (Divided System Clock) PC6 A14/OC.3A(External Memory interface address bit 14 or Output Compare and PWM output A for Timer/Counter3) PC5 A13/OC.3B(External Memory interface address bit 13 or Output Compare and PWM output B for Timer/Counter3) PC4 A12/OC.3C(External Memory interface address bit 12 or Output Compare and PWM output C for Timer/Counter3) PC3 A11/T.3(External Memory interface address bit 11or Timer/Counter3 Clok Input) PC2 A10(External Memory interface address bit 10) PC1 A9(External Memory interface address bit 9) PC0 A8(External Memory interface address bit 8) Table 10-10 and Table 10-11 relate the alternate functions of Port C to the overriding signals shown in Figure 10-5 on page 77. Table 10-10. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC7..PC4 Signal Name PC7/A15/IC.3/CLK O PUOE PC6/A14/OC.3A PC5/A13/OC.3B PC4/A12/OC.3C SRE • (XMM<1) SRE • (XMM<2)|OC3A enable SRE • (XMM<3)|OC3B enable SRE • (XMM<4)|OC3C enable PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE SRE • (XMM<1) SRE • (XMM<2) SRE • (XMM<3) SRE • (XMM<4) DDOV 1 1 1 1 PVOE SRE • (XMM<1) SRE • (XMM<2) SRE • (XMM<3) SRE • (XMM<4) PVOV A15 if (SRE.XMM<2) then A14 else OC3A if (SRE.XMM<2) then A13 else OC3B if (SRE.XMM<2) then A12 else OC3C DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI ICP3 input – – – AIO – – – – 83 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 10-11. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC3..PC0 Signal Name PC2/A10 PC1/A9 PC0/A8 PUOE SRE • (XMM<5) SRE • (XMM<6) SRE • (XMM<7) SRE • (XMM<7) PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE SRE • (XMM<5) SRE • (XMM<6) SRE • (XMM<7) SRE • (XMM<7) DDOV 1 1 1 1 PVOE SRE • (XMM<5) SRE • (XMM<6) SRE • (XMM<7) SRE • (XMM<7) PVOV A11 A10 A9 A8 DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI T3 input – – – AIO 10.3.5 PC3/A11/T.3 – – – – Alternate Functions of Port D The Port D pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 10-12. Table 10-12. Port D Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PD7 T0 (Timer/Counter0 Clock Input) PD6 T1 (Timer/Counter1 Clock Input) PD5 XCK1 (USART1 External Clock Input/Output) PD4 ICP1 (Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Trigger) PD3 INT3/TXD1 (External Interrupt3 Input or USART1 Transmit Pin) PD2 INT2/RXD1 (External Interrupt2 Input or USART1 Receive Pin) PD1 INT1/SDA/OC2B (External Interrupt1 Input or TWI Serial DAta or Output Compare for Timer/Counter2) PD0 INT0/SCL/OC0B (External Interrupt0 Input or TWI Serial CLock or Output Compare for Timer/Counter0) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • T0 – Port D, Bit 7 T0, Timer/Counter0 counter source. • T1 – Port D, Bit 6 T1, Timer/Counter1 counter source. • XCK1 – Port D, Bit 5 XCK1, USART1 External clock. The Data Direction Register (DDD5) controls whether the clock is output (DDD5 set) or input (DDD5 cleared). The XCK1 pin is active only when the USART1 operates in Synchronous mode. 84 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • ICP1 – Port D, Bit 4 ICP1 – Input Capture Pin 1: The PD4 pin can act as an input capture pin for Timer/Counter1. • INT3/TXD1 – Port D, Bit 3 INT3, External Interrupt source 3: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. TXD1, Transmit Data (Data output pin for the USART1). When the USART1 Transmitter is enabled, this pin is configured as an output regardless of the value of DDD3. • INT2/RXD1 – Port D, Bit 2 INT2, External Interrupt source 2. The PD2 pin can serve as an External Interrupt source to the MCU. RXD1, Receive Data (Data input pin for the USART1). When the USART1 receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDD2. When the USART forces this pin to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTD2 bit. • INT1/SDA/OC2B – Port D, Bit 1 INT1, External Interrupt source 1. The PD1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. SDA, 2-wire Serial Interface Data: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, pin PD1 is disconnected from the port and becomes the Serial Data I/O pin for the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with slewrate limitation. • INT0/SCL/OC0B – Port D, Bit 0 INT0, External Interrupt source 0. The PD0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. SCL, 2-wire Serial Interface Clock: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2wire Serial Interface, pin PD0 is disconnected from the port and becomes the Serial Clock I/O pin for the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with slew-rate limitation. Table 10-13 and Table 10-14 relates the alternate functions of Port D to the overriding signals shown in Figure 10-5 on page 77. 85 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 10-13. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD7..PD4 Signal Name PD7/T0 PD6/T1 PD5/XCK1 PD4/ICP1 PUOE 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT ENABLE 0 DDOV 0 0 1 0 PVOE 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT ENABLE 0 PVOV 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT 0 DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI T0 INPUT T1 INPUT XCK1 INPUT ICP1 INPUT AIO – – – – Table 10-14. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PD3..PD0(1) Signal Name PD3/INT3/TXD1 PD2/INT2/RXD1 PD1/INT1/SDA/ OC2B PD0/INT0/SCL/ OC0B PUOE TXEN1 RXEN1 TWEN TWEN PUOV 0 PORTD2 • PUD PORTD1 • PUD PORTD0 • PUD DDOE TXEN1 RXEN1 TWEN TWEN DDOV 1 0 SDA_OUT SCL_OUT PVOE TXEN1 0 TWEN | OC2B ENABLE TWEN | OC0B ENABLE PVOV TXD1 0 OC2B OC0B DIEOE INT3 ENABLE INT2 ENABLE INT1 ENABLE INT0 ENABLE DIEOV 1 1 1 1 DI INT3 INPUT INT2 INPUT/RXD1 INT1 INPUT INT0 INPUT AIO – – SDA INPUT SCL INPUT Note: 86 1. When enabled, the 2-wire Serial Interface enables Slew-Rate controls on the output pins PD0 and PD1. This is not shown in this table. In addition, spike filters are connected between the AIO outputs shown in the port figure and the digital logic of the TWI module. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.3.6 Alternate Functions of Port E The Port E pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 10-15. Table 10-15. Port E Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PE7 INT7/AIN.1/UVCON (External Interrupt 7 Input, Analog Comparator Positive Input or VBUS Control) PE6 INT6/AIN.0 (External Interrupt 6 Input or Analog Comparator Positive Input) PE5 INT5/TOSC2 (External Interrupt 5 Input or RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2)) PE4 INT4/TOSC2 (External Interrupt4 Input or RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2) PE3 UID PE2 ALE/HWB (Address latch to extenal memory or Hardware bootloader activation) PE1 RD (Read strobe to external memory) PE0 WR (Write strobe to external memory) • INT7/AIN.1/UVCON – Port E, Bit 7 INT7, External Interrupt source 7: The PE7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. AIN1 – Analog Comparator Negative input. This pin is directly connected to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. UVCON - When using USB host mode, this pin allows to control an external VBUS generator (active high). • INT6/AIN.0 – Port E, Bit 6 INT6, External Interrupt source 6: The PE6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. AIN0 – Analog Comparator Negative input. This pin is directly connected to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. • INT5/TOSC2 – Port E, Bit 5 INT5, External Interrupt source 5: The PE5 pin can serve as an External Interrupt source. TOSC2, Timer/Counter2 Oscillator pin1. When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set to enable asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, pin PE5 is disconnected from the port, and becomes the ouput of the inverting Oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a crystal is connected to this pin, and the pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • INT4/TOSC1 – Port E, Bit 4 INT4, External Interrupt source 4: The PE4 pin can serve as an External Interrupt source. TOSC1, Timer/Counter2 Oscillator pin2. When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set to enable asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, pin PE4 is disconnected from the port, and becomes the input of the inverting Oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a crystal is connected to this pin, and the pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • UID – Port E, Bit 3 ID pin of the USB bus. • ALE/HWB – Port E, Bit 2 87 7593K–AVR–11/09 ALE is the external data memory Address latch enable. HWB allows to execute the bootloader section after reset when tied to ground during external reset pulse. The HWB mode of this pin is active only when the HWBE fuse is enable. • RD – Port E, Bit 1 RD is the external data memory read control enable. • WR – Port E, Bit 0 WR is the external data memory write control enable. Table 10-16. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PE7..PE4 Signal Name PE7/INT7/AIN.1/ UVCON PE6/INT6/AIN.0 PE5/INT5/ TOSC1 PE4/INT4/ TOSC2 PUOE 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE UVCONE 0 0 0 DDOV UVCONE 0 0 0 PVOE UVCONE 0 0 0 PVOV UVCON 0 0 0 DIEOE INT7 ENABLE INT6 ENABLE INT5 ENABLE INT4 ENABLE DIEOV 1 1 1 1 DI INT7 INPUT INT6 INPUT INT5 INPUT INT4 INPUT AIO AIN1 INPUT AIN0 INPUT – – Table 10-17. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PE3..PE0 Signal Name PE2/ALE/HWB PE1/RD PE0/WR PUOE UIDE 0 SRE SRE PUOV 1 0 0 0 DDOE UIDE SRE SRE SRE DDOV 0 1 1 0 PVOE 0 SRE SRE SRE PVOV 0 ALE RD WR DIEOE UIDE 0 0 0 DIEOV 1 0 0 1 DI UID HWB – – PE0 0 0 0 0 AIO 88 PE3/UID – – – – AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.3.7 Alternate Functions of Port F The Port F has an alternate function as analog input for the ADC as shown in Table 10-18. If some Port F pins are configured as outputs, it is essential that these do not switch when a conversion is in progress. This might corrupt the result of the conversion. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a Reset occurs. Table 10-18. Port F Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PF7 ADC7/TDI (ADC input channel 7 or JTAG Test Data Input) PF6 ADC6/TDO (ADC input channel 6 or JTAG Test Data Output) PF5 ADC5/TMS (ADC input channel 5 or JTAG Test Mode Select) PF4 ADC4/TCK (ADC input channel 4 or JTAG Test ClocK) PF3 ADC3 (ADC input channel 3) PF2 ADC2 (ADC input channel 2) PF1 ADC1 (ADC input channel 1) PF0 ADC0 (ADC input channel 0) • TDI, ADC7 – Port F, Bit 7 ADC7, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 7. TDI, JTAG Test Data In: Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data Register (scan chains). When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • TDO, ADC6 – Port F, Bit 6 ADC6, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 6. TDO, JTAG Test Data Out: Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. The TDO pin is tri-stated unless TAP states that shift out data are entered. • TMS, ADC5 – Port F, Bit 5 ADC5, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 5. TMS, JTAG Test Mode Select: This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller state machine. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • TCK, ADC4 – Port F, Bit 4 ADC4, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 4. TCK, JTAG Test Clock: JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • ADC3 – ADC0 – Port F, Bit 3..0 89 7593K–AVR–11/09 Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 3..0. Table 10-19. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PF7..PF4 Signal Name PF7/ADC7/TDI PF6/ADC6/TDO PF5/ADC5/TMS PF4/ADC4/TCK PUOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN PUOV 1 0 1 1 DDOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN DDOV 0 SHIFT_IR + SHIFT_DR 0 0 PVOE 0 JTAGEN 0 0 PVOV 0 TDO 0 0 DIEOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO TDI/ADC7 INPUT ADC6 INPUT TMS/ADC5 INPUT TCK/ADC4 INPUT Table 10-20. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PF3..PF0 Signal Name PF1/ADC1 PF0/ADC0 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 0 0 0 DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO 10.4.1 PF2/ADC2 PUOE 10.4 PF3/ADC3 ADC3 INPUT ADC2 INPUT ADC1 INPUT ADC0 INPUT Register Description for I/O-Ports Port A Data Register – PORTA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTA 7 PORTA 6 PORTA 5 PORTA 4 PORTA 3 PORTA 2 PORTA 1 PORTA 0 Read/Write 90 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PORTA 0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.4.2 Port A Data Direction Register – DDRA Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTB 7 10.4.3 7 PORTB 6 PORTB 5 PORTB 4 PORTB 3 PORTB 2 PORTB 1 PORTB 0 Port A Input Pins Address – PINA Bit 10.4.4 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port B Data Direction Register – DDRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTC 7 PORTC 6 PORTC 5 PORTC 4 PORTC 3 PORTC 2 PORTC 1 PORTC 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PORTC R/W Initial Value 0 Port C Data Direction Register – DDRC Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 10.4.9 PINB Port C Data Register – PORTC Bit 10.4.8 DDRB Port B Input Pins Address – PINB Bit 10.4.7 PORTB R/W Initial Value 10.4.6 PINA Port B Data Register – PORTB Bit 10.4.5 DDRA N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A DDRC Port C Input Pins Address – PINC Bit PINC 91 7593K–AVR–11/09 10.4.10 Port D Data Register – PORTD Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTD 7 PORTD 6 PORTD 5 PORTD 4 PORTD 3 PORTD 2 PORTD 1 PORTD 0 Read/Write 10.4.11 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port D Data Direction Register – DDRD Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTE 7 10.4.12 PORTE 6 PORTE 5 PORTE 4 PORTE 3 PORTE 2 PORTE 1 PORTE 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port E Data Direction Register – DDRE Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PORTF 7 PORTF 6 PORTF 5 PORTF 4 PORTF 3 PORTF 2 PORTF 1 PORTF 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PORTF R/W Initial Value 0 Port F Data Direction Register – DDRF Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 92 PINE Port F Data Register – PORTF Bit 10.4.17 DDRE Port E Input Pins Address – PINE Bit 10.4.16 PORTE R/W Initial Value 10.4.15 PIND Port E Data Register – PORTE Bit 10.4.14 DDRD Port D Input Pins Address – PIND Bit 10.4.13 PORTD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRF AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 10.4.18 Port F Input Pins Address – PINF Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PINF 93 7593K–AVR–11/09 11. External Interrupts The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT7:0 pin or any of the PCINT7..0 pins. Observe that, if enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT7:0 or PCINT7..0 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. The Pin change interrupt PCI0 will trigger if any enabled PCINT7:0 pin toggles. PCMSK0 Register control which pins contribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT7 ..0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The External Interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as indicated in the specification for the External Interrupt Control Registers – EICRA (INT3:0) and EICRB (INT7:4). When the external interrupt is enabled and is configured as level triggered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT7:4 requires the presence of an I/O clock, described in “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 39. Low level interrupts and the edge interrupt on INT3:0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes except Idle mode. Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level must be held long enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL Fuses as described in “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 39. 11.0.1 External Interrupt Control Register A – EICRA The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EICRA • Bits 7..0 – ISC31, ISC30 – ISC00, ISC00: External Interrupt 3 - 0 Sense Control Bits The External Interrupts 3 - 0 are activated by the external pins INT3:0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask in the EIMSK is set. The level and edges on the external pins that activate the interrupts are defined in Table 11-1. Edges on INT3..INT0 are registered asynchronously. Pulses on INT3:0 pins wider than the minimum pulse width given in Table 11-2 will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt. If enabled, a level triggered interrupt will generate an interrupt request as long as the pin is held low. When changing the ISCn bit, an interrupt can occur. Therefore, it is recommended to first disable INTn by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK Register. Then, the ISCn bit can be changed. Finally, the INTn interrupt flag should be cleared by writing a logical one to its Interrupt Flag bit (INTFn) in the EIFR Register before the interrupt is re-enabled. 94 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Interrupt Sense Control(1) Table 11-1. ISCn1 ISCn0 0 0 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt request. 0 1 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously an interrupt request. 1 0 The falling edge of INTn generates asynchronously an interrupt request. 1 1 The rising edge of INTn generates asynchronously an interrupt request. Note: 1. n = 3, 2, 1or 0. When changing the ISCn1/ISCn0 bits, the interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed. Table 11-2. Symbol Asynchronous External Interrupt Characteristics Parameter Condition Min Minimum pulse width for asynchronous external interrupt tINT 11.0.2 Description Typ Max Units 50 ns External Interrupt Control Register B – EICRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EICRB • Bits 7..0 – ISC71, ISC70 - ISC41, ISC40: External Interrupt 7 - 4 Sense Control Bits The External Interrupts 7 - 4 are activated by the external pins INT7:4 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask in the EIMSK is set. The level and edges on the external pins that activate the interrupts are defined in Table 11-3. The value on the INT7:4 pins are sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. Observe that CPU clock frequency can be lower than the XTAL frequency if the XTAL divider is enabled. If low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt. If enabled, a level triggered interrupt will generate an interrupt request as long as the pin is held low. Interrupt Sense Control(1) Table 11-3. ISCn1 ISCn0 0 0 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt request. 0 1 Any logical change on INTn generates an interrupt request 1 0 The falling edge between two samples of INTn generates an interrupt request. 1 1 The rising edge between two samples of INTn generates an interrupt request. Note: 11.0.3 Description 1. n = 7, 6, 5 or 4. When changing the ISCn1/ISCn0 bits, the interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed. External Interrupt Mask Register – EIMSK Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 95 7593K–AVR–11/09 INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 IINT0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EIMSK 0 • Bits 7..0 – INT7 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 7 - 0 Enable When an INT7 – INT0 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the corresponding external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control bits in the External Interrupt Control Registers – EICRA and EICRB – defines whether the external interrupt is activated on rising or falling edge or level sensed. Activity on any of these pins will trigger an interrupt request even if the pin is enabled as an output. This provides a way of generating a software interrupt. 11.0.4 External Interrupt Flag Register – EIFR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 0 IINTF0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EIFR • Bits 7..0 – INTF7 - INTF0: External Interrupt Flags 7 - 0 When an edge or logic change on the INT7:0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF7:0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the corresponding interrupt enable bit, INT7:0 in EIMSK, are set (one), the MCU will jump to the interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. These flags are always cleared when INT7:0 are configured as level interrupt. Note that when entering sleep mode with the INT3:0 interrupts disabled, the input buffers on these pins will be disabled. This may cause a logic change in internal signals which will set the INTF3:0 flags. See “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 76 for more information. 11.0.5 Pin Change Interrupt Control Register - PCICR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – 0 PCIE0 Read/Write R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCICR R/W 0 • Bit 0 – PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0 When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 0 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT7..0 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCI0 Interrupt Vector. PCINT7..0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0 Register. 11.0.6 Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register – PCIFR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – 0 PCIF0 Read/Write R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCIFR R/W 0 • Bit 0 – PCIF0: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0 When a logic change on any PCINT7..0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the 96 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. 11.0.7 Pin Change Mask Register 0 – PCMSK0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCMSK0 • Bit 7..0 – PCINT7..0: Pin Change Enable Mask 7..0 Each PCINT7..0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7..0 is set and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7..0 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled. 97 7593K–AVR–11/09 12. Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 Prescalers Timer/Counter0, 1, and 3 share the same prescaler module, but the Timer/Counters can have different prescaler settings. The description below applies to all Timer/Counters. Tn is used as a general name, n = 0, 1 or 3. 12.1 Internal Clock Source The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This provides the fastest operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of four taps from the prescaler can be used as a clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8, fCLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or fCLK_I/O/1024. 12.2 Prescaler Reset The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the Timer/Counter, and it is shared by the Timer/Counter Tn. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 > CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024). It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution. However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is connected to. 12.3 External Clock Source An external clock source applied to the Tn pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkTn). The Tn pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 1 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the Tn synchronization and edge detector logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the high period of the internal system clock. The edge detector generates one clkTn pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects. Figure 1. Tn/T0 Pin Sampling Tn D Q D Q D Tn_sync (To Clock Select Logic) Q LE clk I/O Synchronization Edge Detector The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has been applied to the Tn pin to the counter is updated. Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when Tn has been stable for at least one system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated. 98 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling frequency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5. An external clock source can not be prescaled. Figure 2. Prescaler for synchronous Timer/Counters clk I/O Clear PSR10 Tn Synchronization Tn Synchronization CSn0 CSn0 CSn1 CSn1 CSn2 CSn2 TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE clkTn 12.4 TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE clkTn General Timer/Counter Control Register – GTCCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSY NC Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GTCCR • Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously. • Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler Reset for Synchronous Timer/Counters When this bit is one, Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect all timers. 99 7593K–AVR–11/09 13. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent Output Compare Units, and with PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event management) and wave generation. The main features are: • • • • • • • 13.1 Two Independent Output Compare Units Double Buffered Output Compare Registers Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) Glitch Free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Variable PWM Period Frequency Generator Three Independent Interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B) Overview A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 13-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout AT90USB64/128-TQFP” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description” on page 110. Figure 13-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram Count Clear Direction TOVn (Int.Req.) Control Logic clkTn Clock Select Edge Detector TOP Tn BOTTOM ( From Prescaler ) Timer/Counter TCNTn = =0 OCnA (Int.Req.) Waveform Generation = OCnA DATA BUS OCRnA Fixed TOP Value Waveform Generation = OCnB OCRnB TCCRnA 13.1.1 OCnB (Int.Req.) TCCRnB Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT0). 100 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC0A and OC0B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 102. for details. The Compare Match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. 13.1.2 Definitions Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare Unit, in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on. The definitions in the table below are also used extensively throughout the document. BOTTOM MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255). TOP 13.2 The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00. The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is dependent on the mode of operation. Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0B). For details on clock sources and prescaler, see “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 Prescalers” on page 98. 13.3 Counter Unit The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 13-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings. Figure 13-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram TOVn (Int.Req.) DATA BUS Clock Select count clear TCNTn Control Logic clkTn Edge Detector Tn direction ( From Prescaler ) bottom top Signal description (internal signals): count Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1. direction Select between increment and decrement. clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero). 101 7593K–AVR–11/09 clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following. top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value. bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero). Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC0A and OC0B. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Operation” on page 105. The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM02:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 13.4 Output Compare Unit The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of Operation” on page 105). Figure 13-3 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. 102 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 13-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS OCRnx TCNTn = (8-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) top bottom Waveform Generator OCnx FOCn WGMn1:0 COMnX1:0 The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare Registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free. The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly. 13.4.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare Match will not set the OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real Compare Match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or toggled). 13.4.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that occur in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 13.4.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare Unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform 103 7593K–AVR–11/09 generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is down-counting. The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 13.5 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next Compare Match. Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output source. Figure 13-4 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0x state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC0x Register is reset to “0”. Figure 13-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 COMnx0 FOCn Waveform Generator D Q 1 OCnx DATA BUS D 0 OCnx Pin Q PORT D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output is enabled. Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See “8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description” on page 110. 104 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 13.5.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC0x Register is to be performed on the next Compare Match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 13-1 on page 111. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 13-2 on page 111, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 13-3 on page 111. A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first Compare Match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC0x strobe bits. 13.6 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM02:0) and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a Compare Match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 104.). For detailed timing information see “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 109. 13.6.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Output Compare Unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 13.6.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the Compare Match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events. The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 13-5. The counter value (TCNT0) increases until a Compare Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared. 105 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 13-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCn (Toggle) Period (COMnx1:0 = 1) 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare Match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the Compare Match can occur. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnx = ------------------------------------------------2 ⋅ N ⋅ ( 1 + OCRnx ) The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x00. 13.6.3 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7. In noninverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output is set on Compare Match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost. In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast 106 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 PWM mode is shown in Figure 13-6. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0. Figure 13-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value. In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 13-2 on page 111). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPWM = ----------------N ⋅ 256 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM0A1:0 bits.) A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC0x to toggle its logical level on each Compare Match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This 107 7593K–AVR–11/09 feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 13.6.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In noninverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the Compare Match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 13-7. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0. Figure 13-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value. In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to 108 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 13-3 on page 111). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPCPWM = ----------------N ⋅ 510 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. At the very start of period 2 in Figure 13-7 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match. • OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 13-7. When the OCR0A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an upcounting Compare Match. • The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up. 13.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 13-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode. Figure 13-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /1) TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 13-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. 109 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 13-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 13-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC mode and PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP. Figure 13-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 13-11 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP. Figure 13-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn (CTC) TOP - 1 TOP OCRnx BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOP OCFnx 13.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description 13.8.1 Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR0A Bit 110 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 COM0A 1 Read/Write 7 COM0A 0 COM0B 1 COM0B 0 – – WGM0 1 WGM0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W TCCR0A AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 7:6 – COM01A:0: Compare Match Output A Mode These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0 bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 13-1 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 13-1. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM0A1 COM0A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC0A on Compare Match 1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match 1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match Table 13-2 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Table 13-2. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) COM0A1 COM0A0 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected. WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match. 1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match, set OC0A at TOP 1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match, clear OC0A at TOP Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 106 for more details. Table 13-3 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode. Table 13-3. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) COM0A1 COM0A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected. WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match. 1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0A on Compare Match when down-counting. 1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on Compare Match when down-counting. 111 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 108 for more details. • Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0 bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 13-1 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 13-4. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM01 COM00 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC0B on Compare Match 1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match 1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match Table 13-2 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Table 13-5. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) COM01 COM00 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0B at TOP 1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0B at TOP Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 106 for more details. Table 13-3 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode. Table 13-6. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) COM0A1 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0B on Compare Match when down-counting. 1 112 COM0A0 Description 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on Compare Match when down-counting. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 108 for more details. • Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 13-7. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page 105). Table 13-7. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description Timer/Counter Mode of Operation TOP Update of OCRx at TOV Flag Set on(1)(2) Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX 1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM 2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX 3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX 4 1 0 0 Reserved – – – 5 1 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM 6 1 1 0 Reserved – – – 7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA TOP TOP Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF 2. BOTTOM = 0x00 13.8.2 Timer/Counter Control Register B – TCCR0B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR0B • Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. 113 7593K–AVR–11/09 A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP. The FOC0A bit is always read as zero. • Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0B as TOP. The FOC0B bit is always read as zero. • Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero. • Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode See the description in the “Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR0A” on page 110. • Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter. Table 13-8. Clock Select Bit Description CS02 CS01 CS00 Description 0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped) 0 0 1 clkI/O/(No prescaling) 0 1 0 clkI/O/8 (From prescaler) 0 1 1 clkI/O/64 (From prescaler) 1 0 0 clkI/O/256 (From prescaler) 1 0 1 clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler) 1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge. 1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge. If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting. 13.8.3 Timer/Counter Register – TCNT0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 114 R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers. 13.8.4 Output Compare Register A – OCR0A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR0A[7:0] OCR0A Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin. 13.8.5 Output Compare Register B – OCR0B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR0B[7:0] OCR0B Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin. 13.8.6 Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register – TIMSK0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – – – – OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIMSK0 • Bits 7..3, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero. • Bit 2 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0. • Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0. • Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0. 115 7593K–AVR–11/09 13.8.7 Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – OCF0B OCF0A 0 TOV0 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIFR0 • Bits 7..3, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bit 2 – OCF0B: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare B Match Flag The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in OCR0B – Output Compare Register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter Compare B Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 1 – OCF0A: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare A Match Flag The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed. The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 13-7, “Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description” on page 113. 116 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 14. 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3) The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management), wave generation, and signal timing measurement. The main features are: • • • • • • • • • • • 14.1 True 16-bit Design (i.e., Allows 16-bit PWM) Three independent Output Compare Units Double Buffered Output Compare Registers One Input Capture Unit Input Capture Noise Canceler Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Variable PWM Period Frequency Generator External Event Counter Ten independent interrupt sources (TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, OCF1C, ICF1, TOV3, OCF3A, OCF3B, OCF3C and ICF3) Overview Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare unit channel. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and so on. A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 14-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, see “Pinout AT90USB64/128-TQFP” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3)” on page 117. The Power Reduction Timer/Counter1 bit, PRTIM1, in “Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0” on page 54 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter1 module. The Power Reduction Timer/Counter3 bit, PRTIM3, in “Power Reduction Register 1 - PRR1” on page 54 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter3 module. 117 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 14-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram(1) Count Clear Direction TOVn (Int.Req.) Control Logic TCLK Clock Select Edge Detector TOP Tn BOTTOM ( From Prescaler ) Timer/Counter TCNTn = =0 OCFnA (Int.Req.) Waveform Generation = OCnA OCRnA OCFnB (Int.Req.) Fixed TOP Values Waveform Generation DATABUS = OCnB OCRnB OCFnC (Int.Req.) Waveform Generation = OCnC OCRnC ( From Analog Comparator Ouput ) ICFn (Int.Req.) Edge Detector ICRn Noise Canceler ICPn TCCRnA Note: 14.1.1 TCCRnB TCCRnC 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3, Table 10-6 on page 80, and Table 10-9 on page 83 for Timer/Counter1 and 3 and 3 pin placement and description. Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNTn), Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C), and Input Capture Register (ICRn) are all 16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing the 16bit registers. These procedures are described in the section “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. The Timer/Counter Control Registers (TCCRnA/B/C) are 8-bit registers and have no CPU access restrictions. Interrupt requests (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFRn). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSKn). TIFRn and TIMSKn are not shown in the figure since these registers are shared by other timer units. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the Tn pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkTn). The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all time. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin (OCnA/B/C). 118 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 See “Output Compare Units” on page 126.. The compare match event will also set the Compare Match Flag (OCFnA/B/C) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge triggered) event on either the Input Capture pin (ICPn) or on the Analog Comparator pins (See “Analog Comparator” on page 310.) The Input Capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (Noise Canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise spikes. The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined by either the OCRnA Register, the ICRn Register, or by a set of fixed values. When using OCRnA as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCRnA Register can not be used for generating a PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this case be double buffered allowing the TOP value to be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the ICRn Register can be used as an alternative, freeing the OCRnA to be used as PWM output. 14.1.2 Definitions The following definitions are used extensively throughout the document: BOTTOM MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535). TOP 14.2 The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000. The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed values: 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF, or to the value stored in the OCRnA or ICRn Register. The assignment is dependent of the mode of operation. Accessing 16-bit Registers The TCNTn, OCRnA/B/C, and ICRn are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR CPU via the 8-bit data bus. The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations. Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for temporary storing of the high byte of the 16bit access. The same Temporary Register is shared between all 16-bit registers within each 16bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the Temporary Register, and the low byte written are both copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the Temporary Register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read. Not all 16-bit accesses uses the Temporary Register for the high byte. Reading the OCRnA/B/C 16-bit registers does not involve using the Temporary Register. To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low byte must be read before the high byte. The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit timer registers assuming that no interrupts updates the temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing the OCRnA/B/C and ICRn Registers. Note that when using “C”, the compiler handles the 16-bit access. 119 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Examples(1) ... ; Set TCNTn to 0x01FF ldi r17,0x01 ldi r16,0xFF out TCNTnH,r17 out TCNTnL,r16 ; Read TCNTn into r17:r16 in r16,TCNTnL in r17,TCNTnH ... C Code Examples(1) unsigned int i; ... /* Set TCNTn to 0x01FF */ TCNTn = 0x1FF; /* Read TCNTn into i */ i = TCNTn; ... Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair. It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt occurs between the two instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code updates the temporary register by accessing the same or any other of the 16-bit Timer Registers, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted. Therefore, when both the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must disable the interrupts during the 16-bit access. The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNTn Register contents. Reading any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the same principle. Assembly Code Example(1) 120 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 TIM16_ReadTCNTn: ; Save global interrupt flag in r18,SREG ; Disable interrupts cli ; Read TCNTn into r17:r16 in r16,TCNTnL in r17,TCNTnH ; Restore global interrupt flag out SREG,r18 ret C Code Example(1) unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNTn( void ) { unsigned char sreg; unsigned int i; /* Save global interrupt flag */ sreg = SREG; /* Disable interrupts */ __disable_interrupt(); /* Read TCNTn into i */ i = TCNTn; /* Restore global interrupt flag */ SREG = sreg; return i; } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair. The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNTn Register contents. Writing any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the same principle. Assembly Code Example(1) 121 7593K–AVR–11/09 TIM16_WriteTCNTn: ; Save global interrupt flag in r18,SREG ; Disable interrupts cli ; Set TCNTn to r17:r16 out TCNTnH,r17 out TCNTnL,r16 ; Restore global interrupt flag out SREG,r18 ret C Code Example(1) void TIM16_WriteTCNTn( unsigned int i ) { unsigned char sreg; unsigned int i; /* Save global interrupt flag */ sreg = SREG; /* Disable interrupts */ __disable_interrupt(); /* Set TCNTn to i */ TCNTn = i; /* Restore global interrupt flag */ SREG = sreg; } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be written to TCNTn. 14.2.1 14.3 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written, then the high byte only needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic operation described previously also applies in this case. Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the C lock Select ( CSn2:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCRnB). For details on clock sources and prescaler, see “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 Prescalers” on page 98. 14.4 Counter Unit The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit. Figure 14-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings. 122 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 14-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TOVn (Int.Req.) TEMP (8-bit) Clock Select Count TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) Clear Direction TCNTn (16-bit Counter) Control Logic clkTn Edge Detector Tn ( From Prescaler ) TOP BOTTOM Signal description (internal signals): Count Increment or decrement TCNTn by 1. Direction Select between increment and decrement. Clear Clear TCNTn (set all bits to zero). clkTn Timer/Counter clock. TOP Signalize that TCNTn has reached maximum value. BOTTOM Signalize that TCNTn has reached minimum value (zero). The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNTnH) containing the upper eight bits of the counter, and Counter Low (TCNTnL) containing the lower eight bits. The TCNTnH Register can only be indirectly accessed by the CPU. When the CPU does an access to the TCNTnH I/O location, the CPU accesses the high byte temporary register (TEMP). The temporary register is updated with the TCNTnH value when the TCNTnL is read, and TCNTnH is updated with the temporary register value when TCNTnL is written. This allows the CPU to read or write the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus. It is important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNTn Register when the counter is counting that will give unpredictable results. The special cases are described in the sections where they are of importance. Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkTn). The clkTn can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits (CSn2:0). When no clock source is selected (CSn2:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNTn value can be accessed by the CPU, independent of whether clkTn is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits (WGMn3:0) located in the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCRnA and TCCRnB). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OCnx. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Operation” on page 129. The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGMn3:0 bits. TOVn can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 123 7593K–AVR–11/09 14.5 Input Capture Unit The Timer/Counter incorporates an input capture unit that can capture external events and give them a time-stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or multiple events, can be applied via the ICPn pin or alternatively, for the Timer/Counter1 only, via the Analog Comparator unit. The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle, and other features of the signal applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events. The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 14-3. The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the input capture unit are gray shaded. The small “n” in register and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number. Figure 14-3. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TEMP (8-bit) ICRnH (8-bit) WRITE ICRnL (8-bit) TCNTnH (8-bit) ICRn (16-bit Register) ACO* Analog Comparator ACIC* TCNTnL (8-bit) TCNTn (16-bit Counter) ICNC ICES Noise Canceler Edge Detector ICFn (Int.Req.) ICPn Note: The Analog Comparator Output (ACO) can only trigger the Timer/Counter1 ICP – not Timer/Counter3, 4 or 5. When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the Input Capture Pin (ICPn), alternatively on the analog Comparator output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge detector, a capture will be triggered. When a capture is triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter (TCNTn) is written to the Input Capture Register (ICRn). The Input Capture Flag (ICFn) is set at the same system clock as the TCNTn value is copied into ICRn Register. If enabled (TICIEn = 1), the input capture flag generates an input capture interrupt. The ICFn flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the ICFn flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICRn) is done by first reading the low byte (ICRnL) and then the high byte (ICRnH). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied into the high byte Temporary Register (TEMP). When the CPU reads the ICRnH I/O location it will access the TEMP Register. 124 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The ICRn Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that utilizes the ICRn Register for defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the Waveform Generation mode ( WGMn3:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can be written to the ICRn Register. When writing the ICRn Register the high byte must be written to the ICRnH I/O location before the low byte is written to ICRnL. For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. 14.5.1 Input Capture Trigger Source The main trigger source for the input capture unit is the I nput Capture Pin ( ICPn). Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the analog comparator output as trigger source for the input capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected as trigger source by setting the analog Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register (ACSR). Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The input capture flag must therefore be cleared after the change. Both the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled using the same technique as for the Tn pin (Figure 1 on page 98). The edge detector is also identical. However, when the noise canceler is enabled, additional logic is inserted before the edge detector, which increases the delay by four system clock cycles. Note that the input of the noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a Waveform Generation mode that uses ICRn to define TOP. An input capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICPn pin. 14.5.2 Noise Canceler The noise canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The noise canceler input is monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the output that in turn is used by the edge detector. The noise canceler is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceler ( ICNCn) bit in Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCRnB). When enabled the noise canceler introduces additional four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied to the input, to the update of the ICRn Register. The noise canceler uses the system clock and is therefore not affected by the prescaler. 14.5.3 Using the Input Capture Unit The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity for handling the incoming events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has not read the captured value in the ICRn Register before the next event occurs, the ICRn will be overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of the capture will be incorrect. When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICRn Register should be read as early in the interrupt handler routine as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has relatively high priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the maximum number of clock cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests. Using the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is actively changed during operation, is not recommended. Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after each capture. Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICRn 125 7593K–AVR–11/09 Register has been read. After a change of the edge, the Input Capture Flag (ICFn) must be cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit location). For measuring frequency only, the clearing of the ICFn Flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is used). 14.6 Output Compare Units The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNTn with the O utput Compare Register (OCRnx). If TCNT equals OCRnx the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCFnx) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIEnx = 1), the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCFnx Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCFnx Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the W aveform Generation mode (WGMn3:0) bits and Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (See “Modes of Operation” on page 129.) A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (i.e., counter resolution). In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period time for waveforms generated by the Waveform Generator. Figure 14-4 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the register and bit names indicates the device number (n = n for Timer/Counter n), and the “x” indicates Output Compare unit (A/B/C). The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Output Compare unit are gray shaded. Figure 14-4. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TEMP (8-bit) OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit) OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit) TCNTnH (8-bit) OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register) OCRnxH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) TCNTn (16-bit Counter) OCRnxL (8-bit) OCRnx (16-bit Register) = (16-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) TOP BOTTOM Waveform Generator WGMn3:0 OCnx COMnx1:0 The OCRnx Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCRnx Compare Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting sequence. The synchronization 126 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free. The OCRnx Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCRnx Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCRnx directly. The content of the OCR1x (Buffer or Compare) Register is only changed by a write operation (the Timer/Counter does not update this register automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1 Register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the high byte temporary register (TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as when accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCRnx Registers must be done via the TEMP Register since the compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCRnxH) has to be written first. When the high byte I/O location is written by the CPU, the TEMP Register will be updated by the value written. Then when the low byte (OCRnxL) is written to the lower eight bits, the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCRnx buffer or OCRnx Compare Register in the same system clock cycle. For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. 14.6.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOCnx) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCFnx Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OCnx pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COMn1:0 bits settings define whether the OCnx pin is set, cleared or toggled). 14.6.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNTn Write All CPU writes to the TCNTn Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCRnx to be initialized to the same value as TCNTn without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 14.6.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNTn in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNTn when using any of the Output Compare channels, independent of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNTn equals the OCRnx value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Do not write the TCNTn equal to TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP values. The compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF. Similarly, do not write the TCNTn value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting. The setup of the OCnx should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OCnx value is to use the Force Output Compare (FOCnx) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OCnx Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COMnx1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COMnx1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 14.7 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COMnx1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OCnx) state at the next compare match. 127 7593K–AVR–11/09 Secondly the COMnx1:0 bits control the OCnx pin output source. Figure 14-5 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COMnx1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COMnx1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OCnx state, the reference is for the internal OCnx Register, not the OCnx pin. If a system reset occur, the OCnx Register is reset to “0”. Figure 14-5. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 COMnx0 FOCnx Waveform Generator D Q 1 OCnx DATA BUS D 0 OCnx Pin Q PORT D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OCnx) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COMnx1:0 bits are set. However, the OCnx pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OCnx pin (DDR_OCnx) must be set as output before the OCnx value is visible on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the Waveform Generation mode, but there are some exceptions. Refer to Table 14-1, Table 14-2 and Table 14-3 for details. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OCnx state before the output is enabled. Note that some COMnx1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See “16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3)” on page 117. The COMnx1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit. 14.7.1 128 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COMnx1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COMnx1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OCnx Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 14-1 on page 140. For fast PWM mode refer to Table 14-2 on page 140, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer to Table 14-3 on page 141. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 A change of the COMnx1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOCnx strobe bits. 14.8 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGMn3:0) and Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COMnx1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COMnx1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a compare match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 127.) For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 136. 14.8.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGMn3:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn becomes zero. The TOVn Flag in this case behaves like a 17th bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOVn Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However, observe that the maximum interval between the external events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval between events are too long, the timer overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to extend the resolution for the capture unit. The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 14.8.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGMn3:0 = 4 or 12), the OCRnA or ICRn Register are used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNTn) matches either the OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 4) or the ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 12). The OCRnA or ICRn define the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events. The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 14-6. The counter value (TCNTn) increases until a compare match occurs with either OCRnA or ICRn, and then counter (TCNTn) is cleared. 129 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 14-6. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TCNTn OCnA (Toggle) Period (COMnA1:0 = 1) 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either using the OCFnA or ICFn Flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCRnA or ICRn is lower than the current value of TCNTn, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. In many cases this feature is not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast PWM mode using OCRnA for defining TOP (WGMn3:0 = 15) since the OCRnA then will be double buffered. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OCnA output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COMnA1:0 = 1). The OCnA value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output (DDR_OCnA = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOCnA = fclk_I/O/2 when OCRnA is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnA = -------------------------------------------------2 ⋅ N ⋅ ( 1 + OCRnA ) The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOVn Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x0000. 14.8.3 130 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM options by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is set on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx, and cleared at TOP. In inverting Compare Output mode output is cleared on compare match and set at TOP. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), hence reduces total system cost. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation: log ( TOP + 1 ) R FPWM = ---------------------------------log ( 2 ) In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 14), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 15). The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 14-7. The figure shows fast PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 14-7. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx / TOP Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set and OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition the OCnA or ICFn Flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOVn is set when either OCRnA or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value. If one of the interrupts are enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP and compare values. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx. Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the OCRnx Registers are written. The procedure for updating ICRn differs from updating OCRnA when used for defining the TOP value. The ICRn Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICRn is changed to a low value when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value, there is a risk that the new ICRn value written is lower than the current value of TCNTn. The result will then be that the counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will then have to count to the MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. The OCRnA Register however, is double buffered. This feature allows the OCRnA I/O location 131 7593K–AVR–11/09 to be written anytime. When the OCRnA I/O location is written the value written will be put into the OCRnA Buffer Register. The OCRnA Compare Register will then be updated with the value in the Buffer Register at the next timer clock cycle the TCNTn matches TOP. The update is done at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn is cleared and the TOVn Flag is set. Using the ICRn Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICRn, the OCRnA Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OCnA. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by changing the TOP value), using the OCRnA as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature. In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (see Table on page 140). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn, and clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPWM = ---------------------------------N ⋅ ( 1 + TOP ) The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the output will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCRnx equal to TOP will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COMnx1:0 bits.) A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OCnA to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COMnA1:0 = 1). This applies only if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 15). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOCnA = fclk_I/O/2 when OCRnA is set to zero (0x0000). This feature is similar to the OCnA toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 14.8.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, 3, 10, or 11) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a dualslope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to 132 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation: R PCPWM = log ( TOP + 1 ) ---------------------------------log ( 2 ) In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 10), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 11). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNTn value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 14-8. The figure shows phase correct PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 14-8. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx/TOP Update and OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TOVn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on Bottom) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When either OCRnA or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value, the OCnA or ICFn Flag is set accordingly at the same timer clock cycle as the OCRnx Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at TOP). The Interrupt Flags can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx. Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the OCRnx Registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 14-8 illustrates, changing the TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in an unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found in the time of update of the OCRnx Reg- 133 7593K–AVR–11/09 ister. Since the OCRnx update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This implies that the length of the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the length of the rising slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values differ the two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives the unsymmetrical result on the output. It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct mode when changing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static TOP value there are practically no differences between the two modes of operation. In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (See Table 14-3 on page 141). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPCPWM = --------------------------2 ⋅ N ⋅ TOP The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle. 14.8.5 Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM mode (WGMn3:0 = 8 or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting Compare Output mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower maximum operation frequency compared to the single-slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM mode is the time the OCRnx Register is updated by the OCRnx Buffer Register, (see Figure 148 and Figure 14-9). The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to 0x0003), and 134 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated using the following equation: log ( TOP + 1 ) R PFCPWM = ---------------------------------log ( 2 ) In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 8), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 9). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNTn value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 14-9. The figure shows phase and frequency correct PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes noninverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 14-9. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) OCRnx/TOP Updateand TOVn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on Bottom) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCRnx Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCRnA or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value, the OCnA or ICFn Flag set when TCNTn has reached TOP. The Interrupt Flags can then be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx. As Figure 14-9 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode, symmetrical in all periods. Since the OCRnx Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of the rising and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives symmetrical output pulses and is therefore frequency correct. 135 7593K–AVR–11/09 Using the ICRn Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICRn, the OCRnA Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OCnA. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by changing the TOP value, using the OCRnA as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature. In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (See Table 14-3 on page 141). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase and frequency correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPFCPWM = --------------------------2 ⋅ N ⋅ TOP The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be set to high for noninverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle. 14.9 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkTn) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set, and when the OCRnx Register is updated with the OCRnx buffer value (only for modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 14-10 shows a timing diagram for the setting of OCFnx. Figure 14-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCFnx, no Prescaling clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /1) TCNTn OCRnx OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 14-11 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. 136 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 14-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCFnx, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx Value OCRnx OCFnx Figure 14-12 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and frequency correct PWM mode the OCRnx Register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on. The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOVn Flag at BOTTOM. Figure 14-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /1) TCNTn (CTC and FPWM) TCNTn (PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2 TOVn (FPWM) and ICFn (if used as TOP) OCRnx (Update at TOP) Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value Figure 14-13 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. 137 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 14-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn TOP - 1 TCNTn (PC and PFC PWM) TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOP - 1 (CTC and FPWM) TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2 TOVn (FPWM) and ICF n (if used as TOP) OCRnx Old OCRnx Value (Update at TOP) New OCRnx Value 14.10 16-bit Timer/Counter Register Description 14.10.1 Timer/Counter1 Control Register A – TCCR1A Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 COM1A 1 COM1A 0 COM1B 1 COM1B 0 COM1C 1 COM1C 0 WGM1 1 WGM1 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 14.10.2 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR1 A Timer/Counter3 Control Register A – TCCR3A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 COM3A 1 COM3A 0 COM3B 1 COM3B 0 COM3C 1 COM3C 0 WGM3 1 WGM3 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR3 A • Bit 7:6 – COMnA1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel A • Bit 5:4 – COMnB1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel B • Bit 3:2 – COMnC1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel C The COMnA1:0, COMnB1:0, and COMnC1:0 control the output compare pins (OCnA, OCnB, and OCnC respectively) behavior. If one or both of the COMnA1:0 bits are written to one, the OCnA output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or both of the COMnB1:0 bits are written to one, the OCnB output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or both of the COMnC1:0 bits are written to one, the OCnC output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OCnA, OCnB or OCnC pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. 138 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 When the OCnA, OCnB or OCnC is connected to the pin, the function of the COMnx1:0 bits is dependent of the WGMn3:0 bits setting. Table 14-1 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode (non-PWM). 139 7593K–AVR–11/09 . Table 14-1. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM COMnA1/COMnB1/ COMnC1 COMnA0/COMnB0/ COMnC0 0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match. 1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set output to low level). 1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set output to high level). Description Table 14-2 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to the fast PWM mode. Table 14-2. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM COMnA1/COMnB1/ COMnC0 COMnA0/COMnB0/ COMnC0 0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected. 0 1 WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B and OC1C disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected. 1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match, set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at TOP 1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match, clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at TOP Note: Description A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and COMnA1/COMnB1/COMnC1 is set. In this case the compare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 106. for more details. Table 14-3 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode. 140 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 14-3. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct and Phase and Frequency Correct PWM COMnA1/COMnB/ COMnC1 COMnA0/COMnB0/ COMnC0 0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected. 1 WGM13:0 = 8, 9 10 or 11: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B and OC1C disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected. 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when up-counting. Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when downcounting. 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when up-counting. Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when downcounting. 0 1 1 Note: Description A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and COMnA1/COMnB1//COMnC1 is set. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 108. for more details. • Bit 1:0 – WGMn1:0: Waveform Generation Mode Combined with the WGMn3:2 bits found in the TCCRnB Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 14-4. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. (See “Modes of Operation” on page 105.). 141 7593K–AVR–11/09 Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1) Table 14-4. Mode WGMn3 WGMn2 (CTCn) WGMn1 (PWMn1) WGMn0 (PWMn0) Timer/Counter Mode of Operation TOP Update of OCRnx at TOVn Flag Set on 0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFFFF Immediate MAX 1 0 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP BOTTOM 2 0 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP BOTTOM 3 0 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit 0x03FF TOP BOTTOM 4 0 1 0 0 CTC OCRnA Immediate MAX 5 0 1 0 1 Fast PWM, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP TOP 6 0 1 1 0 Fast PWM, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP TOP 7 0 1 1 1 Fast PWM, 10-bit 0x03FF TOP TOP 8 1 0 0 0 PWM, Phase and Frequency Correct ICRn BOTTOM BOTTOM 9 1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase and Frequency Correct OCRnA BOTTOM BOTTOM 10 1 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct ICRn TOP BOTTOM 11 1 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCRnA TOP BOTTOM 12 1 1 0 0 CTC ICRn Immediate MAX 13 1 1 0 1 (Reserved) – – – 14 1 1 1 0 Fast PWM ICRn TOP TOP 15 1 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRnA TOP TOP Note: 14.10.3 1. The CTCn and PWMn1:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGMn2:0 definitions. However, the functionality and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer. Timer/Counter1 Control Register B – TCCR1B Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 14.10.4 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR1B Timer/Counter3 Control Register B – TCCR3B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICNC3 ICES3 – WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR3B • Bit 7 – ICNCn: Input Capture Noise Canceler Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the Noise Canceler is activated, the input from the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) is filtered. The filter function requires four successive equal valued samples of the ICPn pin for changing its output. The input capture is therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise canceler is enabled. • Bit 6 – ICESn: Input Capture Edge Select 142 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) that is used to trigger a capture event. When the ICESn bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and when the ICESn bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the capture. When a capture is triggered according to the ICESn setting, the counter value is copied into the Input Capture Register (ICRn). The event will also set the Input Capture Flag (ICFn), and this can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this interrupt is enabled. When the ICRn is used as TOP value (see description of the WGMn3:0 bits located in the TCCRnA and the TCCRnB Register), the ICPn is disconnected and consequently the input capture function is disabled. • Bit 5 – Reserved Bit This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be written to zero when TCCRnB is written. • Bit 4:3 – WGMn3:2: Waveform Generation Mode See TCCRnA Register description. • Bit 2:0 – CSn2:0: Clock Select The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure 13-8 and Figure 13-9. 143 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 14-5. Clock Select Bit Description CSn2 CSn1 CSn0 Description 0 0 0 No clock source. (Timer/Counter stopped) 0 0 1 clkI/O/1 (No prescaling 0 1 0 clkI/O/8 (From prescaler) 0 1 1 clkI/O/64 (From prescaler) 1 0 0 clkI/O/256 (From prescaler) 1 0 1 clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler) 1 1 0 External clock source on Tn pin. Clock on falling edge 1 1 1 External clock source on Tn pin. Clock on rising edge If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Countern, transitions on the Tn pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting. 14.10.5 Timer/Counter1 Control Register C – TCCR1C Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C – – – – – Read/Write W W W R R R R R Initial Value 14.10.6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR1C Timer/Counter3 Control Register C – TCCR3C Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C – – – – – Read/Write W W W R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR3C • Bit 7 – FOCnA: Force Output Compare for Channel A • Bit 6 – FOCnB: Force Output Compare for Channel B • Bit 5 – FOCnC: Force Output Compare for Channel C The FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bits are only active when the WGMn3:0 bits specifies a non-PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform generation unit. The OCnA/OCnB/OCnC output is changed according to its COMnx1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value present in the COMnx1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCRnA as TOP. The FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnB bits are always read as zero. • Bit 4:0 – Reserved Bits These bits are reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when TCCRnC is written. 14.10.7 Timer/Counter1 – TCNT1H and TCNT1L Bit 144 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 TCNT1[15:8] TCNT1H TCNT1[7:0] TCNT1L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 14.10.8 R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 Timer/Counter3 – TCNT3H and TCNT3L Bit 7 6 TCNT3[15:8] TCNT3H TCNT3[7:0] TCNT3L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNTnH and TCNTnL, combined TCNTn) give direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. Modifying the counter (TCNTn) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNTn and one of the OCRnx Registers. Writing to the TCNTn Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all compare units. 14.10.9 Output Compare Register 1 A – OCR1AH and OCR1AL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR1A[15:8] OCR1AH OCR1A[7:0] OCR1AL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 14.10.10 Output Compare Register 1 B – OCR1BH and OCR1BL Bit 7 6 5 4 OCR1B[15:8] OCR1BH OCR1B[7:0] OCR1BL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 14.10.11 Output Compare Register 1 C – OCR1CH and OCR1CL Bit 7 6 5 4 OCR1C[15:8] OCR1CH OCR1C[7:0] OCR1CL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 14.10.12 Output Compare Register 3 A – OCR3AH and OCR3AL Bit 7 6 5 4 OCR3A[15:8] OCR3AH OCR3A[7:0] OCR3AL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 145 7593K–AVR–11/09 14.10.13 Output Compare Register 3 B – OCR3BH and OCR3BL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR3B[15:8] OCR3BH OCR3B[7:0] OCR3BL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 14.10.14 Output Compare Register 3 C – OCR3CH and OCR3CL Bit 7 6 5 4 OCR3C[15:8] OCR3CH OCR3C[7:0] OCR3CL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNTn). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OCnx pin. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. 14.10.15 Input Capture Register 1 – ICR1H and ICR1L Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICR1[15:8] ICR1H ICR1[7:0] ICR1L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 14.10.16 Input Capture Register 3 – ICR3H and ICR3L Bit 7 6 5 ICR3[15:8] ICR3H ICR3[7:0] ICR3L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Input Capture is updated with the counter (TCNTn) value each time an event occurs on the ICPn pin (or optionally on the Analog Comparator output for Timer/Counter1). The Input Capture can be used for defining the counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 119. 14.10.17 Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register – TIMSK1 Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – ICIE1 – OCIE1 C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 Read/Write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 146 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIMSK1 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 14.10.18 Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Mask Register – TIMSK3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – ICIE3 – OCIE3 C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 Read/Write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIMSK3 • Bit 5 – ICIEn: Timer/Countern, Input Capture Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Countern Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 68.) is executed when the ICFn Flag, located in TIFRn, is set. • Bit 3 – OCIEnC: Timer/Countern, Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 68.) is executed when the OCFnC Flag, located in TIFRn, is set. • Bit 2 – OCIEnB: Timer/Countern, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 68.) is executed when the OCFnB Flag, located in TIFRn, is set. • Bit 1 – OCIEnA: Timer/Countern, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 68.) is executed when the OCFnA Flag, located in TIFRn, is set. • Bit 0 – TOIEn: Timer/Countern, Overflow Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Countern Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 68.) is executed when the TOVn Flag, located in TIFRn, is set. 14.10.19 Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – ICF1 – OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 Read/Write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIFR1 14.10.20 Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – ICF3 – OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 Read/Write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIFR3 • Bit 5 – ICFn: Timer/Countern, Input Capture Flag 147 7593K–AVR–11/09 This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICPn pin. When the Input Capture Register (ICRn) is set by the WGMn3:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICFn Flag is set when the counter reaches the TOP value. ICFn is automatically cleared when the Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, ICFn can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 3– OCFnC: Timer/Countern, Output Compare C Match Flag This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn) value matches the Output Compare Register C (OCRnC). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnC) strobe will not set the OCFnC Flag. OCFnC is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCFnC can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 2 – OCFnB: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Flag This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn) value matches the Output Compare Register B (OCRnB). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnB) strobe will not set the OCFnB Flag. OCFnB is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCFnB can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 1 – OCF1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Flag This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn value matches the Output Compare Register A (OCRnA). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnA) strobe will not set the OCFnA Flag. OCFnA is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCFnA can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 0 – TOVn: Timer/Countern, Overflow Flag The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGMn3:0 bits setting. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOVn Flag is set when the timer overflows. Refer to Table 14-4 on page 142 for the TOVn Flag behavior when using another WGMn3:0 bit setting. TOVn is automatically cleared when the Timer/Countern Overflow Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOVn can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. 148 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 15. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. The main features are: • • • • • • • 15.1 Single Channel Counter Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Frequency Generator 10-bit Clock Prescaler Overflow and Compare Match Interrupt Sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B) Allows Clocking from External 32 kHz Watch Crystal Independent of the I/O Clock Overview A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 15-1.. For the actual placement of I/O pins, see “Pin Configurations” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description” on page 160. The Power Reduction Timer/Counter2 bit, PRTIM2, in “Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0” on page 54 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter2 module. Figure 15-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram Count TOVn (Int.Req.) Clear Direction Control Logic clkTn TOSC1 T/C Oscillator TOP BOTTOM TOSC2 Prescaler clkI/O Timer/Counter TCNTn = =0 OCnA (Int.Req.) Waveform Generation = OCnA OCRnA DATA BUS Fixed TOP Value Waveform Generation = OCRnB OCnB (Int.Req.) Synchronized Status flags Synchronization Unit OCnB clkI/O clkASY Status flags ASSRn TCCRnA asynchronous mode select (ASn) TCCRnB 149 7593K–AVR–11/09 15.1.1 Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT2). The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC2A and OC2B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 151. for details. The compare match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. 15.1.2 Definitions Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT2 for accessing Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on. The definitions in the table below are also used extensively throughout the section. BOTTOM MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255). TOP 15.2 The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00). The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is dependent on the mode of operation. Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2 bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see “Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR” on page 165. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 168. 15.3 Counter Unit The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 15-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment. 150 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 15-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram TOVn (Int.Req.) DATA BUS TOSC1 count TCNTn clear clk Tn Control Logic Prescaler T/C Oscillator direction bottom TOSC2 top clkI/O Signal description (internal signals): count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1. direction Selects between increment and decrement. clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero). clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following. top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value. bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero). Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Operation” on page 154. The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 15.4 Output Compare Unit The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the Output Compare Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of Operation” on page 154). Figure 14-10 on page 136 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. 151 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 15-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS OCRnx TCNTn = (8-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) top bottom Waveform Generator OCnx FOCn WGMn1:0 COMnX1:0 The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2x Compare Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free. The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR2x directly. 15.4.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or toggled). 15.4.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 15.4.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare channel, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2 equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting. 152 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 15.5 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source. Figure 15-4 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin. Figure 15-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 COMnx0 FOCnx Waveform Generator D Q 1 OCnx DATA BUS D 0 OCnx Pin Q PORT D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the output is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See “8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description” on page 160. 153 7593K–AVR–11/09 15.5.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 15-4 on page 161. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 15-5 on page 162, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 15-6 on page 162. A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC2x strobe bits. 15.6 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM22:0) and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM2x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 153.). For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 158. 15.6.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 15.6.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events. The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Table 15-5. The counter value (TCNT2) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter (TCNT2) is cleared. 154 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 15-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (Toggle) Period (COMnx1:0 = 1) 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the current value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnx = ------------------------------------------------2 ⋅ N ⋅ ( 1 + OCRnx ) The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x00. 15.6.3 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM22:0 = 7. In noninverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost. 155 7593K–AVR–11/09 In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 15-6. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x and TCNT2. Figure 15-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value. In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when WGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 15-2 on page 161). The actual OC2x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPWM = ----------------N ⋅ 256 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0 bits.) A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform 156 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 15.6.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 1, and OCR2A when MGM22:0 = 5. In noninverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 15-7. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x and TCNT2. Figure 15-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value. In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM 157 7593K–AVR–11/09 output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 15-3 on page 161). The actual OC2x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f OCnxPCPWM = ----------------N ⋅ 510 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. At the very start of period 2 in Figure 15-7 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match. • OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 15-7. When the OCR2A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an upcounting Compare Match. • The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up. 15.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 15-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode. Figure 15-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /1) TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn 158 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 15-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. Figure 15-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 15-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode. Figure 15-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn OCRnx OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 15-11 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode. 159 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 15-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8) clkI/O clkTn (clkI/O /8) TCNTn (CTC) TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOP OCRnx OCFnx 15.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description 15.8.1 Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR2A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 COM2A 1 COM2A 0 COM2B 1 COM2B 0 – – WGM2 1 WGM2 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR2A 0 • Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output A Mode These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0 bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 15-1 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 15-1. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM2A1 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC2A on Compare Match 1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match 1 160 COM2A0 Description 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 15-2 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Table 15-2. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) COM2A1 COM2A0 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected. WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match. 1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match, set OC2A at TOP 1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match, clear OC2A at TOP Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 155 for more details. Table 15-3 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode. Table 15-3. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) COM2A1 COM2A0 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected. WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match. 1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2A on Compare Match when down-counting. 1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2A on Compare Match when down-counting. Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 157 for more details. • Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0 bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 15-4 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 15-4. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM2B1 COM2B0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC2B on Compare Match 1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match 1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match 161 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 15-5 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) Table 15-5. COM2B1 COM2B0 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match, set OC2B at TOP 1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match, clear OC2B at TOP Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 155 for more details. Table 15-6 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) Table 15-6. COM2B1 COM2B0 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2B on Compare Match when down-counting. 1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2B on Compare Match when down-counting. Note: Description 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 157 for more details. • Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation Mode Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 15-7. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page 154). Table 15-7. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description Timer/Counter Mode of Operation TOP Update of OCRx at TOV Flag Set on(1)(2) Mode WGM1 WGM0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX 1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM 2 162 WGM2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 15-7. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description Timer/Counter Mode of Operation TOP Update of OCRx at TOV Flag Set on(1)(2) Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0 3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX 4 1 0 0 Reserved – – – 5 1 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM 6 1 1 0 Reserved – – – 7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA TOP TOP Notes: 1. MAX= 0xFF 2. BOTTOM= 0x00 15.8.2 Timer/Counter Control Register B – TCCR2B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCCR2B • Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2A as TOP. The FOC2A bit is always read as zero. • Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force Output Compare B The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B output is changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2B as TOP. The FOC2B bit is always read as zero. • Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. 163 7593K–AVR–11/09 • Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform Generation Mode See the description in the “Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR2A” on page 160. • Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table 15-8. Table 15-8. Clock Select Bit Description CS22 CS20 0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped). 0 0 1 clkT2S/(No prescaling) 0 1 0 clkT2S/8 (From prescaler) 0 1 1 clkT2S/32 (From prescaler) 1 0 0 clkT2S/64 (From prescaler) 1 0 1 clkT2S/128 (From prescaler) 1 1 0 clkT2S/256 (From prescaler) 1 15.8.3 CS21 Description 1 1 clkT2S/1024 (From prescaler) Timer/Counter Register – TCNT2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the Compare Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers. 15.8.4 Output Compare Register A – OCR2A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin. 15.8.5 Output Compare Register B – OCR2B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCR2B[7:0] OCR2B Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin. 164 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 15.9 15.9.1 Asynchronous operation of the Timer/Counter Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB 0 TCR2BUB Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASSR • Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buffer is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a 32 kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is selected. Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero. • Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted. • Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set. When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set. When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set. When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready to be updated with a new value. If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur. 165 7593K–AVR–11/09 The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different. When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage register is read. 15.9.2 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken. • Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is: a. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2. b. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate. c. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x. d. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB. e. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags. f. Enable interrupts, if needed. • The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency. • When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred to a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not write a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred to its destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual temporary register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been implemented. • When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the Output Compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is disabled during writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode before the corresponding OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up. • If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: The interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and reentering sleep mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will not occur, and the device will fail to wake up. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Powersave or ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed: a. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x. b. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero. c. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode. • When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768 kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2 is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a Power-up Reset or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be aware of the fact that this Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after 166 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 a wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin. • Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at least one before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is halted for four cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. • Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2 must be done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain. Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Power-save mode, and the I/O clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous value (before entering sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from Power-save mode is essentially unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as follows: a. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x. b. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared. c. Read TCNT2. • During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the asynchronous timer takes 3 processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor clock. 15.9.3 Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register – TIMSK2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A 0 TOIE2 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIMSK2 • Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2B bit is set in the Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2. • Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2. • Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2. 167 7593K–AVR–11/09 15.9.4 Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – OCF2B OCF2A 0 TOV2 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIFR2 • Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output Compare Flag 2 B The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2B – Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00. 15.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler Figure 15-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2 PSRASY clkT2S/1024 clkT2S/256 clkT2S/128 AS2 clkT2S/64 10-BIT T/C PRESCALER Clear clkT2S/32 TOSC1 clkT2S clkT2S/8 clkI/O 0 CS20 CS21 CS22 TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE clkT2 168 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main system I/O clock clk IO. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter (RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz crystal. Applying an external clock source to TOSC1 is not recommended. For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clk T2S /8, clk T2S /32, clk T2S /64, clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected. Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a predictable prescaler. 15.10.1 General Timer/Counter Control Register – GTCCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSY NC Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GTCCR • Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2 When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the “General Timer/Counter Control Register – GTCCR” on page 99 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. 169 7593K–AVR–11/09 16. Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A) 16.1 Overview The Output Compare Modulator (OCM) allows generation of waveforms modulated with a carrier frequency. The modulator uses the outputs from the Output Compare Unit C of the 16-bit Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Unit of the 8-bit Timer/Counter0. For more details about these Timer/Counters see “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 Prescalers” on page 98 and “8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation” on page 149. Figure 16-1. Output Compare Modulator, Block Diagram Timer/Counter 1 OC1C Pin Timer/Counter 0 OC1C / OC0A / PB7 OC0A When the modulator is enabled, the two output compare channels are modulated together as shown in the block diagram (Figure 16-1). 16.2 Description The Output Compare unit 1C and Output Compare unit 2 shares the PB7 port pin for output. The outputs of the Output Compare units (OC1C and OC0A) overrides the normal PORTB7 Register when one of them is enabled (i.e., when COMnx1:0 is not equal to zero). When both OC1C and OC0A are enabled at the same time, the modulator is automatically enabled. The functional equivalent schematic of the modulator is shown on Figure 16-2. The schematic includes part of the Timer/Counter units and the port B pin 7 output driver circuit. Figure 16-2. Output Compare Modulator, Schematic COMA01 COMA00 Vcc COM1C1 COM1C0 ( From Waveform Generator ) Modulator 0 D 1 Q 1 OC1C Pin 0 ( From Waveform Generator ) D Q OC1C / OC0A/ PB7 OC0A D Q D PORTB7 Q DDRB7 DATABUS 170 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 When the modulator is enabled the type of modulation (logical AND or OR) can be selected by the PORTB7 Register. Note that the DDRB7 controls the direction of the port independent of the COMnx1:0 bit setting. 16.2.1 Timing Example Figure 16-3 illustrates the modulator in action. In this example the Timer/Counter1 is set to operate in fast PWM mode (non-inverted) and Timer/Counter0 uses CTC waveform mode with toggle Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0 = 1). Figure 16-3. Output Compare Modulator, Timing Diagram clk I/O OC1C (FPWM Mode) OC0A (CTC Mode) PB7 (PORTB7 = 0) PB7 (PORTB7 = 1) (Period) 1 2 3 In this example, Timer/Counter2 provides the carrier, while the modulating signal is generated by the Output Compare unit C of the Timer/Counter1. The resolution of the PWM signal (OC1C) is reduced by the modulation. The reduction factor is equal to the number of system clock cycles of one period of the carrier (OC0A). In this example the resolution is reduced by a factor of two. The reason for the reduction is illustrated in Figure 16-3 at the second and third period of the PB7 output when PORTB7 equals zero. The period 2 high time is one cycle longer than the period 3 high time, but the result on the PB7 output is equal in both periods. 171 7593K–AVR–11/09 17. Serial Peripheral Interface – SPI The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the A T 9 0 U S B 6 4 / 1 2 8 a n d p e r i p h e r a l d e v i c e s o r b e tw e e n s e v e r a l A V R d e v i c e s . T h e AT90USB64/128 SPI includes the following features: • • • • • • • • Full-duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer Master or Slave Operation LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer Seven Programmable Bit Rates End of Transmission Interrupt Flag Write Collision Flag Protection Wake-up from Idle Mode Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI Mode” on page 206. The Power Reduction SPI bit, PRSPI, in “Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0” on page 54 on page 50 must be written to zero to enable SPI module. Figure 17-1. SPI Block Diagram(1) SPI2X SPI2X DIVIDER /2/4/8/16/32/64/128 Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3, and Table 10-6 on page 80 for SPI pin placement. The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 17-2. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave. Master and 172 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line. When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use. When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use. Figure 17-2. SPI Master-slave Interconnection SHIFT ENABLE The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction. This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted in. Otherwise, the first byte is lost. In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure correct sampling of the clock signal, the frequency of the SPI clock should never exceed fosc/4. 173 7593K–AVR–11/09 When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden according to Table 17-1. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to “Alternate Port Functions” on page 77. Table 17-1. Pin SPI Pin Overrides(1) Direction, Master SPI Direction, Slave SPI MOSI User Defined Input MISO Input User Defined SCK User Defined Input SS User Defined Input Note: 1. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 80 for a detailed description of how to define the direction of the user defined SPI pins. The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the actual data direction bits for these pins. E.g. if MOSI is placed on pin PB5, replace DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB. 174 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Assembly Code Example(1) SPI_MasterInit: ; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input ldi r17,(1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK) out DDR_SPI,r17 ; Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 ldi r17,(1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0) out SPCR,r17 ret SPI_MasterTransmit: ; Start transmission of data (r16) out SPDR,r16 Wait_Transmit: ; Wait for transmission complete sbis SPSR,SPIF rjmp Wait_Transmit ret C Code Example(1) void SPI_MasterInit(void) { /* Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input */ DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK); /* Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 */ SPCR = (1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0); } void SPI_MasterTransmit(char cData) { /* Start transmission */ SPDR = cData; /* Wait for transmission complete */ while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF))) ; } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. 175 7593K–AVR–11/09 The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Slave and how to perform a simple reception. Assembly Code Example(1) SPI_SlaveInit: ; Set MISO output, all others input ldi r17,(1<<DD_MISO) out DDR_SPI,r17 ; Enable SPI ldi r17,(1<<SPE) out SPCR,r17 ret SPI_SlaveReceive: ; Wait for reception complete sbis SPSR,SPIF rjmp SPI_SlaveReceive ; Read received data and return in r16,SPDR ret C Code Example(1) void SPI_SlaveInit(void) { /* Set MISO output, all others input */ DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MISO); /* Enable SPI */ SPCR = (1<<SPE); } char SPI_SlaveReceive(void) { /* Wait for reception complete */ while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF))) ; /* Return Data Register */ return SPDR; } Note: 17.1 17.1.1 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. SS Pin Functionality Slave Mode When the SPI is configured as a Slave, the Slave Select (SS) pin is always input. When SS is held low, the SPI is activated, and MISO becomes an output if configured so by the user. All other pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are inputs, and the SPI is passive, which 176 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once the SS pin is driven high. The SS pin is useful for packet/byte synchronization to keep the slave bit counter synchronous with the master clock generator. When the SS pin is driven high, the SPI slave will immediately reset the send and receive logic, and drop any partially received data in the Shift Register. 17.1.2 Master Mode When the SPI is configured as a Master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine the direction of the SS pin. If SS is configured as an output, the pin is a general output pin which does not affect the SPI system. Typically, the pin will be driving the SS pin of the SPI Slave. If SS is configured as an input, it must be held high to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS pin is driven low by peripheral circuitry when the SPI is configured as a Master with the SS pin defined as an input, the SPI system interprets this as another master selecting the SPI as a slave and starting to send data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following actions: 1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a Slave. As a result of the SPI becoming a Slave, the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs. 2. The SPIF Flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the interrupt routine will be executed. Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in Master mode, and there exists a possibility that SS is driven low, the interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is still set. If the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it must be set by the user to re-enable SPI Master mode. 17.1.3 SPI Control Register – SPCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPCR • Bit 7 – SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR Register is set and the if the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set. • Bit 6 – SPE: SPI Enable When the SPE bit is written to one, the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI operations. • Bit 5 – DORD: Data Order When the DORD bit is written to one, the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When the DORD bit is written to zero, the MSB of the data word is transmitted first. • Bit 4 – MSTR: Master/Slave Select This bit selects Master SPI mode when written to one, and Slave SPI mode when written logic zero. If SS is configured as an input and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared, 177 7593K–AVR–11/09 and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have to set MSTR to re-enable SPI Master mode. • Bit 3 – CPOL: Clock Polarity When this bit is written to one, SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is written to zero, SCK is low when idle. Refer to Figure 17-3 and Figure 17-4 for an example. The CPOL functionality is summarized below: Table 17-2. CPOL Functionality CPOL Leading Edge Trailing Edge 0 Rising Falling 1 Falling Rising • Bit 2 – CPHA: Clock Phase The settings of the Clock Phase bit (CPHA) determine if data is sampled on the leading (first) or trailing (last) edge of SCK. Refer to Figure 17-3 and Figure 17-4 for an example. The CPOL functionality is summarized below: Table 17-3. CPHA Functionality CPHA Leading Edge Trailing Edge 0 Sample Setup 1 Setup Sample • Bits 1, 0 – SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0 These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a Master. SPR1 and SPR0 have no effect on the Slave. The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Clock frequency fosc is shown in the following table: Table 17-4. Relationship Between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency SPI2X SPR0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 17.1.4 SPR1 1 SCK Frequency 1 fosc/4 fosc/16 fosc/64 fosc/128 fosc/2 fosc/8 fosc/32 fosc/64 SPI Status Register – SPSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SPIF WCOL – – – – – 0 SPI2X Read/Write R R R R R R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPSR • Bit 7 – SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag 178 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF Flag is set. An interrupt is generated if SPIE in SPCR is set and global interrupts are enabled. If SS is an input and is driven low when the SPI is in Master mode, this will also set the SPIF Flag. SPIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the SPIF bit is cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with SPIF set, then accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR). • Bit 6 – WCOL: Write COLlision Flag The WCOL bit is set if the SPI Data Register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer. The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with WCOL set, and then accessing the SPI Data Register. • Bit 5..1 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero. • Bit 0 – SPI2X: Double SPI Speed Bit When this bit is written logic one the SPI speed (SCK Frequency) will be doubled when the SPI is in Master mode (see Table 17-4). This means that the minimum SCK period will be two CPU clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to work at fosc/4 or lower. The SPI interface on the AT90USB64/128 is also used for program memory and EEPROM downloading or uploading. See page 380 for serial programming and verification. 17.1.5 SPI Data Register – SPDR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSB 0 LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value X X X X X X X X SPDR R/W Undefined The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the Register File and the SPI Shift Register. Writing to the register initiates data transmission. Reading the register causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read. 17.2 Data Modes There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control bits CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats are shown in Figure 17-3 and Figure 17-4. Data bits are shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of the SCK signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. This is clearly seen by summarizing Table 17-2 and Table 17-3, as done below: 179 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 17-5. CPOL Functionality Leading Edge Trailing eDge SPI Mode CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) 0 CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) 1 CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) 2 CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) 3 Figure 17-3. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0 SCK (CPOL = 0) mode 0 SCK (CPOL = 1) mode 2 SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO CHANGE 0 MOSI PIN CHANGE 0 MISO PIN SS MSB first (DORD = 0) MSB LSB first (DORD = 1) LSB Bit 6 Bit 1 Bit 5 Bit 2 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 1 Bit 6 LSB MSB Figure 17-4. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1 SCK (CPOL = 0) mode 1 SCK (CPOL = 1) mode 3 SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO CHANGE 0 MOSI PIN CHANGE 0 MISO PIN SS MSB first (DORD = 0) LSB first (DORD = 1) 180 MSB LSB Bit 6 Bit 1 Bit 5 Bit 2 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 1 Bit 6 LSB MSB AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 18. USART The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous serial Receiver and Transmitter (USART) is a highly flexible serial communication device. The main features are: • • • • • • • • • • • • Full Duplex Operation (Independent Serial Receive and Transmit Registers) Asynchronous or Synchronous Operation Master or Slave Clocked Synchronous Operation High Resolution Baud Rate Generator Supports Serial Frames with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 Data Bits and 1 or 2 Stop Bits Odd or Even Parity Generation and Parity Check Supported by Hardware Data OverRun Detection Framing Error Detection Noise Filtering Includes False Start Bit Detection and Digital Low Pass Filter Three Separate Interrupts on TX Complete, TX Data Register Empty and RX Complete Multi-processor Communication Mode Double Speed Asynchronous Communication Mode . 18.1 Overview A simplified block diagram of the USART Transmitter is shown in Figure 18-1 on page 182. CPU accessible I/O Registers and I/O pins are shown in bold. 181 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 18-1. USART Block Diagram(1) Clock Generator UBRR[H:L] OSC BAUD RATE GENERATOR SYNC LOGIC PIN CONTROL XCK Transmitter TX CONTROL UDR (Transmit) DATA BUS PARITY GENERATOR PIN CONTROL TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER Receiver CLOCK RECOVERY DATA RECOVERY PIN CONTROL UDR (Receive) UCSRA RX CONTROL RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER Note: TxD PARITY CHECKER UCSRB RxD UCSRC 1. See Figure 1-1 on page 3, Table 10-12 on page 84 and for USART pin placement. The dashed boxes in the block diagram separate the three main parts of the USART (listed from the top): Clock Generator, Transmitter and Receiver. Control Registers are shared by all units. The Clock Generation logic consists of synchronization logic for external clock input used by synchronous slave operation, and the baud rate generator. The XCKn (Transfer Clock) pin is only used by synchronous transfer mode. The Transmitter consists of a single write buffer, a serial Shift Register, Parity Generator and Control logic for handling different serial frame formats. The write buffer allows a continuous transfer of data without any delay between frames. The Receiver is the most complex part of the USART module due to its clock and data recovery units. The recovery units are used for asynchronous data reception. In addition to the recovery units, the Receiver includes a Parity Checker, Control logic, a Shift Register and a two level receive buffer (UDRn). The Receiver supports the same frame formats as the Transmitter, and can detect Frame Error, Data OverRun and Parity Errors. 18.2 Clock Generation The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver. The USARTn supports four modes of clock operation: Normal asynchronous, Double Speed asynchronous, Master synchronous and Slave synchronous mode. The UMSELn bit in USART Control and Status Register C (UCSRnC) selects between asynchronous and synchronous operation. Double Speed (asynchronous mode only) is controlled by the U2Xn found in the UCSRnA Register. When using synchronous mode (UMSELn = 1), the Data Direction Register 182 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) controls whether the clock source is internal (Master mode) or external (Slave mode). The XCKn pin is only active when using synchronous mode. Figure 18-2 shows a block diagram of the clock generation logic. Figure 18-2. Clock Generation Logic, Block Diagram UBRR U2X fosc Prescaling Down-Counter UBRR+1 /2 /4 /2 0 1 0 OSC DDR_XCK xcki XCK Pin Sync Register Edge Detector 0 UCPOL txclk UMSEL 1 xcko DDR_XCK 1 1 0 rxclk Signal description: txclk Transmitter clock (Internal Signal). rxclk Receiver base clock (Internal Signal). xcki operation. Input from XCK pin (internal Signal). Used for synchronous slave xcko fOSC 18.2.1 Clock output to XCK pin (Internal Signal). Used for synchronous master operation. XTAL pin frequency (System Clock). Internal Clock Generation – The Baud Rate Generator Internal clock generation is used for the asynchronous and the synchronous master modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 18-2. The USART Baud Rate Register (UBRRn) and the down-counter connected to it function as a programmable prescaler or baud rate generator. The down-counter, running at system clock (fosc), is loaded with the UBRRn value each time the counter has counted down to zero or when the UBRRLn Register is written. A clock is generated each time the counter reaches zero. This clock is the baud rate generator clock output (= fosc/(UBRRn+1)). The Transmitter divides the baud rate generator clock output by 2, 8 or 16 depending on mode. The baud rate generator output is used directly by the Receiver’s clock and data recovery units. However, the recovery units use a state machine that uses 2, 8 or 16 states depending on mode set by the state of the UMSELn, U2Xn and DDR_XCKn bits. 183 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 18-1 contains equations for calculating the baud rate (in bits per second) and for calculating the UBRRn value for each mode of operation using an internally generated clock source. Table 18-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting Operating Mode Equation for Calculating Baud Rate(1) Equation for Calculating UBRR Value f OSC UBRR n = ----------------------- – 1 16 BAUD Asynchronous Normal mode (U2Xn = 0) f OSC BAUD = ----------------------------------------16 ( UBRR n + 1 ) f OSC UBRR n = ------------------- – 1 8 BAUD Asynchronous Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) f OSC BAUD = -------------------------------------8 ( UBRR n + 1 ) f OSC UBRR n = ------------------- – 1 2 BAUD Synchronous Master mode Note: f OSC BAUD = -------------------------------------2 ( UBRR n + 1 ) 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps) BAUD Baud rate (in bits per second, bps) fOSC System Oscillator clock frequency UBRRn Contents of the UBRRHn and UBRRLn Registers, (0-4095) Some examples of UBRRn values for some system clock frequencies are found in Table 18-9 on page 203. 18.2.2 Double Speed Operation (U2Xn) The transfer rate can be doubled by setting the U2Xn bit in UCSRnA. Setting this bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Set this bit to zero when using synchronous operation. Setting this bit will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8, effectively doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. Note however that the Receiver will in this case only use half the number of samples (reduced from 16 to 8) for data sampling and clock recovery, and therefore a more accurate baud rate setting and system clock are required when this mode is used. For the Transmitter, there are no downsides. 184 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 18.2.3 External Clock External clocking is used by the synchronous slave modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 18-2 for details. External clock input from the XCKn pin is sampled by a synchronization register to minimize the chance of meta-stability. The output from the synchronization register must then pass through an edge detector before it can be used by the Transmitter and Receiver. This process introduces a two CPU clock period delay and therefore the maximum external XCKn clock frequency is limited by the following equation: f OSC f XCK < ---------4 Note that fosc depends on the stability of the system clock source. It is therefore recommended to add some margin to avoid possible loss of data due to frequency variations. 18.2.4 Synchronous Clock Operation When synchronous mode is used (UMSELn = 1), the XCKn pin will be used as either clock input (Slave) or clock output (Master). The dependency between the clock edges and data sampling or data change is the same. The basic principle is that data input (on RxDn) is sampled at the opposite XCKn clock edge of the edge the data output (TxDn) is changed. Figure 18-3. Synchronous Mode XCKn Timing. UCPOL = 1 XCK RxD / TxD Sample UCPOL = 0 XCK RxD / TxD Sample The UCPOLn bit UCRSC selects which XCKn clock edge is used for data sampling and which is used for data change. As Figure 18-3 shows, when UCPOLn is zero the data will be changed at rising XCKn edge and sampled at falling XCKn edge. If UCPOLn is set, the data will be changed at falling XCKn edge and sampled at rising XCKn edge. 18.3 Frame Formats A serial frame is defined to be one character of data bits with synchronization bits (start and stop bits), and optionally a parity bit for error checking. The USART accepts all 30 combinations of the following as valid frame formats: • 1 start bit • 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits • no, even or odd parity bit • 1 or 2 stop bits 185 7593K–AVR–11/09 A frame starts with the start bit followed by the least significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of nine, are succeeding, ending with the most significant bit. If enabled, the parity bit is inserted after the data bits, before the stop bits. When a complete frame is transmitted, it can be directly followed by a new frame, or the communication line can be set to an idle (high) state. Figure 18-4 illustrates the possible combinations of the frame formats. Bits inside brackets are optional. Figure 18-4. Frame Formats FRAME (IDLE) St 0 1 2 3 4 [5] [6] St Sp1 [Sp2] (St / IDLE) Parity bit. Can be odd or even. Sp [P] Data bits (0 to 8). P [8] Start bit, always low. (n) [7] Stop bit, always high. IDLE must be No transfers on the communication line (RxDn or TxDn). An IDLE line high. The frame format used by the USART is set by the UCSZn2:0, UPMn1:0 and USBSn bits in UCSRnB and UCSRnC. The Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter. The USART Character SiZe (UCSZn2:0) bits select the number of data bits in the frame. The USART Parity mode (UPMn1:0) bits enable and set the type of parity bit. The selection between one or two stop bits is done by the USART Stop Bit Select (USBSn) bit. The Receiver ignores the second stop bit. An FE (Frame Error) will therefore only be detected in the cases where the first stop bit is zero. 18.3.1 Parity Bit Calculation The parity bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of all the data bits. If odd parity is used, the result of the exclusive or is inverted. The relation between the parity bit and data bits is as follows:: P even = d n – 1 ⊕ … ⊕ d 3 ⊕ d 2 ⊕ d 1 ⊕ d 0 ⊕ 0 P odd = d n – 1 ⊕ … ⊕ d 3 ⊕ d 2 ⊕ d 1 ⊕ d 0 ⊕ 1 Peven odd Parity bit using even parity P Parity bit using odd parity dn Data bit n of the character If used, the parity bit is located between the last data bit and first stop bit of a serial frame. 186 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 18.4 USART Initialization The USART has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting frame format and enabling the Transmitter or the Receiver depending on the usage. For interrupt driven USART operation, the Global Interrupt Flag should be cleared (and interrupts globally disabled) when doing the initialization. Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate or frame format, be sure that there are no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn Flag can be used to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers, and the RXC Flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose. The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume asynchronous operation using polling (no interrupts enabled) and a fixed frame format. The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 Registers. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Init: ; Set baud rate out UBRRHn, r17 out UBRRLn, r16 ; Enable receiver and transmitter ldi r16, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn) out UCSRnB,r16 ; Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit ldi r16, (1<<USBSn)|(3<<UCSZn0) out UCSRnC,r16 ret C Code Example(1) void USART_Init( unsigned int baud ) { /* Set baud rate */ UBRRHn = (unsigned char)(baud>>8); UBRRLn = (unsigned char)baud; /* Enable receiver and transmitter */ UCSRnB = (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn); /* Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit */ UCSRnC = (1<<USBSn)|(3<<UCSZn0); } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. More advanced initialization routines can be made that include frame format as parameters, disable interrupts and so on. However, many applications use a fixed setting of the baud and control registers, and for these types of applications the initialization code can be placed directly in the main routine, or be combined with initialization code for other I/O modules. 187 7593K–AVR–11/09 18.5 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter The USART Transmitter is enabled by setting the Transmit Enable (TXEN) bit in the UCSRnB Register. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxDn pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the Transmitter’s serial output. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before doing any transmissions. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be overridden and used as transmission clock. 18.5.1 Sending Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bit A data transmission is initiated by loading the transmit buffer with the data to be transmitted. The CPU can load the transmit buffer by writing to the UDRn I/O location. The buffered data in the transmit buffer will be moved to the Shift Register when the Shift Register is ready to send a new frame. The Shift Register is loaded with new data if it is in idle state (no ongoing transmission) or immediately after the last stop bit of the previous frame is transmitted. When the Shift Register is loaded with new data, it will transfer one complete frame at the rate given by the Baud Register, U2Xn bit or by XCKn depending on mode of operation. The following code examples show a simple USART transmit function based on polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits, the most significant bits written to the UDRn are ignored. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in Register R16 Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Transmit: ; Wait for empty transmit buffer sbis UCSRnA,UDREn rjmp USART_Transmit ; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data out UDRn,r16 ret C Code Example(1) void USART_Transmit( unsigned char data ) { /* Wait for empty transmit buffer */ while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) ) ; /* Put data into buffer, sends the data */ UDRn = data; } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag, before loading it with new data to be transmitted. If the Data Register Empty interrupt is utilized, the interrupt routine writes the data into the buffer. 18.5.2 188 Sending Frames with 9 Data Bit If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn = 7), the ninth bit must be written to the TXB8 bit in UCSRnB before the low byte of the character is written to UDRn. The following code examples AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 show a transmit function that handles 9-bit characters. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in registers R17:R16. Assembly Code Example(1)(2) USART_Transmit: ; Wait for empty transmit buffer sbis UCSRnA,UDREn rjmp USART_Transmit ; Copy 9th bit from r17 to TXB8 cbi UCSRnB,TXB8 sbrc r17,0 sbi UCSRnB,TXB8 ; Put LSB data (r16) into buffer, sends the data out UDRn,r16 ret C Code Example(1)(2) void USART_Transmit( unsigned int data ) { /* Wait for empty transmit buffer */ while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn))) ) ; /* Copy 9th bit to TXB8 */ UCSRnB &= ~(1<<TXB8); if ( data & 0x0100 ) UCSRnB |= (1<<TXB8); /* Put data into buffer, sends the data */ UDRn = data; } Notes: 1. These transmit functions are written to be general functions. They can be optimized if the contents of the UCSRnB is static. For example, only the TXB8 bit of the UCSRnB Register is used after initialization. 2. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The ninth bit can be used for indicating an address frame when using multi processor communication mode or for other protocol handling as for example synchronization. 18.5.3 Transmitter Flags and Interrupts The USART Transmitter has two flags that indicate its state: USART Data Register Empty (UDREn) and Transmit Complete (TXCn). Both flags can be used for generating interrupts. The Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag indicates whether the transmit buffer is ready to receive new data. This bit is set when the transmit buffer is empty, and cleared when the transmit buffer contains data to be transmitted that has not yet been moved into the Shift Register. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing the UCSRnA Register. When the Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable (UDRIEn) bit in UCSRnB is written to one, the USART Data Register Empty Interrupt will be executed as long as UDREn is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). UDREn is cleared by writing UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmission is used, the Data Register Empty interrupt routine must either write new data to 189 7593K–AVR–11/09 UDRn in order to clear UDREn or disable the Data Register Empty interrupt, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates. The Transmit Complete (TXCn) Flag bit is set one when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer. The TXCn Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag is useful in half-duplex communication interfaces (like the RS-485 standard), where a transmitting application must enter receive mode and free the communication bus immediately after completing the transmission. When the Transmit Compete Interrupt Enable (TXCIEn) bit in UCSRnB is set, the USART Transmit Complete Interrupt will be executed when the TXCn Flag becomes set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When the transmit complete interrupt is used, the interrupt handling routine does not have to clear the TXCn Flag, this is done automatically when the interrupt is executed. 18.5.4 Parity Generator The Parity Generator calculates the parity bit for the serial frame data. When parity bit is enabled (UPMn1 = 1), the transmitter control logic inserts the parity bit between the last data bit and the first stop bit of the frame that is sent. 18.5.5 Disabling the Transmitter The disabling of the Transmitter (setting the TXEN to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxDn pin. 18.6 Data Reception – The USART Receiver The USART Receiver is enabled by writing the Receive Enable (RXENn) bit in the UCSRnB Register to one. When the Receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the Receiver’s serial input. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before any serial reception can be done. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be used as transfer clock. 18.6.1 Receiving Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bits The Receiver starts data reception when it detects a valid start bit. Each bit that follows the start bit will be sampled at the baud rate or XCKn clock, and shifted into the Receive Shift Register until the first stop bit of a frame is received. A second stop bit will be ignored by the Receiver. When the first stop bit is received, i.e., a complete serial frame is present in the Receive Shift Register, the contents of the Shift Register will be moved into the receive buffer. The receive buffer can then be read by reading the UDRn I/O location. The following code example shows a simple USART receive function based on polling of the Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits the most significant 190 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 bits of the data read from the UDRn will be masked to zero. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Receive: ; Wait for data to be received sbis UCSRnA, RXCn rjmp USART_Receive ; Get and return received data from buffer in r16, UDRn ret C Code Example(1) unsigned char USART_Receive( void ) { /* Wait for data to be received */ while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) ) ; /* Get and return received data from buffer */ return UDRn; } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The function simply waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag, before reading the buffer and returning the value. 18.6.2 Receiving Frames with 9 Data Bits If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn=7) the ninth bit must be read from the RXB8n bit in UCSRnB before reading the low bits from the UDRn. This rule applies to the FEn, DORn and UPEn Status Flags as well. Read status from UCSRnA, then data from UDRn. Reading the UDRn I/O location will change the state of the receive buffer FIFO and consequently the TXB8n, FEn, DORn and UPEn bits, which all are stored in the FIFO, will change. The following code example shows a simple USART receive function that handles both nine bit characters and the status bits. 191 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Receive: ; Wait for data to be received sbis UCSRnA, RXCn rjmp USART_Receive ; Get status and 9th bit, then data from buffer in r18, UCSRnA in r17, UCSRnB in r16, UDRn ; If error, return -1 andi r18,(1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn) breq USART_ReceiveNoError ldi r17, HIGH(-1) ldi r16, LOW(-1) USART_ReceiveNoError: ; Filter the 9th bit, then return lsr r17 andi r17, 0x01 ret C Code Example(1) unsigned int USART_Receive( void ) { unsigned char status, resh, resl; /* Wait for data to be received */ while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) ) ; /* Get status and 9th bit, then data */ /* from buffer */ status = UCSRnA; resh = UCSRnB; resl = UDRn; /* If error, return -1 */ if ( status & (1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn) ) return -1; /* Filter the 9th bit, then return */ resh = (resh >> 1) & 0x01; return ((resh << 8) | resl); } Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. The receive function example reads all the I/O Registers into the Register File before any computation is done. This gives an optimal receive buffer utilization since the buffer location read will be free to accept new data as early as possible. 18.6.3 192 Receive Compete Flag and Interrupt The USART Receiver has one flag that indicates the Receiver state. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive buffer. This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn = 0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete routine must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates. 18.6.4 Receiver Error Flags The USART Receiver has three Error Flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the error status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location. Another equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts. The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one), and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all, except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set there was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from the Shift Register to the receive buffer. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more details see “Parity Bit Calculation” on page 186 and “Parity Checker” on page 193. 18.6.5 Parity Checker The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of Parity Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the Parity Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result with the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer together with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by software to check if the frame had a Parity Error. 193 7593K–AVR–11/09 The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. 18.6.6 Disabling the Receiver In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (i.e., the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost 18.6.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, i.e., the buffer will be emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Flush: sbis UCSRnA, RXCn ret in r16, UDRn rjmp USART_Flush C Code Example(1) void USART_Flush( void ) { unsigned char dummy; while ( UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn) ) dummy = UDRn; } Note: 18.7 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. Asynchronous Data Reception The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits. 18.7.1 194 Asynchronous Clock Recovery The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 18-5 illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process. Note the larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done when the RxDn line is idle (i.e., no communication activity). AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 18-5. Start Bit Sampling RxD IDLE START BIT 0 Sample (U2X = 0) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 Sample (U2X = 1) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 When the clock recovery logic detects a high (idle) to low (start) transition on the RxDn line, the start bit detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample as shown in the figure. The clock recovery logic then uses samples 8, 9, and 10 for Normal mode, and samples 4, 5, and 6 for Double Speed mode (indicated with sample numbers inside boxes on the figure), to decide if a valid start bit is received. If two or more of these three samples have logical high levels (the majority wins), the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the Receiver starts looking for the next high to low-transition. If however, a valid start bit is detected, the clock recovery logic is synchronized and the data recovery can begin. The synchronization process is repeated for each start bit. 18.7.2 Asynchronous Data Recovery When the receiver clock is synchronized to the start bit, the data recovery can begin. The data recovery unit uses a state machine that has 16 states for each bit in Normal mode and eight states for each bit in Double Speed mode. Figure 18-6 shows the sampling of the data bits and the parity bit. Each of the samples is given a number that is equal to the state of the recovery unit. Figure 18-6. Sampling of Data and Parity Bit RxD BIT n Sample (U2X = 0) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Sample (U2X = 1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 The decision of the logic level of the received bit is taken by doing a majority voting of the logic value to the three samples in the center of the received bit. The center samples are emphasized on the figure by having the sample number inside boxes. The majority voting process is done as follows: If two or all three samples have high levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 1. If two or all three samples have low levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 0. This majority voting process acts as a low pass filter for the incoming signal on the RxDn pin. The recovery process is then repeated until a complete frame is received. Including the first stop bit. Note that the Receiver only uses the first stop bit of a frame. Figure 18-7 shows the sampling of the stop bit and the earliest possible beginning of the start bit of the next frame. 195 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 18-7. Stop Bit Sampling and Next Start Bit Sampling RxD STOP 1 (A) (B) (C) Sample 1 (U2X = 0) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0/1 0/1 0/1 Sample 1 (U2X = 1) 2 3 4 5 6 0/1 The same majority voting is done to the stop bit as done for the other bits in the frame. If the stop bit is registered to have a logic 0 value, the Frame Error (FEn) Flag will be set. A new high to low transition indicating the start bit of a new frame can come right after the last of the bits used for majority voting. For Normal Speed mode, the first low level sample can be at point marked (A) in Figure 18-7. For Double Speed mode the first low level must be delayed to (B). (C) marks a stop bit of full length. The early start bit detection influences the operational range of the Receiver. 18.7.3 Asynchronous Operational Range The operational range of the Receiver is dependent on the mismatch between the received bit rate and the internally generated baud rate. If the Transmitter is sending frames at too fast or too slow bit rates, or the internally generated baud rate of the Receiver does not have a similar (see Table 18-2) base frequency, the Receiver will not be able to synchronize the frames to the start bit. The following equations can be used to calculate the ratio of the incoming data rate and internal receiver baud rate. Table 1. (D + 1)S R slow = -----------------------------------------S – 1 + D ⋅ S + SF (D + 2 )S R fast = ----------------------------------( D + 1 ) S + SM D Sum of character size and parity size (D = 5 to 10 bit) S Samples per bit. S = 16 for Normal Speed mode and S = 8 for Double Speed mode. SF First sample number used for majority voting. SF = 8 for normal speed and SF = 4 for Double Speed mode. SM Middle sample number used for majority voting. SM = 9 for normal speed and SM = 5 for Double Speed mode. Rslow is the ratio of the slowest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate. Rfast is the ratio of the fastest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate. Table 18-2 and Table 18-3 list the maximum receiver baud rate error that can be tolerated. Note that Normal Speed mode has higher toleration of baud rate variations. 196 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 18-2. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Normal Speed Mode (U2Xn = 0) D # (Data+Parity Bit) Rslow (%) Rfast (%) Max Total Error (%) Recommended Max Receiver Error (%) 5 93.20 106.67 +6.67/-6.8 ± 3.0 6 94.12 105.79 +5.79/-5.88 ± 2.5 7 94.81 105.11 +5.11/-5.19 ± 2.0 8 95.36 104.58 +4.58/-4.54 ± 2.0 9 95.81 104.14 +4.14/-4.19 ± 1.5 10 96.17 103.78 +3.78/-3.83 ± 1.5 Table 18-3. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Double Speed Mode (U2Xn = 1) D # (Data+Parity Bit) Rslow (%) Rfast (%) Max Total Error (%) Recommended Max Receiver Error (%) 5 94.12 105.66 +5.66/-5.88 ± 2.5 6 94.92 104.92 +4.92/-5.08 ± 2.0 7 95.52 104,35 +4.35/-4.48 ± 1.5 8 96.00 103.90 +3.90/-4.00 ± 1.5 9 96.39 103.53 +3.53/-3.61 ± 1.5 10 96.70 103.23 +3.23/-3.30 ± 1.0 The recommendations of the maximum receiver baud rate error was made under the assumption that the Receiver and Transmitter equally divides the maximum total error. There are two possible sources for the receivers baud rate error. The Receiver’s system clock (XTAL) will always have some minor instability over the supply voltage range and the temperature range. When using a crystal to generate the system clock, this is rarely a problem, but for a resonator the system clock may differ more than 2% depending of the resonators tolerance. The second source for the error is more controllable. The baud rate generator can not always do an exact division of the system frequency to get the baud rate wanted. In this case an UBRR value that gives an acceptable low error can be used if possible. 18.8 Multi-processor Communication Mode Setting the Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn) bit in UCSRnA enables a filtering function of incoming frames received by the USART Receiver. Frames that do not contain address information will be ignored and not put into the receive buffer. This effectively reduces the number of incoming frames that has to be handled by the CPU, in a system with multiple MCUs that communicate via the same serial bus. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting, but has to be used differently when it is a part of a system utilizing the Multi-processor Communication mode. If the Receiver is set up to receive frames that contain 5 to 8 data bits, then the first stop bit indicates if the frame contains data or address information. If the Receiver is set up for frames with 197 7593K–AVR–11/09 nine data bits, then the ninth bit (RXB8n) is used for identifying address and data frames. When the frame type bit (the first stop or the ninth bit) is one, the frame contains an address. When the frame type bit is zero the frame is a data frame. The Multi-processor Communication mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data from a master MCU. This is done by first decoding an address frame to find out which MCU has been addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been addressed, it will receive the following data frames as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the received frames until another address frame is received. 18.8.1 Using MPCMn For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it can use a 9-bit character frame format (UCSZn = 7). The ninth bit (TXB8n) must be set when an address frame (TXB8n = 1) or cleared when a data frame (TXB = 0) is being transmitted. The slave MCUs must in this case be set to use a 9-bit character frame format. The following procedure should be used to exchange data in Multi-processor Communication mode: 1. All Slave MCUs are in Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn in UCSRnA is set). 2. The Master MCU sends an address frame, and all slaves receive and read this frame. In the Slave MCUs, the RXCn Flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal. 3. Each Slave MCU reads the UDRn Register and determines if it has been selected. If so, it clears the MPCMn bit in UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte and keeps the MPCMn setting. 4. The addressed MCU will receive all data frames until a new address frame is received. The other Slave MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data frames. 5. When the last data frame is received by the addressed MCU, the addressed MCU sets the MPCMn bit and waits for a new address frame from master. The process then repeats from 2. Using any of the 5- to 8-bit character frame formats is possible, but impractical since the Receiver must change between using n and n+1 character frame formats. This makes fullduplex operation difficult since the Transmitter and Receiver uses the same character size setting. If 5- to 8-bit character frames are used, the Transmitter must be set to use two stop bit (USBSn = 1) since the first stop bit is used for indicating the frame type. Do not use Read-Modify-Write instructions (SBI and CBI) to set or clear the MPCMn bit. The MPCMn bit shares the same I/O location as the TXCn Flag and this might accidentally be cleared when using SBI or CBI instructions. 18.9 18.9.1 USART Register Description USART I/O Data Register n– UDRn Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXB[7:0] UDRn (Read) TXB[7:0] UDRn (Write) Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The USART Transmit Data Buffer Register and USART Receive Data Buffer Registers share the same I/O address referred to as USART Data Register or UDRn. The Transmit Data Buffer Reg- 198 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 ister (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDRn Register location. Reading the UDRn Register location will return the contents of the Receive Data Buffer Register (RXB). For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused bits will be ignored by the Transmitter and set to zero by the Receiver. The transmit buffer can only be written when the UDREn Flag in the UCSRnA Register is set. Data written to UDRn when the UDREn Flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART Transmitter. When data is written to the transmit buffer, and the Transmitter is enabled, the Transmitter will load the data into the Transmit Shift Register when the Shift Register is empty. Then the data will be serially transmitted on the TxDn pin. The receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the receive buffer is accessed. Due to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use Read-ModifyWrite instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful when using bit test instructions (SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO. 18.9.2 USART Control and Status Register A – UCSRnA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCn TXCn UDREn FEn DORn UPEn U2Xn MPCMn Read/Write R R/W R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 UCSRnA • Bit 7 – RXCn: USART Receive Complete This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. The RXCn Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit). • Bit 6 – TXCn: USART Transmit Complete This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag can generate a Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIEn bit). • Bit 5 – UDREn: USART Data Register Empty The UDREn Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn Flag can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIEn bit). UDREn is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready. • Bit 4 – FEn: Frame Error This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Frame Error when received. I.e., when the first stop bit of the next character in the receive buffer is zero. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. The FEn bit is zero when the stop bit of received data is one. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 3 – DORn: Data OverRun This bit is set if a Data OverRun condition is detected. A Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive Shift Register, and a 199 7593K–AVR–11/09 new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 2 – UPEn: USART Parity Error This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 1 – U2Xn: Double the USART Transmission Speed This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using synchronous operation. Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8 effectively doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. • Bit 0 – MPCMn: Multi-processor Communication Mode This bit enables the Multi-processor Communication mode. When the MPCMn bit is written to one, all the incoming frames received by the USART Receiver that do not contain address information will be ignored. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting. For more detailed information see “Multi-processor Communication Mode” on page 197. 18.9.3 USART Control and Status Register n B – UCSRnB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCIEn TXCIEn UDRIEn RXENn TXENn UCSZn2 RXB8n TXB8n Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UCSRnB • Bit 7 – RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable n Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn Flag. A USART Receive Complete interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 6 – TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable n Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn Flag. A USART Transmit Complete interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 5 – UDRIEn: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable n Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn Flag. A Data Register Empty interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 4 – RXENn: Receiver Enable n Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver. The Receiver will override normal port operation for the RxDn pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the receive buffer invalidating the FEn, DORn, and UPEn Flags. • Bit 3 – TXENn: Transmitter Enable n Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override normal port operation for the TxDn pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter (writing TXENn to 200 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port. • Bit 2 – UCSZn2: Character Size n The UCSZn2 bits combined with the UCSZn1:0 bit in UCSRnC sets the number of data bits (Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use. • Bit 1 – RXB8n: Receive Data Bit 8 n RXB8n is the ninth data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be read before reading the low bits from UDRn. • Bit 0 – TXB8n: Transmit Data Bit 8 n TXB8n is the ninth data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be written before writing the low bits to UDRn. 18.9.4 USART Control and Status Register n C – UCSRnC Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UMSELn1 UMSELn0 UPMn1 UPMn0 USBSn UCSZn1 UCSZn0 UCPOLn Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 UCSRnC • Bits 7:6 – UMSELn1:0 USART Mode Select These bits select the mode of operation of the USARTn as shown in Table 18-4.. Table 18-4. UMSELn Bits Settings UMSELn1 0 0 Asynchronous USART 0 1 Synchronous USART 1 0 (Reserved) 1 Note: UMSELn0 Mode 1 Master SPI (MSPIM)(1) 1. See “USART in SPI Mode” on page 206 for full description of the Master SPI Mode (MSPIM) operation • Bits 5:4 – UPMn1:0: Parity Mode These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the Transmitter will automatically generate and send the parity of the transmitted data bits within each frame. The Receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data and compare it to the UPMn setting. If a mismatch is detected, the UPEn Flag in UCSRnA will be set. Table 18-5. UPMn Bits Settings UPMn1 UPMn0 Parity Mode 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Enabled, Even Parity 1 1 Enabled, Odd Parity 201 7593K–AVR–11/09 • Bit 3 – USBSn: Stop Bit Select This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the Transmitter. The Receiver ignores this setting. Table 18-6. USBS Bit Settings USBSn Stop Bit(s) 0 1-bit 1 2-bit • Bit 2:1 – UCSZn1:0: Character Size The UCSZn1:0 bits combined with the UCSZn2 bit in UCSRnB sets the number of data bits (Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use. Table 18-7. UCSZn Bits Settings UCSZn2 UCSZn1 UCSZn0 Character Size 0 0 0 5-bit 0 0 1 6-bit 0 1 0 7-bit 0 1 1 8-bit 1 0 0 Reserved 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 9-bit • Bit 0 – UCPOLn: Clock Polarity This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous mode is used. The UCPOLn bit sets the relationship between data output change and data input sample, and the synchronous clock (XCKn). Table 18-8. UCPOLn Bit Settings Transmitted Data Changed (Output of TxDn Pin) Received Data Sampled (Input on RxDn Pin) 0 Rising XCKn Edge Falling XCKn Edge 1 Falling XCKn Edge Rising XCKn Edge UCPOLn 18.9.5 USART Baud Rate Registers – UBRRLn and UBRRHn Bit 15 14 13 12 11 – – – – UBRR[11:8] 10 6 5 4 3 2 9 8 UBRRHn UBRR[7:0] 7 Read/Write UBRRLn 1 0 R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 15:12 – Reserved Bits 202 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 These bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bit must be written to zero when UBRRH is written. • Bit 11:0 – UBRR11:0: USART Baud Rate Register This is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRRH contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRRL contains the eight least significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRRL will trigger an immediate update of the baud rate prescaler. 18.10 Examples of Baud Rate Setting For standard crystal and resonator frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates for asynchronous operation can be generated by using the UBRR settings in Table 18-9 to Table 18-12. UBRR values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than 0.5% from the target baud rate, are bold in the table. Higher error ratings are acceptable, but the Receiver will have less noise resistance when the error ratings are high, especially for large serial frames (see “Asynchronous Operational Range” on page 196). The error values are calculated using the following equation: BaudRate Closest Match Error[%] = ⎛ ------------------------------------------------------- – 1⎞ • 100% ⎝ ⎠ BaudRate Table 18-9. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies fosc = 1.0000 MHz fosc = 1.8432 MHz fosc = 2.0000 MHz Baud Rate (bps) UBRR 2400 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 4800 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 9600 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 14.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 19.2k 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 28.8k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 38.4k 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 57.6k 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 76.8k – – 1 -18.6% 1 -25.0% 2 0.0% 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 115.2k – – 0 8.5% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 230.4k – – – – – – 0 0.0% – – – – 250k – – – – – – – – – – 0 0.0% Max. 1. U2Xn = 0 (1) Error U2Xn = 1 UBRR 62.5 kbps Error 125 kbps U2Xn = 0 UBRR Error 115.2 kbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error 230.4 kbps U2Xn = 0 UBRR Error 125 kbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error 250 kbps UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 203 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 18-10. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) fosc = 3.6864 MHz Baud Rate (bps) U2Xn = 0 UBRR fosc = 4.0000 MHz U2Xn = 1 Error UBRR U2Xn = 0 Error UBRR fosc = 7.3728 MHz U2Xn = 1 Error UBRR U2Xn = 0 Error UBRR U2Xn = 1 Error UBRR Error 2400 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 4800 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 9600 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 14.4k 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 19.2k 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 28.8k 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 38.4k 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 57.6k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 76.8k 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 115.2k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 230.4k 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 250k 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 0.5M – – 0 -7.8% – – 0 0.0% 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% – – – – – – – – – – 0 -7.8% 1M Max. 1. 204 (1) 230.4 kbps 460.8 kbps 250 kbps 0.5 Mbps 460.8 kbps 921.6 kbps UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 18-11. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) fosc = 11.0592 MHz fosc = 8.0000 MHz fosc = 14.7456 MHz Baud Rate (bps) UBRR 2400 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 287 0.0% 575 0.0% 383 0.0% 767 0.0% 4800 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 143 0.0% 287 0.0% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 9600 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 71 0.0% 143 0.0% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 14.4k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 63 0.0% 127 0.0% 19.2k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 35 0.0% 71 0.0% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 28.8k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 38.4k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 17 0.0% 35 0.0% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 57.6k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 76.8k 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 8 0.0% 17 0.0% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 115.2k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 230.4k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 250k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 2 -7.8% 5 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 6 5.3% 0.5M 0 0.0% 1 0.0% – – 2 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% – – 0 0.0% – – – – 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% U2Xn = 0 1M Max. 1. (1) Error U2Xn = 1 UBRR 0.5 Mbps Error 1 Mbps U2Xn = 0 UBRR Error 691.2 kbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error 1.3824 Mbps U2Xn = 0 UBRR Error 921.6 kbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error 1.8432 Mbps UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 205 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 18-12. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) fosc = 16.0000 MHz fosc = 18.4320 MHz fosc = 20.0000 MHz Baud Rate (bps) UBRR 2400 416 -0.1% 832 0.0% 479 0.0% 959 0.0% 520 0.0% 1041 0.0% 4800 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 239 0.0% 479 0.0% 259 0.2% 520 0.0% 9600 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 119 0.0% 239 0.0% 129 0.2% 259 0.2% 14.4k 68 0.6% 138 -0.1% 79 0.0% 159 0.0% 86 -0.2% 173 -0.2% 19.2k 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 59 0.0% 119 0.0% 64 0.2% 129 0.2% 28.8k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 39 0.0% 79 0.0% 42 0.9% 86 -0.2% 38.4k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 29 0.0% 59 0.0% 32 -1.4% 64 0.2% 57.6k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 19 0.0% 39 0.0% 21 -1.4% 42 0.9% 76.8k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 14 0.0% 29 0.0% 15 1.7% 32 -1.4% 115.2k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 9 0.0% 19 0.0% 10 -1.4% 21 -1.4% 230.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 4 0.0% 9 0.0% 4 8.5% 10 -1.4% 250k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 4 -7.8% 8 2.4% 4 0.0% 9 0.0% 0.5M 1 0.0% 3 0.0% – – 4 -7.8% – – 4 0.0% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% – – – – – – – – 1M Max. 1. (1) U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 Error UBRR 1 Mbps Error 2 Mbps U2Xn = 0 UBRR Error 1.152 Mbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error U2Xn = 0 UBRR 2.304 Mbps Error 1.25 Mbps U2Xn = 1 UBRR Error 2.5 Mbps UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 19. USART in SPI Mode The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous serial Receiver and Transmitter (USART) can be set to a master SPI compliant mode of operation. The Master SPI Mode (MSPIM) has the following features: • • • • • • • • 19.1 Full Duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer Master Operation Supports all four SPI Modes of Operation (Mode 0, 1, 2, and 3) LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer (Configurable Data Order) Queued Operation (Double Buffered) High Resolution Baud Rate Generator High Speed Operation (fXCKmax = fCK/2) Flexible Interrupt Generation Overview Setting both UMSELn1:0 bits to one enables the USART in MSPIM logic. In this mode of operation the SPI master control logic takes direct control over the USART resources. These resources include the transmitter and receiver shift register and buffers, and the baud rate generator. The parity generator and checker, the data and clock recovery logic, and the RX and TX 206 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 control logic is disabled. The USART RX and TX control logic is replaced by a common SPI transfer control logic. However, the pin control logic and interrupt generation logic is identical in both modes of operation. The I/O register locations are the same in both modes. However, some of the functionality of the control registers changes when using MSPIM. 19.2 Clock Generation The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver. For USART MSPIM mode of operation only internal clock generation (i.e. master operation) is supported. The Data Direction Register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) must therefore be set to one (i.e. as output) for the USART in MSPIM to operate correctly. Preferably the DDR_XCKn should be set up before the USART in MSPIM is enabled (i.e. TXENn and RXENn bit set to one). The internal clock generation used in MSPIM mode is identical to the USART synchronous master mode. The baud rate or UBRRn setting can therefore be calculated using the same equations, see Table 19-1: Table 19-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting Operating Mode Synchronous Master mode Note: Equation for Calculating Baud Rate(1) Equation for Calculating UBRRn Value f OSC BAUD = -------------------------------------2 ( UBRR n + 1 ) f OSC UBRR n = ------------------- – 1 2 BAUD 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps) BAUD fOSC System Oscillator clock frequency UBRRn 19.3 Baud rate (in bits per second, bps) Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL Registers, (0-4095) SPI Data Modes and Timing There are four combinations of XCKn (SCK) phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control bits UCPHAn and UCPOLn. The data transfer timing diagrams are shown in Figure 19-1. Data bits are shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of the XCKn signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. The UCPOLn and UCPHAn function- 207 7593K–AVR–11/09 ality is summarized in Table 19-2. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter. Table 19-2. UCPOLn and UCPHAn Functionality- UCPOLn UCPHAn SPI Mode Leading Edge Trailing Edge 0 0 0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) 0 1 1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) 1 0 2 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) 1 1 3 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) Figure 19-1. UCPHAn and UCPOLn data transfer timing diagrams. UCPHA=0 UCPHA=1 UCPOL=0 19.4 UCPOL=1 XCK XCK Data setup (TXD) Data setup (TXD) Data sample (RXD) Data sample (RXD) XCK XCK Data setup (TXD) Data setup (TXD) Data sample (RXD) Data sample (RXD) Frame Formats A serial frame for the MSPIM is defined to be one character of 8 data bits. The USART in MSPIM mode has two valid frame formats: • 8-bit data with MSB first • 8-bit data with LSB first A frame starts with the least or most significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of eight, are succeeding, ending with the most or least significant bit accordingly. When a complete frame is transmitted, a new frame can directly follow it, or the communication line can be set to an idle (high) state. The UDORDn bit in UCSRnC sets the frame format used by the USART in MSPIM mode. The Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter. 16-bit data transfer can be achieved by writing two data bytes to UDRn. A UART transmit complete interrupt will then signal that the 16-bit value has been shifted out. 19.4.1 208 USART MSPIM Initialization The USART in MSPIM mode has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting master mode of operation (by setting DDR_XCKn to one), setting frame format and enabling the Transmitter and the Receiver. Only the transmitter can operate independently. For interrupt driven USART opera- AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 tion, the Global Interrupt Flag should be cleared (and thus interrupts globally disabled) when doing the initialization. Note: To ensure immediate initialization of the XCKn output the baud-rate register (UBRRn) must be zero at the time the transmitter is enabled. Contrary to the normal mode USART operation the UBRRn must then be written to the desired value after the transmitter is enabled, but before the first transmission is started. Setting UBRRn to zero before enabling the transmitter is not necessary if the initialization is done immediately after a reset since UBRRn is reset to zero. Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate, data mode, or frame format, be sure that there is no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn Flag can be used to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers, and the RXCn Flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose. The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume polling (no interrupts enabled). The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 registers. 209 7593K–AVR–11/09 Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Init: clr r18 out UBRRnH,r18 out UBRRnL,r18 ; Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode. sbi XCKn_DDR, XCKn ; Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0. ldi r18, (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn) out UCSRnC,r18 ; Enable receiver and transmitter. ldi r18, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn) out UCSRnB,r18 ; Set baud rate. ; IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled! out UBRRnH, r17 out UBRRnL, r18 ret C Code Example(1) void USART_Init( unsigned int baud ) { UBRRn = 0; /* Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode. */ XCKn_DDR |= (1<<XCKn); /* Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0. */ UCSRnC = (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn); /* Enable receiver and transmitter. */ UCSRnB = (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn); /* Set baud rate. */ /* IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled */ UBRRn = baud; } Note: 19.5 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. Data Transfer Using the USART in MSPI mode requires the Transmitter to be enabled, i.e. the TXENn bit in the UCSRnB register is set to one. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the Transmitter's serial output. Enabling the receiver is optional and is done by setting the RXENn bit in the UCSRnB register to one. When the receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the Receiver's serial input. The XCKn will in both cases be used as the transfer clock. 210 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 After initialization the USART is ready for doing data transfers. A data transfer is initiated by writing to the UDRn I/O location. This is the case for both sending and receiving data since the transmitter controls the transfer clock. The data written to UDRn is moved from the transmit buffer to the shift register when the shift register is ready to send a new frame. Note: To keep the input buffer in sync with the number of data bytes transmitted, the UDRn register must be read once for each byte transmitted. The input buffer operation is identical to normal USART mode, i.e. if an overflow occurs the character last received will be lost, not the first data in the buffer. This means that if four bytes are transferred, byte 1 first, then byte 2, 3, and 4, and the UDRn is not read before all transfers are completed, then byte 3 to be received will be lost, and not byte 1. The following code examples show a simple USART in MSPIM mode transfer function based on polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag and the Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in Register R16 and the data received will be available in the same register (R16) after the function returns. The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag, before loading it with new data to be transmitted. The function then waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag, before reading the buffer and returning the value.. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_MSPIM_Transfer: ; Wait for empty transmit buffer sbis UCSRnA, UDREn rjmp USART_MSPIM_Transfer ; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data out UDRn,r16 ; Wait for data to be received USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn: sbis UCSRnA, RXCn rjmp USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn ; Get and return received data from buffer in r16, UDRn ret C Code Example(1) unsigned char USART_Receive( void ) { /* Wait for empty transmit buffer */ while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) ); /* Put data into buffer, sends the data */ UDRn = data; /* Wait for data to be received */ while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) ); /* Get and return received data from buffer */ return UDRn; } 211 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 9. 19.5.1 Transmitter and Receiver Flags and Interrupts The RXCn, TXCn, and UDREn flags and corresponding interrupts in USART in MSPIM mode are identical in function to the normal USART operation. However, the receiver error status flags (FE, DOR, and PE) are not in use and is always read as zero. 19.5.2 Disabling the Transmitter or Receiver The disabling of the transmitter or receiver in USART in MSPIM mode is identical in function to the normal USART operation. 19.6 USART MSPIM Register Description The following section describes the registers used for SPI operation using the USART. 19.6.1 USART MSPIM I/O Data Register - UDRn The function and bit description of the USART data register (UDRn) in MSPI mode is identical to normal USART operation. See “USART I/O Data Register n– UDRn” on page 198. 19.6.2 USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n A - UCSRnA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCn TXCn UDREn - - - - - Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 UCSRnA • Bit 7 - RXCn: USART Receive Complete This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. The RXCn Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit). • Bit 6 - TXCn: USART Transmit Complete This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag can generate a Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIEn bit). • Bit 5 - UDREn: USART Data Register Empty The UDREn Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn Flag can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE bit). UDREn is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready. • Bit 4:0 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnA is written. 212 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 19.6.3 USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n B - UCSRnB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCIEn TXCIEn UDRIE RXENn TXENn - - - Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 UCSRnB • Bit 7 - RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn Flag. A USART Receive Complete interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 6 - TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn Flag. A USART Transmit Complete interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 5 - UDRIE: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn Flag. A Data Register Empty interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIE bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 4 - RXENn: Receiver Enable Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver in MSPIM mode. The Receiver will override normal port operation for the RxDn pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the receive buffer. Only enabling the receiver in MSPI mode (i.e. setting RXENn=1 and TXENn=0) has no meaning since it is the transmitter that controls the transfer clock and since only master mode is supported. • Bit 3 - TXENn: Transmitter Enable Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override normal port operation for the TxDn pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter (writing TXENn to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port. • Bit 2:0 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnB is written. 19.6.4 USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n C - UCSRnC Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UMSELn1 UMSELn0 - - - UDORDn UCPHAn UCPOLn Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 UCSRnC • Bit 7:6 - UMSELn1:0: USART Mode Select 213 7593K–AVR–11/09 These bits select the mode of operation of the USART as shown in Table 19-3. See “USART Control and Status Register n C – UCSRnC” on page 201 for full description of the normal USART operation. The MSPIM is enabled when both UMSELn bits are set to one. The UDORDn, UCPHAn, and UCPOLn can be set in the same write operation where the MSPIM is enabled. Table 19-3. UMSELn Bits Settings UMSELn1 UMSELn0 Mode 0 0 Asynchronous USART 0 1 Synchronous USART 1 0 (Reserved) 1 1 Master SPI (MSPIM) • Bit 5:3 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnC is written. • Bit 2 - UDORDn: Data Order When set to one the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When set to zero the MSB of the data word is transmitted first. Refer to the Frame Formats section page 4 for details. • Bit 1 - UCPHAn: Clock Phase The UCPHAn bit setting determine if data is sampled on the leasing edge (first) or tailing (last) edge of XCKn. Refer to the SPI Data Modes and Timing section page 4 for details. • Bit 0 - UCPOLn: Clock Polarity The UCPOLn bit sets the polarity of the XCKn clock. The combination of the UCPOLn and UCPHAn bit settings determine the timing of the data transfer. Refer to the SPI Data Modes and Timing section page 4 for details. 19.6.5 19.7 USART MSPIM Baud Rate Registers - UBRRnL and UBRRnH The function and bit description of the baud rate registers in MSPI mode is identical to normal USART operation. See “USART Baud Rate Registers – UBRRLn and UBRRHn” on page 202. AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI The USART in MSPIM mode is fully compatible with the AVR SPI regarding: • Master mode timing diagram. • The UCPOLn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPOL bit. • The UCPHAn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPHA bit. • The UDORDn bit functionality is identical to the SPI DORD bit. However, since the USART in MSPIM mode reuses the USART resources, the use of the USART in MSPIM mode is somewhat different compared to the SPI. In addition to differences of the control register bits, and that only master operation is supported by the USART in MSPIM mode, the following features differ between the two modules: • The USART in MSPIM mode includes (double) buffering of the transmitter. The SPI has no buffer. 214 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • The USART in MSPIM mode receiver includes an additional buffer level. • The SPI WCOL (Write Collision) bit is not included in USART in MSPIM mode. • The SPI double speed mode (SPI2X) bit is not included. However, the same effect is achieved by setting UBRRn accordingly. • Interrupt timing is not compatible. • Pin control differs due to the master only operation of the USART in MSPIM mode. A comparison of the USART in MSPIM mode and the SPI pins is shown in Table 19-4 on page 215. Table 19-4. Comparison of USART in MSPIM mode and SPI pins. USART_MSPIM SPI Comment TxDn MOSI Master Out only RxDn MISO Master In only XCKn SCK (Functionally identical) (N/A) SS Not supported by USART in MSPIM 215 7593K–AVR–11/09 20. 2-wire Serial Interface 20.1 Features • • • • • • • • • • 20.2 Simple Yet Powerful and Flexible Communication Interface, only two Bus Lines Needed Both Master and Slave Operation Supported Device can Operate as Transmitter or Receiver 7-bit Address Space Allows up to 128 Different Slave Addresses Multi-master Arbitration Support Up to 400 kHz Data Transfer Speed Slew-rate Limited Output Drivers Noise Suppression Circuitry Rejects Spikes on Bus Lines Fully Programmable Slave Address with General Call Support Address Recognition Causes Wake-up When AVR is in Sleep Mode 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition The 2-wire Serial Interface (TWI) is ideally suited for typical microcontroller applications. The TWI protocol allows the systems designer to interconnect up to 128 different devices using only two bi-directional bus lines, one for clock (SCL) and one for data (SDA). The only external hardware needed to implement the bus is a single pull-up resistor for each of the TWI bus lines. All devices connected to the bus have individual addresses, and mechanisms for resolving bus contention are inherent in the TWI protocol. Figure 20-1. TWI Bus Interconnection VCC Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL 20.2.1 TWI Terminology The following definitions are frequently encountered in this section. Table 20-1. TWI Terminology Term Master The device that initiates and terminates a transmission. The Master also generates the SCL clock. Slave The device addressed by a Master. Transmitter The device placing data on the bus. Receiver 216 Description The device reading data from the bus. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The Power Reduction TWI bit, PRTWI bit in “Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0” on page 54 must be written to zero to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface. 20.2.2 Electrical Interconnection As depicted in Figure 20-1, both bus lines are connected to the positive supply voltage through pull-up resistors. The bus drivers of all TWI-compliant devices are open-drain or open-collector. This implements a wired-AND function which is essential to the operation of the interface. A low level on a TWI bus line is generated when one or more TWI devices output a zero. A high level is output when all TWI devices trim-state their outputs, allowing the pull-up resistors to pull the line high. Note that all AVR devices connected to the TWI bus must be powered in order to allow any bus operation. The number of devices that can be connected to the bus is only limited by the bus capacitance limit of 400 pF and the 7-bit slave address space. A detailed specification of the electrical characteristics of the TWI is given in “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 403. Two different sets of specifications are presented there, one relevant for bus speeds below 100 kHz, and one valid for bus speeds up to 400 kHz. 20.3 20.3.1 Data Transfer and Frame Format Transferring Bits Each data bit transferred on the TWI bus is accompanied by a pulse on the clock line. The level of the data line must be stable when the clock line is high. The only exception to this rule is for generating start and stop conditions. Figure 20-2. Data Validity SDA SCL Data Stable Data Stable Data Change 20.3.2 START and STOP Conditions The Master initiates and terminates a data transmission. The transmission is initiated when the Master issues a START condition on the bus, and it is terminated when the Master issues a STOP condition. Between a START and a STOP condition, the bus is considered busy, and no other master should try to seize control of the bus. A special case occurs when a new START condition is issued between a START and STOP condition. This is referred to as a REPEATED START condition, and is used when the Master wishes to initiate a new transfer without relinquishing control of the bus. After a REPEATED START, the bus is considered busy until the next STOP. This is identical to the START behavior, and therefore START is used to describe both START and REPEATED START for the remainder of this datasheet, unless otherwise noted. As 217 7593K–AVR–11/09 depicted below, START and STOP conditions are signalled by changing the level of the SDA line when the SCL line is high. Figure 20-3. START, REPEATED START and STOP conditions SDA SCL STOP START 20.3.3 START REPEATED START STOP Address Packet Format All address packets transmitted on the TWI bus are 9 bits long, consisting of 7 address bits, one READ/WRITE control bit and an acknowledge bit. If the READ/WRITE bit is set, a read operation is to be performed, otherwise a write operation should be performed. When a Slave recognizes that it is being addressed, it should acknowledge by pulling SDA low in the ninth SCL (ACK) cycle. If the addressed Slave is busy, or for some other reason can not service the Master’s request, the SDA line should be left high in the ACK clock cycle. The Master can then transmit a STOP condition, or a REPEATED START condition to initiate a new transmission. An address packet consisting of a slave address and a READ or a WRITE bit is called SLA+R or SLA+W, respectively. The MSB of the address byte is transmitted first. Slave addresses can freely be allocated by the designer, but the address 0000 000 is reserved for a general call. When a general call is issued, all slaves should respond by pulling the SDA line low in the ACK cycle. A general call is used when a Master wishes to transmit the same message to several slaves in the system. When the general call address followed by a Write bit is transmitted on the bus, all slaves set up to acknowledge the general call will pull the SDA line low in the ack cycle. The following data packets will then be received by all the slaves that acknowledged the general call. Note that transmitting the general call address followed by a Read bit is meaningless, as this would cause contention if several slaves started transmitting different data. All addresses of the format 1111 xxx should be reserved for future purposes. Figure 20-4. Address Packet Format Addr MSB Addr LSB R/W ACK 7 8 9 SDA SCL 1 2 START 218 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 20.3.4 Data Packet Format All data packets transmitted on the TWI bus are nine bits long, consisting of one data byte and an acknowledge bit. During a data transfer, the Master generates the clock and the START and STOP conditions, while the Receiver is responsible for acknowledging the reception. An Acknowledge (ACK) is signalled by the Receiver pulling the SDA line low during the ninth SCL cycle. If the Receiver leaves the SDA line high, a NACK is signalled. When the Receiver has received the last byte, or for some reason cannot receive any more bytes, it should inform the Transmitter by sending a NACK after the final byte. The MSB of the data byte is transmitted first. Figure 20-5. Data Packet Format Data MSB Data LSB ACK 8 9 Aggregate SDA SDA from Transmitter SDA from Receiver SCL from Master 1 2 7 SLA+R/W 20.3.5 STOP, REPEATED START or Next Data Byte Data Byte Combining Address and Data Packets into a Transmission A transmission basically consists of a START condition, a SLA+R/W, one or more data packets and a STOP condition. An empty message, consisting of a START followed by a STOP condition, is illegal. Note that the Wired-ANDing of the SCL line can be used to implement handshaking between the Master and the Slave. The Slave can extend the SCL low period by pulling the SCL line low. This is useful if the clock speed set up by the Master is too fast for the Slave, or the Slave needs extra time for processing between the data transmissions. The Slave extending the SCL low period will not affect the SCL high period, which is determined by the Master. As a consequence, the Slave can reduce the TWI data transfer speed by prolonging the SCL duty cycle. Figure 20-6 shows a typical data transmission. Note that several data bytes can be transmitted between the SLA+R/W and the STOP condition, depending on the software protocol implemented by the application software. Figure 20-6. Typical Data Transmission Addr LSB Addr MSB R/W ACK Data MSB 7 8 9 1 Data LSB ACK 8 9 SDA SCL 1 START 2 SLA+R/W 2 7 Data Byte STOP 219 7593K–AVR–11/09 20.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization The TWI protocol allows bus systems with several masters. Special concerns have been taken in order to ensure that transmissions will proceed as normal, even if two or more masters initiate a transmission at the same time. Two problems arise in multi-master systems: • An algorithm must be implemented allowing only one of the masters to complete the transmission. All other masters should cease transmission when they discover that they have lost the selection process. This selection process is called arbitration. When a contending master discovers that it has lost the arbitration process, it should immediately switch to Slave mode to check whether it is being addressed by the winning master. The fact that multiple masters have started transmission at the same time should not be detectable to the slaves, i.e. the data being transferred on the bus must not be corrupted. • Different masters may use different SCL frequencies. A scheme must be devised to synchronize the serial clocks from all masters, in order to let the transmission proceed in a lockstep fashion. This will facilitate the arbitration process. The wired-ANDing of the bus lines is used to solve both these problems. The serial clocks from all masters will be wired-ANDed, yielding a combined clock with a high period equal to the one from the Master with the shortest high period. The low period of the combined clock is equal to the low period of the Master with the longest low period. Note that all masters listen to the SCL line, effectively starting to count their SCL high and low time-out periods when the combined SCL line goes high or low, respectively. Figure 20-7. SCL Synchronization Between Multiple Masters TA low TA high SCL from Master A SCL from Master B SCL Bus Line TBlow Masters Start Counting Low Period TBhigh Masters Start Counting High Period Arbitration is carried out by all masters continuously monitoring the SDA line after outputting data. If the value read from the SDA line does not match the value the Master had output, it has lost the arbitration. Note that a Master can only lose arbitration when it outputs a high SDA value while another Master outputs a low value. The losing Master should immediately go to Slave mode, checking if it is being addressed by the winning Master. The SDA line should be left high, but losing masters are allowed to generate a clock signal until the end of the current data or address packet. Arbitration will continue until only one Master remains, and this may take many 220 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 bits. If several masters are trying to address the same Slave, arbitration will continue into the data packet. Figure 20-8. Arbitration Between Two Masters START SDA from Master A Master A Loses Arbitration, SDAA SDA SDA from Master B SDA Line Synchronized SCL Line Note that arbitration is not allowed between: • A REPEATED START condition and a data bit. • A STOP condition and a data bit. • A REPEATED START and a STOP condition. It is the user software’s responsibility to ensure that these illegal arbitration conditions never occur. This implies that in multi-master systems, all data transfers must use the same composition of SLA+R/W and data packets. In other words: All transmissions must contain the same number of data packets, otherwise the result of the arbitration is undefined. 20.5 Overview of the TWI Module The TWI module is comprised of several submodules, as shown in Figure 20-9. All registers drawn in a thick line are accessible through the AVR data bus. 221 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 20-9. Overview of the TWI Module Slew-rate Control SDA Spike Filter Slew-rate Control Spike Filter Bus Interface Unit START / STOP Control Spike Suppression Arbitration detection Address/Data Shift Register (TWDR) Bit Rate Generator Address Match Unit Address Register (TWAR) Address Comparator Prescaler Bit Rate Register (TWBR) Ack Control Unit Status Register (TWSR) Control Register (TWCR) State Machine and Status control TWI Unit SCL 20.5.1 SCL and SDA Pins These pins interface the AVR TWI with the rest of the MCU system. The output drivers contain a slew-rate limiter in order to conform to the TWI specification. The input stages contain a spike suppression unit removing spikes shorter than 50 ns. Note that the internal pull-ups in the AVR pads can be enabled by setting the PORT bits corresponding to the SCL and SDA pins, as explained in the I/O Port section. The internal pull-ups can in some systems eliminate the need for external ones. 20.5.2 Bit Rate Generator Unit This unit controls the period of SCL when operating in a Master mode. The SCL period is controlled by settings in the TWI Bit Rate Register (TWBR) and the Prescaler bits in the TWI Status Register (TWSR). Slave operation does not depend on Bit Rate or Prescaler settings, but the CPU clock frequency in the Slave must be at least 16 times higher than the SCL frequency. Note that slaves may prolong the SCL low period, thereby reducing the average TWI bus clock period. The SCL frequency is generated according to the following equation: 222 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 CPU Clock frequency SCL frequency = ---------------------------------------------------------TWPS 16 + 2(TWBR) ⋅ 4 • TWBR = Value of the TWI Bit Rate Register. • TWPS = Value of the prescaler bits in the TWI Status Register. Note: 20.5.3 TWBR should be 10 or higher if the TWI operates in Master mode. If TWBR is lower than 10, the Master may produce an incorrect output on SDA and SCL for the reminder of the byte. The problem occurs when operating the TWI in Master mode, sending Start + SLA + R/W to a Slave (a Slave does not need to be connected to the bus for the condition to happen). Bus Interface Unit This unit contains the Data and Address Shift Register (TWDR), a START/STOP Controller and Arbitration detection hardware. The TWDR contains the address or data bytes to be transmitted, or the address or data bytes received. In addition to the 8-bit TWDR, the Bus Interface Unit also contains a register containing the (N)ACK bit to be transmitted or received. This (N)ACK Register is not directly accessible by the application software. However, when receiving, it can be set or cleared by manipulating the TWI Control Register (TWCR). When in Transmitter mode, the value of the received (N)ACK bit can be determined by the value in the TWSR. The START/STOP Controller is responsible for generation and detection of START, REPEATED START, and STOP conditions. The START/STOP controller is able to detect START and STOP conditions even when the AVR MCU is in one of the sleep modes, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a Master. If the TWI has initiated a transmission as Master, the Arbitration Detection hardware continuously monitors the transmission trying to determine if arbitration is in process. If the TWI has lost an arbitration, the Control Unit is informed. Correct action can then be taken and appropriate status codes generated. 20.5.4 Address Match Unit The Address Match unit checks if received address bytes match the seven-bit address in the TWI Address Register (TWAR). If the TWI General Call Recognition Enable (TWGCE) bit in the TWAR is written to one, all incoming address bits will also be compared against the General Call address. Upon an address match, the Control Unit is informed, allowing correct action to be taken. The TWI may or may not acknowledge its address, depending on settings in the TWCR. The Address Match unit is able to compare addresses even when the AVR MCU is in sleep mode, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a Master. If another interrupt (e.g., INT0) occurs during TWI Power-down address match and wakes up the CPU, the TWI aborts operation and return to it’s idle state. If this cause any problems, ensure that TWI Address Match is the only enabled interrupt when entering Power-down. 20.5.5 Control Unit The Control unit monitors the TWI bus and generates responses corresponding to settings in the TWI Control Register (TWCR). When an event requiring the attention of the application occurs on the TWI bus, the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is asserted. In the next clock cycle, the TWI Status Register (TWSR) is updated with a status code identifying the event. The TWSR only contains relevant status information when the TWI Interrupt Flag is asserted. At all other times, the TWSR contains a special status code indicating that no relevant status information is available. As long as the TWINT Flag is set, the SCL line is held low. This allows the application software to complete its tasks before allowing the TWI transmission to continue. 223 7593K–AVR–11/09 The TWINT Flag is set in the following situations: • After the TWI has transmitted a START/REPEATED START condition. • After the TWI has transmitted SLA+R/W. • After the TWI has transmitted an address byte. • After the TWI has lost arbitration. • After the TWI has been addressed by own slave address or general call. • After the TWI has received a data byte. • After a STOP or REPEATED START has been received while still addressed as a Slave. • When a bus error has occurred due to an illegal START or STOP condition. 20.6 20.6.1 TWI Register Description TWI Bit Rate Register – TWBR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWBR7 TWBR6 TWBR5 TWBR4 TWBR3 TWBR2 TWBR1 TWBR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TWBR • Bits 7..0 – TWI Bit Rate Register TWBR selects the division factor for the bit rate generator. The bit rate generator is a frequency divider which generates the SCL clock frequency in the Master modes. See “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 222 for calculating bit rates. 20.6.2 TWI Control Register – TWCR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TWCR The TWCR is used to control the operation of the TWI. It is used to enable the TWI, to initiate a Master access by applying a START condition to the bus, to generate a Receiver acknowledge, to generate a stop condition, and to control halting of the bus while the data to be written to the bus are written to the TWDR. It also indicates a write collision if data is attempted written to TWDR while the register is inaccessible. • Bit 7 – TWINT: TWI Interrupt Flag This bit is set by hardware when the TWI has finished its current job and expects application software response. If the I-bit in SREG and TWIE in TWCR are set, the MCU will jump to the TWI Interrupt Vector. While the TWINT Flag is set, the SCL low period is stretched. The TWINT Flag must be cleared by software by writing a logic one to it. Note that this flag is not automatically cleared by hardware when executing the interrupt routine. Also note that clearing this flag starts the operation of the TWI, so all accesses to the TWI Address Register (TWAR), TWI Status Register (TWSR), and TWI Data Register (TWDR) must be complete before clearing this flag. • Bit 6 – TWEA: TWI Enable Acknowledge Bit The TWEA bit controls the generation of the acknowledge pulse. If the TWEA bit is written to one, the ACK pulse is generated on the TWI bus if the following conditions are met: 224 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 1. The device’s own slave address has been received. 2. A general call has been received, while the TWGCE bit in the TWAR is set. 3. A data byte has been received in Master Receiver or Slave Receiver mode. By writing the TWEA bit to zero, the device can be virtually disconnected from the 2-wire Serial Bus temporarily. Address recognition can then be resumed by writing the TWEA bit to one again. • Bit 5 – TWSTA: TWI START Condition Bit The application writes the TWSTA bit to one when it desires to become a Master on the 2-wire Serial Bus. The TWI hardware checks if the bus is available, and generates a START condition on the bus if it is free. However, if the bus is not free, the TWI waits until a STOP condition is detected, and then generates a new START condition to claim the bus Master status. TWSTA must be cleared by software when the START condition has been transmitted. • Bit 4 – TWSTO: TWI STOP Condition Bit Writing the TWSTO bit to one in Master mode will generate a STOP condition on the 2-wire Serial Bus. When the STOP condition is executed on the bus, the TWSTO bit is cleared automatically. In Slave mode, setting the TWSTO bit can be used to recover from an error condition. This will not generate a STOP condition, but the TWI returns to a well-defined unaddressed Slave mode and releases the SCL and SDA lines to a high impedance state. • Bit 3 – TWWC: TWI Write Collision Flag The TWWC bit is set when attempting to write to the TWI Data Register – TWDR when TWINT is low. This flag is cleared by writing the TWDR Register when TWINT is high. • Bit 2 – TWEN: TWI Enable Bit The TWEN bit enables TWI operation and activates the TWI interface. When TWEN is written to one, the TWI takes control over the I/O pins connected to the SCL and SDA pins, enabling the slew-rate limiters and spike filters. If this bit is written to zero, the TWI is switched off and all TWI transmissions are terminated, regardless of any ongoing operation. • Bit 1 – Res: Reserved Bit This bit is a reserved bit and will always read as zero. • Bit 0 – TWIE: TWI Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the TWI interrupt request will be activated for as long as the TWINT Flag is high. 20.6.3 TWI Status Register – TWSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 – TWPS1 TWPS0 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 TWSR • Bits 7..3 – TWS: TWI Status These 5 bits reflect the status of the TWI logic and the 2-wire Serial Bus. The different status codes are described later in this section. Note that the value read from TWSR contains both the 5-bit status value and the 2-bit prescaler value. The application designer should mask the pres- 225 7593K–AVR–11/09 caler bits to zero when checking the Status bits. This makes status checking independent of prescaler setting. This approach is used in this datasheet, unless otherwise noted. • Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. • Bits 1..0 – TWPS: TWI Prescaler Bits These bits can be read and written, and control the bit rate prescaler. Table 20-2. TWI Bit Rate Prescaler TWPS1 TWPS0 Prescaler Value 0 0 1 0 1 4 1 0 16 1 1 64 To calculate bit rates, see “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 222. The value of TWPS1..0 is used in the equation. 20.6.4 TWI Data Register – TWDR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWD7 TWD6 TWD5 TWD4 TWD3 TWD2 TWD1 TWD0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TWDR In Transmit mode, TWDR contains the next byte to be transmitted. In Receive mode, the TWDR contains the last byte received. It is writable while the TWI is not in the process of shifting a byte. This occurs when the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is set by hardware. Note that the Data Register cannot be initialized by the user before the first interrupt occurs. The data in TWDR remains stable as long as TWINT is set. While data is shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously shifted in. TWDR always contains the last byte present on the bus, except after a wake up from a sleep mode by the TWI interrupt. In this case, the contents of TWDR is undefined. In the case of a lost bus arbitration, no data is lost in the transition from Master to Slave. Handling of the ACK bit is controlled automatically by the TWI logic, the CPU cannot access the ACK bit directly. • Bits 7..0 – TWD: TWI Data Register These eight bits constitute the next data byte to be transmitted, or the latest data byte received on the 2-wire Serial Bus. 20.6.5 TWI (Slave) Address Register – TWAR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 TWAR The TWAR should be loaded with the 7-bit Slave address (in the seven most significant bits of TWAR) to which the TWI will respond when programmed as a Slave Transmitter or Receiver, and not needed in the Master modes. In multimaster systems, TWAR must be set in masters which can be addressed as Slaves by other Masters. 226 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The LSB of TWAR is used to enable recognition of the general call address (0x00). There is an associated address comparator that looks for the slave address (or general call address if enabled) in the received serial address. If a match is found, an interrupt request is generated. • Bits 7..1 – TWA: TWI (Slave) Address Register These seven bits constitute the slave address of the TWI unit. • Bit 0 – TWGCE: TWI General Call Recognition Enable Bit If set, this bit enables the recognition of a General Call given over the 2-wire Serial Bus. 20.6.6 TWI (Slave) Address Mask Register – TWAMR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TWAM[6:0] – Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TWAMR R 0 • Bits 7..1 – TWAM: TWI Address Mask The TWAMR can be loaded with a 7-bit Slave Address mask. Each of the bits in TWAMR can mask (disable) the corresponding address bit in the TWI Address Register (TWAR). If the mask bit is set to one then the address match logic ignores the compare between the incoming address bit and the corresponding bit in TWAR. Figure 20-10 shows the address match logic in detail. Figure 20-10. TWI Address Match Logic, Block Diagram TWAR0 Address Match Address Bit 0 TWAMR0 Address Bit Comparator 0 Address Bit Comparator 6..1 • Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. 20.7 Using the TWI The AVR TWI is byte-oriented and interrupt based. Interrupts are issued after all bus events, like reception of a byte or transmission of a START condition. Because the TWI is interrupt-based, the application software is free to carry on other operations during a TWI byte transfer. Note that the TWI Interrupt Enable (TWIE) bit in TWCR together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG allow the application to decide whether or not assertion of the TWINT Flag should generate an interrupt request. If the TWIE bit is cleared, the application must poll the TWINT Flag in order to detect actions on the TWI bus. When the TWINT Flag is asserted, the TWI has finished an operation and awaits application response. In this case, the TWI Status Register (TWSR) contains a value indicating the current 227 7593K–AVR–11/09 state of the TWI bus. The application software can then decide how the TWI should behave in the next TWI bus cycle by manipulating the TWCR and TWDR Registers. Figure 20-11 is a simple example of how the application can interface to the TWI hardware. In this example, a Master wishes to transmit a single data byte to a Slave. This description is quite abstract, a more detailed explanation follows later in this section. A simple code example implementing the desired behavior is also presented. Application Action Figure 20-11. Interfacing the Application to the TWI in a Typical Transmission 1. Application writes to TWCR to initiate transmission of START TWI Hardware Action TWI bus 3. Check TWSR to see if START was sent. Application loads SLA+W into TWDR, and loads appropriate control signals into TWCR, makin sure that TWINT is written to one, and TWSTA is written to zero. START SLA+W 5. Check TWSR to see if SLA+W was sent and ACK received. Application loads data into TWDR, and loads appropriate control signals into TWCR, making sure that TWINT is written to one A 4. TWINT set. Status code indicates SLA+W sent, ACK received 2. TWINT set. Status code indicates START condition sent Data 7. Check TWSR to see if data was sent and ACK received. Application loads appropriate control signals to send STOP into TWCR, making sure that TWINT is written to one A 6. TWINT set. Status code indicates data sent, ACK received STOP Indicates TWINT set 1. The first step in a TWI transmission is to transmit a START condition. This is done by writing a specific value into TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a START condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the START condition. 2. When the START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the START condition has successfully been sent. 3. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the START condition was successfully transmitted. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must load SLA+W into TWDR. Remember that TWDR is used both for address and data. After TWDR has been loaded with the desired SLA+W, a specific value must be written to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the SLA+W present in TWDR. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the address packet. 4. When the address packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the address packet has successfully been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a Slave acknowledged the packet or not. 228 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 5. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the address packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must load a data packet into TWDR. Subsequently, a specific value must be written to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the data packet present in TWDR. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the data packet. 6. When the data packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the data packet has successfully been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a Slave acknowledged the packet or not. 7. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the data packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must write a specific value to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a STOP condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the STOP condition. Note that TWINT is NOT set after a STOP condition has been sent. Even though this example is simple, it shows the principles involved in all TWI transmissions. These can be summarized as follows: • When the TWI has finished an operation and expects application response, the TWINT Flag is set. The SCL line is pulled low until TWINT is cleared. • When the TWINT Flag is set, the user must update all TWI Registers with the value relevant for the next TWI bus cycle. As an example, TWDR must be loaded with the value to be transmitted in the next bus cycle. • After all TWI Register updates and other pending application software tasks have been completed, TWCR is written. When writing TWCR, the TWINT bit should be set. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will then commence executing whatever operation was specified by the TWCR setting. In the following an assembly and C implementation of the example is given. Note that the code below assumes that several definitions have been made, for example by using include-files. 229 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 2. Assembly Code Example ldi r16, (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)| 1 in r16,TWCR andi r16, 0xF8 cpi 3 TWDR, r16 ldi r16, (1<<TWINT) | (1<<TWEN) out TWCR, r16 wait2: in r16,TWCR andi r16, 0xF8 cpi 5 r16, MT_SLA_ACK brne ERROR ldi r16, DATA out TWDR, r16 ldi r16, (1<<TWINT) | (1<<TWEN) out TWCR, r16 wait3: 6 in r16,TWCR andi r16, 0xF8 cpi r16, MT_DATA_ACK brne ERROR ldi r16, (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)| (1<<TWSTO) out 230 if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != START) ERROR(); Wait for TWINT Flag set. This indicates that the START condition has been transmitted Check value of TWI Status Register. Mask prescaler bits. If status different from START go to ERROR TWDR = SLA_W; TWCR = (1<<TWINT) | (1<<TWEN); while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))) ; if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != MT_SLA_ACK) ERROR(); Load SLA_W into TWDR Register. Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start transmission of address Wait for TWINT Flag set. This indicates that the SLA+W has been transmitted, and ACK/NACK has been received. Check value of TWI Status Register. Mask prescaler bits. If status different from MT_SLA_ACK go to ERROR TWDR = DATA; TWCR = (1<<TWINT) | (1<<TWEN); Load DATA into TWDR Register. Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start transmission of data while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))) Wait for TWINT Flag set. This indicates that the DATA has been transmitted, and ACK/NACK has been received. ; sbrs r16,TWINT rjmp wait3 in r16,TWSR 7 ; sbrs r16,TWINT rjmp wait2 in r16,TWSR Send START condition while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))) r16, START brne ERROR ldi r16, SLA_W out 4 (1<<TWEN) sbrs r16,TWINT rjmp wait1 in r16,TWSR Comments TWCR = (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)| (1<<TWEN) out TWCR, r16 wait1: 2 C Example if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != MT_DATA_ACK) ERROR(); Check value of TWI Status Register. Mask prescaler bits. If status different from MT_DATA_ACK go to ERROR TWCR = (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)| (1<<TWSTO); Transmit STOP condition TWCR, r16 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 20.8 Transmission Modes The TWI can operate in one of four major modes. These are named Master Transmitter (MT), Master Receiver (MR), Slave Transmitter (ST) and Slave Receiver (SR). Several of these modes can be used in the same application. As an example, the TWI can use MT mode to write data into a TWI EEPROM, MR mode to read the data back from the EEPROM. If other masters are present in the system, some of these might transmit data to the TWI, and then SR mode would be used. It is the application software that decides which modes are legal. The following sections describe each of these modes. Possible status codes are described along with figures detailing data transmission in each of the modes. These figures contain the following abbreviations: S: START condition Rs: REPEATED START condition R: Read bit (high level at SDA) W: Write bit (low level at SDA) A: Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA) A: Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA) Data: 8-bit data byte P: STOP condition SLA: Slave Address In Figure 20-13 to Figure 20-19, circles are used to indicate that the TWINT Flag is set. The numbers in the circles show the status code held in TWSR, with the prescaler bits masked to zero. At these points, actions must be taken by the application to continue or complete the TWI transfer. The TWI transfer is suspended until the TWINT Flag is cleared by software. When the TWINT Flag is set, the status code in TWSR is used to determine the appropriate software action. For each status code, the required software action and details of the following serial transfer are given in Table 20-3 to Table 20-6. Note that the prescaler bits are masked to zero in these tables. 20.8.1 Master Transmitter Mode In the Master Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Slave Receiver (see Figure 20-12). In order to enter a Master mode, a START condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines whether Master Transmitter or Master Receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero. 231 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 20-12. Data Transfer in Master Transmitter Mode VCC Device 1 Device 2 MASTER TRANSMITTER SLAVE RECEIVER Device 3 ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X value TWEN must be set to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to one to transmit a START condition and TWINT must be written to one to clear the TWINT Flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START condition as soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag is set by hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (see Table 20-3). In order to enter MT mode, SLA+W must be transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+W to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X value When SLA+W have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in Master mode are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38. The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 20-3. When SLA+W has been successfully transmitted, a data packet should be transmitted. This is done by writing the data byte to TWDR. TWDR must only be written when TWINT is high. If not, the access will be discarded, and the Write Collision bit (TWWC) will be set in the TWCR Register. After updating TWDR, the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X value This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been sent and the transfer is ended by generating a STOP condition or a repeated START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 0 1 X 1 0 X value A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X value 232 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can access the same Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter mode and Master Receiver mode without losing control of the bus. Table 20-3. Status Code (TWSR) Prescaler Bits are 0 Status codes for Master Transmitter Mode Application Software Response Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus and 2-wire Serial Interface Hardware To/from TWDR 0x08 A START condition has been transmitted 0x10 A repeated START condition has been transmitted To TWCR Arbitration lost in SLA+W or data bytes X SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK or NOT ACK will be received Load SLA+W or 0 0 1 X 0 0 1 X SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK or NOT ACK will be received SLA+R will be transmitted; Logic will switch to Master Receiver mode Load data byte or 0 0 1 X 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X 1 1 1 X Load data byte or 0 0 1 X 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X 1 1 1 X Load data byte or 0 0 1 X No TWDR action or No TWDR action or 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X 1 1 1 X Load data byte or 0 0 1 X No TWDR action or No TWDR action or 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X 1 1 1 X No TWDR action or 0 0 1 X No TWDR action 0x38 Data byte has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been received 1 No TWDR action 0x30 0 No TWDR action Data byte has been transmitted; ACK has been received 0 No TWDR action 0x28 Load SLA+W No TWDR action or No TWDR action or SLA+W has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been received TWE A No TWDR action 0x20 TWIN T No TWDR action or No TWDR action or SLA+W has been transmitted; ACK has been received STO Load SLA+R 0x18 STA 1 0 1 X Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will be received Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will be received Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will be received Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will be received Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset 2-wire Serial Bus will be released and not addressed Slave mode entered A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free 233 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 20-13. Formats and States in the Master Transmitter Mode MT Successfull transmission to a slave receiver S SLA $08 W A DATA $18 A P $28 Next transfer started with a repeated start condition RS SLA W $10 Not acknowledge received after the slave address A R P $20 MR Not acknowledge received after a data byte A P $30 Arbitration lost in slave address or data byte A or A Other master continues $38 Arbitration lost and addressed as slave A $68 From master to slave From slave to master 20.8.2 234 A or A Other master continues $38 Other master continues $78 DATA To corresponding states in slave mode $B0 A n Any number of data bytes and their associated acknowledge bits This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero Master Receiver Mode In the Master Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Slave Transmitter (Slave see Figure 20-14). In order to enter a Master mode, a START condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines whether Master Transmitter or Master Receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 20-14. Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode VCC Device 1 Device 2 MASTER RECEIVER SLAVE TRANSMITTER Device 3 ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X TWEN must be written to one to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to one to transmit a START condition and TWINT must be set to clear the TWINT Flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START condition as soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag is set by hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (See Table 20-3). In order to enter MR mode, SLA+R must be transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+R to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X When SLA+R have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in Master mode are 0x38, 0x40, or 0x48. The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 20-4. Received data can be read from the TWDR Register when the TWINT Flag is set high by hardware. This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been received. After the last byte has been received, the MR should inform the ST by sending a NACK after the last received data byte. The transfer is ended by generating a STOP condition or a repeated START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 0 1 X 1 0 X A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR: TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can access the same Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables 235 7593K–AVR–11/09 the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter mode and Master Receiver mode without losing control over the bus. Table 20-4. Status Code (TWSR) Prescaler Bits are 0 Status codes for Master Receiver Mode Application Software Response Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus and 2-wire Serial Interface Hardware To TWCR To/from TWDR STA STO TWIN T TWE A Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware 0x08 A START condition has been transmitted Load SLA+R 0 0 1 X SLA+R will be transmitted ACK or NOT ACK will be received 0x10 A repeated START condition has been transmitted Load SLA+R or 0 0 1 X Load SLA+W 0 0 1 X SLA+R will be transmitted ACK or NOT ACK will be received SLA+W will be transmitted Logic will switch to Master Transmitter mode No TWDR action or 0 0 1 X No TWDR action 1 0 1 X No TWDR action or 0 0 1 0 No TWDR action 0 0 1 1 No TWDR action or No TWDR action or 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X No TWDR action 1 1 1 X 0 0 1 0 0x38 0x40 0x48 Arbitration lost in SLA+R or NOT ACK bit SLA+R has been transmitted; ACK has been received SLA+R has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been received 0x50 Data byte has been received; ACK has been returned Read data byte or Read data byte 0 0 1 1 0x58 Data byte has been received; NOT ACK has been returned Read data byte or Read data byte or 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X Read data byte 1 1 1 X 236 2-wire Serial Bus will be released and not addressed Slave mode will be entered A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Repeated START will be transmitted STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 20-15. Formats and States in the Master Receiver Mode MR Successfull reception from a slave receiver S SLA R $08 A DATA A $40 DATA A $50 P $58 Next transfer started with a repeated start condition RS SLA R $10 Not acknowledge received after the slave address A W P $48 MT Arbitration lost in slave address or data byte A or A Other master continues A $38 Arbitration lost and addressed as slave $38 Other master continues A $68 $78 DATA From master to slave From slave to master 20.8.3 Other master continues To corresponding states in slave mode $B0 A Any number of data bytes and their associated acknowledge bits This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero n Slave Receiver Mode In the Slave Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Master Transmitter (see Figure 20-16). All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero. Figure 20-16. Data transfer in Slave Receiver mode VCC Device 1 Device 2 SLAVE RECEIVER MASTER TRANSMITTER Device 3 ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL To initiate the Slave Receiver mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows: TWAR value TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE Device’s Own Slave Address 237 7593K–AVR–11/09 The upper 7 bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond when addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address. TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 X TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero. When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is “0” (write), the TWI will operate in SR mode, otherwise ST mode is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT Flag is set and a valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 20-5. The Slave Receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the Master mode (see states 0x68 and 0x78). If the TWEA bit is reset during a transfer, the TWI will return a “Not Acknowledge” (“1”) to SDA after the next received data byte. This can be used to indicate that the Slave is not able to receive any more bytes. While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not acknowledge its own slave address. However, the 2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire Serial Bus. In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock low during the wake up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared (by writing it to one). Further data reception will be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks running as normal. Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held low for a long time, blocking other data transmissions. Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present on the bus when waking up from these Sleep modes. 238 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 20-5. Status Code (TWSR) Prescaler Bits are 0 Status Codes for Slave Receiver Mode Application Software Response Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus and 2-wire Serial Interface Hardware To TWCR To/from TWDR STA STO TWIN T TWE A No TWDR action or X 0 1 0 0x60 Own SLA+W has been received; ACK has been returned No TWDR action X 0 1 1 0x68 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master; own SLA+W has been received; ACK has been returned No TWDR action or X 0 1 0 No TWDR action X 0 1 1 0x70 General call address has been received; ACK has been returned No TWDR action or X 0 1 0 No TWDR action X 0 1 1 0x78 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master; General call address has been received; ACK has been returned No TWDR action or X 0 1 0 No TWDR action X 0 1 1 0x80 Previously addressed with own SLA+W; data has been received; ACK has been returned Read data byte or X 0 1 0 Read data byte X 0 1 1 0x88 Previously addressed with own SLA+W; data has been received; NOT ACK has been returned Read data byte or 0 0 1 0 Read data byte or 0 0 1 1 Read data byte or 1 0 1 0 Read data byte 1 0 1 1 0x90 Previously addressed with general call; data has been received; ACK has been returned Read data byte or X 0 1 0 Read data byte X 0 1 1 0x98 Previously addressed with general call; data has been received; NOT ACK has been returned Read data byte or 0 0 1 0 Read data byte or 0 0 1 1 Read data byte or 1 0 1 0 Read data byte 1 0 1 1 No action 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0xA0 A STOP condition or repeated START condition has been received while still addressed as Slave Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1” Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1” Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1” Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free 239 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 20-17. Formats and States in the Slave Receiver Mode Reception of the own slave address and one or more data bytes. All are acknowledged S SLA W A DATA DATA Last data byte received is not acknowledged P or S $80 $80 A $A0 A $60 A P or S $88 Arbitration lost as master and addressed as slave A $68 Reception of the general call address and one or more data bytes General Call A DATA DATA Last data byte received is not acknowledged P or S $90 $90 A $A0 A $70 A P or S $98 Arbitration lost as master and addressed as slave by general call A $78 From master to slave DATA From slave to master 20.8.4 A n Any number of data bytes and their associated acknowledge bits This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero Slave Transmitter Mode In the Slave Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Master Receiver (see Figure 20-18). All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero. Figure 20-18. Data Transfer in Slave Transmitter Mode VCC Device 1 Device 2 SLAVE TRANSMITTER MASTER RECEIVER Device 3 ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL 240 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 To initiate the Slave Transmitter mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows: TWAR TWA6 TWA5 value TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE Device’s Own Slave Address The upper seven bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond when addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address. TWCR value TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 X TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero. When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is “1” (read), the TWI will operate in ST mode, otherwise SR mode is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT Flag is set and a valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 20-6. The Slave Transmitter mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the Master mode (see state 0xB0). If the TWEA bit is written to zero during a transfer, the TWI will transmit the last byte of the transfer. State 0xC0 or state 0xC8 will be entered, depending on whether the Master Receiver transmits a NACK or ACK after the final byte. The TWI is switched to the not addressed Slave mode, and will ignore the Master if it continues the transfer. Thus the Master Receiver receives all “1” as serial data. State 0xC8 is entered if the Master demands additional data bytes (by transmitting ACK), even though the Slave has transmitted the last byte (TWEA zero and expecting NACK from the Master). While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not respond to its own slave address. However, the 2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire Serial Bus. In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock will low during the wake up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared (by writing it to one). Further data transmission will be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks running as normal. Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held low for a long time, blocking other data transmissions. Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present on the bus when waking up from these sleep modes. Table 20-6. Status Code (TWSR) Prescaler Bits are 0 Status Codes for Slave Transmitter Mode Application Software Response Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus and 2-wire Serial Interface Hardware To TWCR To/from TWDR STA STO TWIN T TWE A Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware 241 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 20-6. 0xA8 Status Codes for Slave Transmitter Mode 1 0 X 0 1 1 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master; own SLA+R has been received; ACK has been returned Load data byte or X 0 1 0 Load data byte X 0 1 1 Data byte in TWDR has been transmitted; ACK has been received Load data byte or X 0 1 0 Load data byte X 0 1 1 Data byte in TWDR has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been received No TWDR action or 0 0 1 0 No TWDR action or 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 No TWDR action or 0 0 1 0 No TWDR action or 0 0 1 1 No TWDR action or 1 0 1 0 No TWDR action 0xC8 0 No TWDR action 0xC0 X No TWDR action or 0xB8 Load data byte or Load data byte 0xB0 Own SLA+R has been received; ACK has been returned 1 0 1 1 Last data byte in TWDR has been transmitted (TWEA = “0”); ACK has been received Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1” Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1” Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Figure 20-19. Formats and States in the Slave Transmitter Mode Reception of the own slave address and one or more data bytes S SLA R A DATA $A8 Arbitration lost as master and addressed as slave A DATA $B8 A P or S $C0 A $B0 Last data byte transmitted. Switched to not addressed slave (TWEA = '0') A All 1's P or S $C8 From master to slave From slave to master 20.8.5 242 DATA A n Any number of data bytes and their associated acknowledge bits This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero Miscellaneous States There are two status codes that do not correspond to a defined TWI state, see Table 20-7. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Status 0xF8 indicates that no relevant information is available because the TWINT Flag is not set. This occurs between other states, and when the TWI is not involved in a serial transfer. Status 0x00 indicates that a bus error has occurred during a 2-wire Serial Bus transfer. A bus error occurs when a START or STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the format frame. Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. When a bus error occurs, TWINT is set. To recover from a bus error, the TWSTO Flag must set and TWINT must be cleared by writing a logic one to it. This causes the TWI to enter the not addressed Slave mode and to clear the TWSTO Flag (no other bits in TWCR are affected). The SDA and SCL lines are released, and no STOP condition is transmitted. Table 20-7. Miscellaneous States Status Code (TWSR) Prescaler Bits are 0 Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus and 2-wire Serial Interface Hardware Application Software Response To TWCR To/from TWDR 0xF8 No relevant state information available; TWINT = “0” No TWDR action 0x00 Bus error due to an illegal START or STOP condition STA No TWDR action 20.8.6 STO TWIN T TWE A No TWCR action 0 1 Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware Wait or proceed current transfer 1 X Only the internal hardware is affected, no STOP condition is sent on the bus. In all cases, the bus is released and TWSTO is cleared. Combining Several TWI Modes In some cases, several TWI modes must be combined in order to complete the desired action. Consider for example reading data from a serial EEPROM. Typically, such a transfer involves the following steps: 1. The transfer must be initiated. 2. The EEPROM must be instructed what location should be read. 3. The reading must be performed. 4. The transfer must be finished. Note that data is transmitted both from Master to Slave and vice versa. The Master must instruct the Slave what location it wants to read, requiring the use of the MT mode. Subsequently, data must be read from the Slave, implying the use of the MR mode. Thus, the transfer direction must be changed. The Master must keep control of the bus during all these steps, and the steps should be carried out as an atomical operation. If this principle is violated in a multimaster system, another Master can alter the data pointer in the EEPROM between steps 2 and 3, and the Master will read the wrong data location. Such a change in transfer direction is accomplished by transmitting a REPEATED START between the transmission of the address byte and reception of the data. After a REPEATED START, the Master keeps ownership of the bus. The following figure shows the flow in this transfer. Figure 20-20. Combining Several TWI Modes to Access a Serial EEPROM Master Transmitter S SLA+W A ADDRESS S = START Transmitted from master to slave Master Receiver A Rs SLA+R A Rs = REPEATED START DATA A P P = STOP Transmitted from slave to master 243 7593K–AVR–11/09 20.9 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration If multiple masters are connected to the same bus, transmissions may be initiated simultaneously by one or more of them. The TWI standard ensures that such situations are handled in such a way that one of the masters will be allowed to proceed with the transfer, and that no data will be lost in the process. An example of an arbitration situation is depicted below, where two masters are trying to transmit data to a Slave Receiver. Figure 20-21. An Arbitration Example VCC Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 MASTER TRANSMITTER MASTER TRANSMITTER SLAVE RECEIVER ........ Device n R1 R2 SDA SCL Several different scenarios may arise during arbitration, as described below: • Two or more masters are performing identical communication with the same Slave. In this case, neither the Slave nor any of the masters will know about the bus contention. • Two or more masters are accessing the same Slave with different data or direction bit. In this case, arbitration will occur, either in the READ/WRITE bit or in the data bits. The masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master outputs a zero will lose the arbitration. Losing masters will switch to not addressed Slave mode or wait until the bus is free and transmit a new START condition, depending on application software action. • Two or more masters are accessing different slaves. In this case, arbitration will occur in the SLA bits. Masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master outputs a zero will lose the arbitration. Masters losing arbitration in SLA will switch to Slave mode to check if they are being addressed by the winning Master. If addressed, they will switch to SR or ST mode, depending on the value of the READ/WRITE bit. If they are not being addressed, they will switch to not addressed Slave mode or wait until the bus is free and transmit a new START condition, depending on application software action. This is summarized in Figure 20-22. Possible status values are given in circles. 244 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 20-22. Possible Status Codes Caused by Arbitration START SLA Data Arbitration lost in SLA Own Address / General Call received No STOP Arbitration lost in Data 38 TWI bus will be released and not addressed slave mode will be entered A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free Yes Direction Write 68/78 Read B0 Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received 245 7593K–AVR–11/09 21. USB controller 21.1 Features • Support full-speed and low-speed. • Support ping-pong mode (dual bank) • 832 bytes of DPRAM : – 1 endpoint 64 bytes max (default control endpoint), – 1 endpoints of 256 bytes max, (one or two banks), – 5 endpoints of 64 bytes max, (one or two banks) 21.2 Block Diagram The USB controller provides the hardware to interface a USB link to a data flow stored in a double port memory (DPRAM). The USB controller requires a 48 MHz ±0.25% reference clock (for Full-Speed operation), which is the output of an internal PLL. The PLL generates the internal high frequency (48 MHz) clock for USB interface, the PLL input is generated from an external lower frequency (the crystal oscillator or external clock input pin from XTAL1; to satisfy the USB frequency accuracy and jitter, only this clock source allows proper functionnality of the USB controller). The 48MHz clock is used to generate a 12 MHz Full-speed (or 1.5 MHz Low-Speed) bit clock from the received USB differential data and to transmit data according to full or low speed USB device tolerance. Clock recovery is done by a Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) block, which is compliant with the jitter specification of the USB bus. To comply with the USB Electrical specification, USB Pads (D+ or D-) should be powered within the 3.0 to 3.6V range. As AT90USB64/128 can be powered up to 5.5V, an internal regulator provides the USB pads power supply. Figure 21-1. USB controller Block Diagram overview UVCC UCAP AVCC USB Regulator PLL 24x XTAL1 clk 2MHz PLL clock Prescaler clk 48MHz CPU D- DPLL Clock Recovery D+ USB Interface VBUS On-Chip USB DPRAM UID 246 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 21.3 Typical Application Implementation Depending on the USB operating mode (Device only, Reduced Host or OTG mode) and on the target application power supply, the AT90USB64/128 require different hardware typical implementations. Figure 21-2. Operating modes versus frequency and power-supply Max Operating Frequency (MHz) VCC (V) 5.5 16 MHz 4.5 USB compliant, with internal regulator 3.6 8 MHz 3.4 USB compliant, without internal regulator 3.0 2.7 USB not operational 2 MHz VCC min 0 21.3.1 21.3.1.1 Device mode Bus Powered device Figure 21-3. Typical Bus powered application with 5V I/O UVCC AVCC VCC UCAP 1µF VBUS VBUS UDP D+ Rs=22 UDM DRs=22 UVSS UID UGND UID XTAL1 XTAL2 GND GND 247 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 21-4. Typical Bus powered application with 3V I/O External 3V Regulator UVCC AVCC VCC UCAP 1µF VBUS VBUS UDP D+ Rs=22 UDM DRs=22 UVSS UVSS UGND UID UID XTAL1 21.3.1.2 XTAL2 GND GND Self Powered device Figure 21-5. Typical Self powered application with 3.4V to 5.5V I/O External 3.4V - 5.5V Power Supply UVCC AVCC VCC UCAP 1µF VBUS VBUS UDP D+ Rs=22 UDM DRs=22 UVSS UID UGND UID XTAL1 248 XTAL2 GND GND AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 21-6. Typical Self powered application with 3.0V to 3.6 I/O External 3.0V - 3.6V Power Supply UVCC AVCC VCC UCAP 1µF VBUS VBUS UDP D+ Rs=22 UDM DRs=22 UVSS UGND UID UID XTAL1 21.3.2 XTAL2 GND GND Host / OTG mode Figure 21-7. Host/OTG application with 3.0V to 3.6 I/O External 3.0V - 3.4V Power Supply 5V UVCC AVCC VCC 5V DC/DC generator UCAP 1µF UVCON VBUS VBUS UDM D+ Rs=22 UDP DRs=22 UVSS UID UGND UID XTAL1 XTAL2 GND GND 249 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 21-8. Host/OTG application with 5V I/O External 5.0V Power Supply 5V UVCC AVCC VCC UCAP 1µF UVCON VBUS VBUS UDP D+ Rs=22 UDM DRs=22 UVSS UID UGND UID XTAL1 21.3.3 XTAL2 GND GND Design guidelines • Serial resistors on USB Data lines must have 22 Ohms value (+/- 5%). • Traces from the input USB receptable (or from the cable connection in the case of a tethered device) to the USB microcontroller pads should be as short as possibles, and follow differential traces routing rules (same length, as near as possible, avoid vias accumulation). • Voltage transcient / ESD suppressors may also be used to prevent USB pads to be damaged by external disturbances. • Ucap capacitor should be 1µF (+/- 10%) for correct operation. • A 10µF capacitor is highly recommended on VBUS line 250 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 21.4 21.4.1 General Operating Modes Introduction After a hardware reset, the USB controller is disabled. When enabled, the USB controller has to run the Device Controller or the Host Controller. This is performed using the USB ID detection. • If the ID pin is not connected to ground, the USB ID bit is set by hardware (internal pull up on the UID pad) and the USB Device controller is selected. • The ID bit is cleared by hardware when a low level has been detected on the ID pin. The Device controller is then disabled and the Host controller enabled. The software anyway has to select the mode (Host, Device) in order to access to the Device controller registers or to the Host controller registers, which are multiplexed. For example, even if the USB controller has detected a Device mode (pin ID high), the software shall select the device mode (bit HOST cleared), otherwise it will access to the host registers. This is also true for the Host mode. Note: 21.4.2 For the AT90USB646/1286 products the Host mode is not included in the USB controller, and the ID pin is not used and should be configured and used as a general I/O. Power-on and reset The next diagram explains the USB controller main states on power-on: Figure 21-9. USB controller states after reset Clock stopped FRZCLK=1 M acro off USBE=0 Reset USBE=1 ID=1 <any other state> HW RESET USBE=0 USBE=0 Device USBE=1 ID=0 USBE=0 AT90USB646/1286forcedmode Host AT90USB647/1287only USB Controller state after an hardware reset is ‘Reset’. In this state: • USBE is not set • the USB controller clock is stopped in order to minimize the power consumption (FRZCLK=1), • the USB controller is disabled, • the USB pad is in the suspend mode, • the Host and Device USB controllers internal states are reset. After setting USBE, the USB Controller enters in the Host or in the Device state (according to the USB ID pin). The selected controller is ‘Idle’. The USB Controller can at any time be ‘stopped’ by clearing USBE. In fact, clearing USBE acts as an hardware reset. 251 7593K–AVR–11/09 21.4.3 Interrupts Two interrupts vectors are assigned to USB interface. Figure 21-10. USB Interrupt System USB General & OTG Interrupt USB Device Interrupt USB General Interrupt Vector USB Host Interrupt Endpoint Interrupt USB Endpoint/Pipe Interrupt Vector Pipe Interrupt See Section 22.17, page 277 and Section 23.15, page 296 for more details on the Host and Device interrupts. 252 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 21-11. USB General interrupt vector sources IDTI USBINT.1 VBUSTI USBINT.0 STOI OTGINT.5 IDTE USBCON.1 VBUSTE USBCON.0 STOE OTGIEN.5 HNPERRI OTGINT.4 HNPERRE OTGIEN.4 ROLEEXI OTGINT.3 BCERRI OTGINT.2 VBERRI OTGINT.1 SRPI OTGINT.0 UPRSMI UDINT.6 EORSMI UDINT.5 USB General Interrupt Vector ROLEEXE OTGIEN.3 BCERRE OTGIEN.2 VBERRE OTGIEN.1 SRPE OTGIEN.0 UPRSME UDIEN.6 EORSME UDIEN.5 WAKEUPI UDINT.4 WAKEUPE UDIEN.4 EORSTI UDINT.3 SOFI UDINT.2 SUSPI UDINT.0 USB Device Interrupt USB General Interrupt Vector EORSTE UDIEN.3 SOFE UDIEN.2 SUSPE UDIEN.0 HWUPI UHINT.6 HWUPE UHIEN.6 HSOFI UHINT.5 RXRSMI UHINT.4 RSMEDI UHINT.3 RSTI UHINT.2 DDISCI UHINT.1 DCONNI UHINT.0 HSOFE UHIEN.5 RXRSME UHIEN.4 USB Host Interrupt RSMEDE UHIEN.3 RSTE UHIEN.2 DDISCE UHIEN.1 Asynchronous Interrupt source (allows the CPU to wake up from power down mode) DCONNE UHIEN.0 253 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 21-12. USB Endpoint/Pipe Interrupt vector sources Endpoint 6 Endpoint 5 Endpoint 4 Endpoint 3 Endpoint 2 Endpoint 1 Endpoint 0 OVERFI UESTAX.6 UNDERFI UESTAX.5 NAKINI UEINTX.6 NAKOUTI UEINTX.4 RXSTPI UEINTX.3 RXOUTI UEINTX.2 FLERRE UEIENX.7 NAKINE UEIENX.6 TXSTPE UEIENX.4 RXSTPE UEIENX.3 Endpoint Interrupt EPINT UEINT.X RXOUTE UEIENX.2 STALLEDI UEINTX.1 STALLEDE UEIENX.1 TXINI UEINTX.0 TXINE UEIENX.0 USB Endpoint/P Interrupt Vecto PIPE 6 PIPE 5 PIPE 4 PIPE 3 PIPE 2 PIPE 1 PIPE 0 OVERFI UPSTAX.6 UNDERFI UPSTAX.5 NAKEDI UPINTX.6 PERRI UPINTX.4 TXSTPI UPINTX.3 TXOUTI UPINTX.2 FLERRE UPIEN.7 NAKEDE UPIEN.6 PERRE UPIEN.4 TXSTPE UPIEN.3 FLERRE UPIEN.X Pipe Interrupt TXOUTE UPIEN.2 RXSTALLI UPINTX.1 RXSTALLE UPIEN.1 RXINI UPINTX.0 254 RXINE UPIEN.0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 21-13. USB General and OTG Controller Interrupt System IDTI USBINT.1 VBUSTI USBINT.0 STOI OTGINT.5 IDTE USBCON.1 VBUSTE USBCON.0 STOE OTGIEN.5 HNPERRI OTGINT.4 HNPERRE OTGIEN.4 ROLEEXI OTGINT.3 BCERRI OTGINT.2 VBERRI OTGINT.1 SRPI OTGINT.0 USB General & OTG Interrupt Vector ROLEEXE OTGIEN.3 BCERRE OTGIEN.2 VBERRE OTGIEN.1 Asynchronous Interrupt source (allows the CPU to wake up from power down mode) SRPE OTGIEN.0 There are 2 kind of interrupts: processing (i.e. their generation are part of the normal processing) and exception (errors). Processing interrupts are generated when such events occur : • USB ID Pad change detection (insert, remove)(IDTI) • VBUS plug-in detection (insert, remove) (VBUSTI) • SRP detected(SRPI) • Role Exchanged(ROLEEXI) Exception Interrupts are generated with the following events : • Drop on VBus Detected(VBERRI) • Error during the B-Connection(BCERRI) • HNP Error(HNPERRI) • Time-out detected during Suspend mode(STOII) 21.5 21.5.1 Power modes Idle mode In this mode, the CPU core is halted (CPU clock stopped). The Idle mode is taken wether the USB controller is running or not. The CPU “wakes up” on any USB interrupts. 21.5.2 Power down In this mode, the oscillator is stopped and halts all the clocks (CPU and peripherals). The USB controller “wakes up” when: • the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered in the Peripheral mode (HOST cleared), 255 7593K–AVR–11/09 • the HWUPI interrupt is triggered in the Host mode (HOST set). • the IDTI interrupt is triggered • the VBUSTI interrupt is triggered 21.5.3 Freeze clock The firmware has the ability to reduce the power consumption by setting the FRZCLK bit, which freeze the clock of USB controller. When FRZCLK is set, it is still possible to access to the following registers: • USBCON, USBSTA, USBINT • UDCON (detach, ...) • UDINT • UDIEN • UHCON • UHINT • UHIEN Moreover, when FRZCLK is set, only the following interrupts may be triggered: • WAKEUPI • IDTI • VBUSTI • HWUPI 21.6 Speed Control 21.6.1 Device mode When the USB interface is configured in device mode, the speed selection (Full Speed or Low Speed) depends on the UDP/UDM pull-up. The LSM bit in UDCON register allows to select an internal pull up on UDM (Low Speed mode) or UDP(Full Speed mode) data lines. Figure 21-14. Device mode Speed Selection USB Regulator UCAP DETACH UDCON.0 LSM RPU RPU UDCON.2 UDP UDM 256 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 21.6.2 Host mode When the USB interface is configured in host mode, internal Pull Down resistors are activated on both UDP UDM lines and the interface detects the type of connected device. 21.7 Memory management The controller does only support the following memory allocation management. The reservation of a Pipe or an Endpoint can only be made in the increasing order (Pipe/Endpoint 0 to the last Pipe/Endpoint). The firmware shall thus configure them in the same order. The reservation of a Pipe or an Endpoint “ki” is done when its ALLOC bit is set. Then, the hardware allocates the memory and inserts it between the Pipe/Endpoints “ki-1” and “ki+1”. The “ki+1” Pipe/Endpoint memory “slides” up and its data is lost. Note that the “ki+2” and upper Pipe/Endpoint memory does not slide. Clearing a Pipe enable (PEN) or an Endpoint enable (EPEN) does not clear either its ALLOC bit, or its configuration (EPSIZE/PSIZE, EPBK/PBK). To free its memory, the firmware should clear ALLOC. Then, the “ki+1” Pipe/Endpoint memory automatically “slides” down. Note that the “ki+2” and upper Pipe/Endpoint memory does not slide. The following figure illustrates the allocation and reorganization of the USB memory in a typical example: Table 21-1. Allocation and reorganization USB memory flow Free memory Free memory Free memory Free memory 5 5 5 5 4 4 Lost memory 3 EPEN=0 (ALLOC=1) 4 3 (bigger size) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Pipe/Endpoints activation Pipe/Endpoint Disable Free its memory (ALLOC=0) Pipe/Endpoint Activatation 4 Conflict EPEN=1 ALLOC=1 • First, Pipe/Endpoint 0 to Pipe/Endpoint 5 are configured, in the growing order. The memory of each is reserved in the DPRAM. • Then, the Pipe/Endpoint 3 is disabled (EPEN=0), but its memory reservation is internally kept by the controller. • Its ALLOC bit is cleared: the Pipe/Endpoint 4 “slides” down, but the Pipe/Endpoint 5 does not “slide”. • Finally, if the firmware chooses to reconfigure the Pipe/Endpoint 3, with a bigger size. The controller reserved the memory after the endpoint 2 memory and automatically “slide” the Pipe/Endpoint 4. The Pipe/Endpoint 5 does not move and a memory conflict appear, in that 257 7593K–AVR–11/09 both Pipe/Endpoint 4 and 5 use a common area. The data of those endpoints are potentially lost. Note that: • the data of Pipe/Endpoint 0 are never lost whatever the activation or deactivation of the higher Pipe/Endpoint. Its data is lost if it is deactivated. • Deactivate and reactivate the same Pipe/Endpoint with the same parameters does not lead to a “slide” of the higher endpoints. For those endpoints, the data are preserved. • CFGOK is set by hardware even in the case where there is a “conflict” in the memory allocation. 21.8 PAD suspend The next figures illustrates the pad behaviour: • In the “idle” mode, the pad is put in low power consumption mode. • In the “active” mode, the pad is working. Figure 21-15. Pad behaviour USBE=1 & DETACH=0 & suspend Idle mode USBE=0 | DETACH=1 | suspend Active mode The SUSPI flag indicated that a suspend state has been detected on the USB bus. This flag automatically put the USB pad in Idle. The detection of a non-idle event sets the WAKEUPI flag and wakes-up the USB pad. SUSPI Suspend detected = USB pad power down WAKEUPI Clear Suspend by software Clear Resume by software Resume = USB pad wake-up PAD status Active Power Down Active Moreover, the pad can also be put in the “idle” mode if the DETACH bit is set. It come back in the active mode when the DETACH bit is cleared. 258 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 21.9 OTG timers customizing It is possible to refine some OTG timers thanks to the OTGTCON register that contains the PAGE bits to select the timer and the VALUE bits to adjust the value. User should refer to lastest releases of the OTG specification to select compliant timings. • PAGE=00b: AWaitVrise time-out. [OTG]. In Host mode, once VBUSREQ has been set to “1”, if no VBUS is detected on VBUS pin after this AWaitVrise delay then the VBERRI error flag is set. – VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 20 ms – VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 50 ms – VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 70ms – VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 100 ms • PAGE=01b: VbBusPulsing. [OTG]. In Device mode, this delay corresponds to the pulse duration on Vbus during a SRP. – VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 15 ms – VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 23 ms – VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 31 ms – VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 40 ms • PAGE=10b: PdTmOutCnt. [OTG]. In Device mode, when a SRP has been requested to be sent by the firmware, this delay is waited by the hardware after VBUS has gone below the “session_valid” threshold voltage and before initiating the first pulse. This delay should be considered as an approximation of USB lines discharge (pull-down resistors vs. line capacitance) in order to wait that VBUS has gone below the “b_session_end” threshold voltae, as defined in the OTG specification. – VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 93 ms – VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 105 ms – VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 118 ms – VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 131 ms • PAGE=11b: SRPDetTmOut. [OTG]. In Host mode, this delay is the minimum pulse duration required to detect and accept a valid SRP from a Device. – VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 10 us – VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 100 us – VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 1 ms – VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 11 ms 21.10 Plug-in detection The USB connection is detected by the VBUS pad, thanks to the following architecture: 259 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 21-16. Plug-in Detection Input Block Diagram VDD RPU VBus_pulsing Session_valid VBUS RPU Logic Vbus_valid VBUS VBUSTI USBSTA.0 USBINT.0 VBus_discharge VSS Pad logic The control logic of the VBUS pad outputs a signal regarding the VBUS voltage level : • The “Session_valid” signal is active high when the voltage on the VBUS pad is higher or equal to 1.4V. If lower than 1.4V, the signal is not active. • The “Vbus_valid” signal is active high when the voltage on the VBUS pad is higher or equal to 4.4V. If lower than 4.4V, the signal is not active. • The VBUS status bit is set when VBUS is greater than “Vbus_valid”. The VBUS status bit is cleared when VBUS falls below “Session_valid” (hysteresis behavior). • The VBUSTI flag is set each time the VBUS bit state changes. 21.10.1 Peripheral mode The USB peripheral cannot attach to the bus while VBUS bit is not set. 21.10.2 Host mode The Host must use the UVCON pin to drive an external power switch or regulator that powers the Vbus line. The UVCON pin is automatically asserted and set high by hardware when UVCONE and VBUSREQ bits are set by firmware. If a device connects (pull-up on DP or DM) within 300ms of Vbus delivery, the DCONNI flag will rise. But, once VBUSREQ bit has been set, if no peripheral connection is detected within 300ms, the BCERRI flag (and interrupt) will rise and Vbus delivery will be stopped (UVCON cleared). If that behavior represents a limitation for the Host application, the following work-around may be used : 1. UVCONE and VBUSREQ must be cleared 2. VBUSHWC must be set (to disable hardware control of UVCON pin) 3. PORTE,7 pin (alternate function of UVCON pin) must be set by firmware 4. a device connection will be detected thanks to the SRPI flag (that may usually be used to detect a DP/DM pulse sent by an OTG B-Device that requests a new session) 21.11 ID detection The ID pin transition is detected thanks to the following architecture: 260 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 21-17. ID Detection Input Block Diagram RPU VDD Internal Pull Up 1 UID ID 0 UIMOD USBSTA.1 UHWCON.7 UIDE UHWCON.6 The ID pin can be used to detect the USB mode (Peripheral or Host) or software selected. This allows the UID pin to be used has general purpose I/O even when USB interface is enable. When the UID pin is selected, by default, (no A-plug or B-plug), the macro is in the Peripheral mode (internal pull-up). The IDTI interrupt is triggered when a A-plug (Host) is plugged or unplugged. The interrupt is not triggered when a B-plug (Periph) is plugged or unplugged. ID detection is independant of USB global interface enable. 21.12 Registers description 21.12.1 USB general registers Bit 7 6 UIMOD UIDE 5 4 3 2 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R R R/W Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UVCONE 0 UVREGE UHWCON • 7 – UIMOD: USB Mode Bit This bit has no effect when the UIDE bit is set (external UID pin activated). Set to enable the USB device mode. Clear to enable the USB host mode • 6 – UIDE: UID pin Enable Set to enable the USB mode selection (peripheral/host) through the UID pin. Clear to enable the USB mode selection (peripheral/host) with UIMOD bit register. UIDE should be modified only when the USB interface is disabled (USBE bit cleared). • 5 – Reserved The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 4 – UVCONE: UVCON pin Enable Set to enable the UVCON pin control. Clear to disable the UVCON pin control. This bit should be set only when the USB interface is enable. • 3-1 – Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. 261 7593K–AVR–11/09 • 0 – UVREGE: USB pad regulator Enable Set to enable the USB pad regulator. Clear to disable the USB pad regulator. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 USBE HOST FRZCLK OTGPADE - - IDTE VBUSTE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 USBCON • 7 – USBE: USB macro Enable Bit Set to enable the USB controller. Clear to disable and reset the USB controller, to disable the USB transceiver and to disable the USB controller clock inputs. • 6 – HOST: HOST Bit Set to enable the Host mode. Clear to enable the device mode. • 5 – FRZCLK: Freeze USB Clock Bit Set to disable the clock inputs (the ”Resume Detection” is still active). This reduces the power consumption. Clear to enable the clock inputs. • 4 – OTGPADE: OTG Pad Enable Set to enable the OTG pad. Clear to disable the OTG pad. The OTG pad is actually the VBUS pad. Note that this bit can be set/cleared even if USBE=0. That allows the VBUS detection even if the USB macro is disabled. This pad must be enabled in both Host and Device modes in order to allow USB operation (attaching, transmitting...). • 3-2 – Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 1 – IDTE: ID Transition Interrupt Enable Bit Set this bit to enable the ID Transition interrupt generation. Clear this bit to disable the ID Transition interrupt generation. • 0 – VBUSTE: VBUS Transition Interrupt Enable Bit Set this bit to enable the VBUS Transition interrupt generation. Clear this bit to disable the VBUS Transition interrupt generation. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 - - - - SPEED Read/Write R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 1 2 1 0 ID VBUS R R R 0 1 0 USBSTA • 7-4 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 3 – SPEED: Speed Status Flag This should be read only when the USB controller operates in host mode, in device mode the value read from this bit is undeterminated. 262 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Set by hardware when the controller is in FULL-SPEED mode. Cleared by hardware when the controller is in LOW-SPEED mode. • 2 – Reserved The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 1 – ID: IUD pin Flag The value read from this bit indicates the state of the UID pin. • 0 – VBUS: VBus Flag The value read from this bit indicates the state of the VBUS pin. This bit can be used in device mode to monitor the USB bus connection state of the appication. See Section 21.10, page 259 for more details. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - - IDTI VBUSTI Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USBINT 7-2 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. 1 – IDTI: D Transition Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a transition (high to low, low to high) has been detected on the UID pin. Shall be cleared by software. • 0 – VBUSTI: IVBUS Transition Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a transition (high to low, low to high) has been detected on the VBUS pad. Shall be cleared by software. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - HNPREQ SRPREQ SRPSEL VBUSHWC VBUSREQ VBUSRQC Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OTGCON • 7-6 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 5 – HNPREQ: HNP Request Bit Set to initiate the HNP when the controller is in the Device mode (B). Set to accept the HNP when the controller is in the Host mode (A). Clear otherwise. • 4 – SRPREQ: SRP Request Bit Set to initiate the SRP when the controller is in Device mode. Cleared by hardware when the controller is initiating a SRP. 263 7593K–AVR–11/09 • 3 – SRPSEL: SRP Selection Bit Set to choose VBUS pulsing as SRP method. Clear to choose data line pulsing as SRP method. • 2 – VBUSHWC: VBus Hardware Control Bit Set to disable the hardware control over the UVCON pin. Clear to enable the hardware control over the UVCON pin. See for more details • 1 – VBUSREQ: VBUS Request Bit Set to assert the UVCON pin in order to enable the VBUS power supply generation. This bit shall be used when the controller is in the Host mode. Cleared by hardware when VBUSRQC is set. • 0 – VBUSRQC: VBUS Request Clear Bit Set to deassert the UVCON pin in order to enable the VBUS power supply generation. This bit shall be used when the controller is in the Host mode. Cleared by hardware immediately after the set. Bit 7 6 - 5 4 3 2 - PAGE - - 1 0 VALUE OTGTCON Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 7 – Reserved This bit is reserved and always set. • 6-5 – PAGE: Timer page access Bit Set/clear to access a special timer register. See Section 21.9, page 259 for more details. • 4-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 1-0 – VALUE: Value Bit Set to initialize the new value of the timer. See Section 21.9, page 259 for more details. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - STOE HNPERRE ROLEEXE BCERRE VBERRE SRPE Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OTGIEN • 7-6 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 5 – STOE: Suspend Time-out Error Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the STOI interrupt. Clear to disable the STOI interrupt. 264 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • 4 – HNPERRE: HNP Error Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the HNPERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the HNPERRI interrupt. • 3 – ROLEEXE: Role Exchange Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the ROLEEXI interrupt. Clear to disable the ROLEEXI interrupt. • 2 – BCERRE: B-Connection Error Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the BCERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the BCERRI interrupt. • 1 – VBERRE: VBus Error Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the VBERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the VBERRI interrupt. • 0 – SRPE: SRP Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the SRPI interrupt. Clear to disable the SRPI interrupt. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - STOI HNPERRI ROLEEXI BCERRI VBERRI SRPI Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OTGINT • 7-6 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 5 – STOI: Suspend Time-out Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a time-out error (more than 150 ms) has been detected after a suspend. Shall be cleared by software. • 4 – HNPERRI: HNP Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an error has been detected during the protocol. Shall be cleared by software. • 3 – ROLEEXI: Role Exchange Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when the USB controller has successfully swapped its mode, due to an HNP negotiation: Host to Device or Device to Host. However the mode selection bit (Host/Device) is unchanged and must be changed by firmware in order to reach the correct RAM locations and events bits. Shall be cleared by software. • 2 – BCERRI: B-Connection Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an error occur during the B-Connection (i.e. if Peripheral has not connected after 300ms of Vbus delivery request). Shall be cleared by software. • 1 – VBERRI: V-Bus Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a drop on VBus has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. • 0 – SRPI: SRP Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a SRP has been detected. Shall be used in the Host mode only. Shall be cleared by software. 265 7593K–AVR–11/09 21.13 USB Software Operating modes Depending on the USB operating mode, the software should perform some the following operations: Power On the USB interface • Power-On USB pads regulator • Configure PLL interface • Enable PLL and wait PLL lock • Enable USB interface • Configure USB interface (USB speed, Endpoints configuration...) • Wait for USB VBUS information connection • Attach USB device Power Off the USB interface • Detach USB interface • Disable USB interface • Disable PLL • Disable USB pad regulator Suspending the USB interface • Clear Suspend Bit • Freeze USB clock • Disable PLL • Be sure to have interrupts enable to exit sleep mode • Make the MCU enter sleep mode Resuming the USB interface • Enable PLL • Wait PLL lock • Unfreeze USB clock • Clear Resume information 266 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 22. USB Device Operating modes 22.1 Introduction The USB device controller supports full speed and low speed data transfers. In addition to the default control endpoint, it provides six other endpoints, which can be configured in control, bulk, interrupt or isochronous modes: • Endpoint 0:programmable size FIFO up to 64 bytes, default control endpoint • Endpoints 1 programmable size FIFO up to 256 bytes in ping-pong mode. • Endpoints 2 to 6: programmable size FIFO up to 64 bytes in ping-pong mode. The controller starts in the “idle” mode. In this mode, the pad consumption is reduced to the minimum. 22.2 Power-on and reset The next diagram explains the USB device controller main states on power-on: Figure 22-1. USB device controller states after reset USBE=0 <any other state> USBE=0 Reset Idle USBE=1 UID=1 HW RESET The reset state of the Device controller is: • the macro clock is stopped in order to minimize the power consumption (FRZCLK set), • the USB device controller internal state is reset (all the registers are reset to their default value. Note that DETACH is set.) • the endpoint banks are reset • the D+ or D- pull up are not activated (mode Detach) The D+ or D- pull-up will be activated as soon as the DETACH bit is cleared and VBUS is present. The macro is in the ‘Idle’ state after reset with a minimum power consumption and does not need to have the PLL activated to enter in this state. The USB device controller can at any time be reset by clearing USBE (disable USB interface). 22.3 Endpoint reset An endpoint can be reset at any time by setting in the UERST register the bit corresponding to the endpoint (EPRSTx). This resets: • the internal state machine on that endpoint, • the Rx and Tx banks are cleared and their internal pointers are restored, 267 7593K–AVR–11/09 • the UEINTX, UESTA0X and UESTA1X are restored to their reset value. The data toggle field remains unchanged. The other registers remain unchanged. The endpoint configuration remains active and the endpoint is still enabled. The endpoint reset may be associated with a clear of the data toggle command (RSTDT bit) as an answer to the CLEAR_FEATURE USB command. 22.4 USB reset When an USB reset is detected on the USB line, the next operations are performed by the controller: • all the endpoints are disabled • the default control endpoint remains configured (see Section 22.3, page 267 for more details). 22.5 Endpoint selection Prior to any operation performed by the CPU, the endpoint must first be selected. This is done by setting the EPNUM2:0 bits (UENUM register) with the endpoint number which will be managed by the CPU. The CPU can then access to the various endpoint registers and data. 22.6 Endpoint activation The endpoint is maintained under reset as long as the EPEN bit is not set. The following flow must be respected in order to activate an endpoint: 268 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 22-2. Endpoint activation flow: Endpoint Activation UENUM Select the endpoint EPNUM=x EPEN=1 Activate the endpoint UECFG0X Configure: - the endpoint direction - the endpoint type EPDIR EPTYPE ... Configure: - the endpoint size - the bank parametrization Allocation and reorganization of the memory is made on-the-fly UECFG1X ALLOC EPSIZE EPBK CFGOK=1 Test the correct endpoint configuration No Yes Endpoint activated ERROR As long as the endpoint is not correctly configured (CFGOK cleared), the hardware does not acknowledge the packets sent by the host. CFGOK is will not be sent if the Endpoint size parameter is bigger than the DPRAM size. A clear of EPEN acts as an endpoint reset (see Section 22.3, page 267 for more details). It also performs the next operation: • The configuration of the endpoint is kept (EPSIZE, EPBK, ALLOC kept) • It resets the data toggle field. • The DPRAM memory associated to the endpoint is still reserved. See Section 21.7, page 257 for more details about the memory allocation/reorganization. 22.7 Address Setup The USB device address is set up according to the USB protocol: • the USB device, after power-up, responds at address 0 • the host sends a SETUP command (SET_ADDRESS(addr)), • the firmware records that address in UADD, but keep ADDEN cleared, • the USB device sends an IN command of 0 bytes (IN 0 Zero Length Packet), • then, the firmware can enable the USB device address by setting ADDEN. The only accepted address by the controller is the one stored in UADD. ADDEN and UADD shall not be written at the same time. UADD contains the default address 00h after a power-up or USB reset. 269 7593K–AVR–11/09 ADDEN is cleared by hardware: • after a power-up reset, • when an USB reset is received, • or when the macro is disabled (USBE cleared) When this bit is cleared, the default device address 00h is used. 22.8 Suspend, Wake-up and Resume After a period of 3 ms during which the USB line was inactive, the controller switches to the fullspeed mode and triggers (if enabled) the SUSPI (suspend) interrupt. The firmware may then set the FRZCLK bit. The CPU can also, depending on software architecture, enter in the idle mode to lower again the power consumption. There are two ways to recover from the “Suspend” mode: • First one is to clear the FRZCLK bit. This is possible if the CPU is not in the Idle mode. • Second way, if the CPU is “idle”, is to enable the WAKEUPI interrupt (WAKEUPE set). Then, as soon as an non-idle signal is seen by the controller, the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered. The firmware shall then clear the FRZCLK bit to restart the transfer. There are no relationship between the SUSPI interrupt and the WAKEUPI interrupt: the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered as soon as there are non-idle patterns on the data lines. Thus, the WAKEUPI interrupt can occurs even if the controller is not in the “suspend” mode. When the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered, if the SUSPI interrupt bit was already set, it is cleared by hardware. When the SUSPI interrupt is triggered, if the WAKEUPI interrupt bit was already set, it is cleared by hardware. 22.9 Detach The reset value of the DETACH bit is 1. It is possible to re-enumerate a device, simply by setting and clearing the DETACH bit. • Setting DETACH will disconnect the pull-up on the D+ or D- pad (depending on full or low speed mode selected). Then, clearing DETACH will connect the pull-up on the D+ or D- pad. Figure 22-3. Detach a device in Full-speed: UVREF UVREF D+ DEN=1 270 D+ DDetach, then Attach EN=1 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 22.10 Remote Wake-up The “Remote Wake-up” (or “upstream resume”) request is the only operation allowed to be sent by the device on its own initiative. Anyway, to do that, the device should first have received a DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP request from the host. • First, the USB controller must have detected the “suspend” state of the line: the remote wakeup can only be sent when a SUSPI flag is set. • The firmware has then the ability to set RMWKUP to send the “upstream resume” stream. This will automatically be done by the controller after 5ms of inactivity on the USB line. • When the controller starts to send the “upstream resume”, the UPRSMI interrupt is triggered (if enabled). SUSPI is cleared by hardware. • RMWKUP is cleared by hardware at the end of the “upstream resume”. • If the controller detects a good “End Of Resume” signal from the host, an EORSMI interrupt is triggered (if enabled). 22.11 STALL request For each endpoint, the STALL management is performed using 2 bits: – STALLRQ (enable stall request) – STALLRQC (disable stall request) – STALLEDI (stall sent interrupt) To send a STALL handshake at the next request, the STALLRQ request bit has to be set. All following requests will be handshak’ed with a STALL until the STALLRQC bit is set. Setting STALLRQC automatically clears the STALLRQ bit. The STALLRQC bit is also immediately cleared by hardware after being set by software. Thus, the firmware will never read this bit as set. Each time the STALL handshake is sent, the STALLEDI flag is set by the USB controller and the EPINTx interrupt will be triggered (if enabled). The incoming packets will be discarded (RXOUTI and RWAL will not be set). The host will then send a command to reset the STALL: the firmware just has to set the STALLRQC bit and to reset the endpoint. 22.11.1 Special consideration for Control Endpoints A SETUP request is always ACK’ed. If a STALL request is set for a Control Endpoint and if a SETUP request occurs, the SETUP request has to be ACK’ed and the STALLRQ request and STALLEDI sent flags are automatically reset (RXSETUPI set, TXIN cleared, STALLED cleared, TXINI cleared...). This management simplifies the enumeration process management. If a command is not supported or contains an error, the firmware set the STALL request flag and can return to the main task, waiting for the next SETUP request. This function is compliant with the Chapter 8 test that may send extra status for a GET_DESCRIPTOR. The firmware sets the STALL request just after receiving the status. All extra status will be automatically STALL’ed until the next SETUP request. 271 7593K–AVR–11/09 22.11.2 STALL handshake and Retry mechanism The Retry mechanism has priority over the STALL handshake. A STALL handshake is sent if the STALLRQ request bit is set and if there is no retry required. 22.12 CONTROL endpoint management A SETUP request is always ACK’ed. When a new setup packet is received, the RXSTPI interrupt is triggered (if enabled). The RXOUTI interrupt is not triggered. The FIFOCON and RWAL fields are irrelevant with CONTROL endpoints. The firmware shall thus never use them on that endpoints. When read, their value is always 0. CONTROL endpoints are managed by the following bits: • RXSTPI is set when a new SETUP is received. It shall be cleared by firmware to acknowledge the packet and to clear the endpoint bank. • RXOUTI is set when a new OUT data is received. It shall be cleared by firmware to acknowledge the packet and to clear the endpoint bank. • TXINI is set when the bank is ready to accept a new IN packet. It shall be cleared by firmware to send the packet and to clear the endpoint bank. 22.12.1 Control Write The next figure shows a control write transaction. During the status stage, the controller will not necessary send a NAK at the first IN token: • If the firmware knows the exact number of descriptor bytes that must be read, it can then anticipate on the status stage and send a ZLP for the next IN token, • or it can read the bytes and poll NAKINI, which tells that all the bytes have been sent by the host, and the transaction is now in the status stage. SETUP USB line RXSTPI RXOUTI TXINI 272 DATA SETUP OUT STATUS OUT IN IN NAK HW SW HW SW HW SW SW AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 22.12.2 Control Read The next figure shows a control read transaction. The USB controller has to manage the simultaneous write requests from the CPU and the USB host: SETUP USB line DATA SETUP RXSTPI IN STATUS IN OUT OUT NAK HW SW RXOUTI TXINI HW SW HW SW SW Wr Enable HOST Wr Enable CPU A NAK handshake is always generated at the first status stage command. When the controller detect the status stage, all the data writen by the CPU are erased, and clearing TXINI has no effects. The firmware checks if the transmission is complete or if the reception is complete. The OUT retry is always ack’ed. This reception: - set the RXOUTI flag (received OUT data) - set the TXINI flag (data sent, ready to accept new data) software algorithm: set transmit ready wait (transmit complete OR Receive complete) if receive complete, clear flag and return if transmit complete, continue Once the OUT status stage has been received, the USB controller waits for a SETUP request. The SETUP request have priority over any other request and has to be ACK’ed. This means that any other flag should be cleared and the fifo reset when a SETUP is received. WARNING: the byte counter is reset when the OUT Zero Length Packet is received. The firmware has to take care of this. 22.13 OUT endpoint management OUT packets are sent by the host. All the data can be read by the CPU, which acknowledges or not the bank when it is empty. 22.13.1 Overview The Endpoint must be configured first. Each time the current bank is full, the RXOUTI and the FIFOCON bits are set. This triggers an interrupt if the RXOUTE bit is set. The firmware can acknowledge the USB interrupt by clearing the RXOUTI bit. The Firmware read the data and clear the FIFOCON bit in order to free the current bank. If the OUT Endpoint is composed of multiple banks, clearing the FIFOCON bit will 273 7593K–AVR–11/09 switch to the next bank. The RXOUTI and FIFOCON bits are then updated by hardware in accordance with the status of the new bank. RXOUTI shall always be cleared before clearing FIFOCON. The RWAL bit always reflects the state of the current bank. This bit is set if the firmware can read data from the bank, and cleared by hardware when the bank is empty. Example with 1 OUT data bank OUT DATA (to bank 0) NAK ACK OUT DATA (to bank 0) ACK HW RXOUTI HW SW SW read data from CPU BANK 0 FIFOCON SW read data from CPU BANK 0 Example with 2 OUT data banks OUT DATA (to bank 0) ACK OUT DATA (to bank 1) ACK HW RXOUTI FIFOCON 22.13.2 HW SW SW read data from CPU BANK 0 SW read data from CPU BANK 1 Detailed description 22.13.2.1 The data are read by the CPU, following the next flow: • When the bank is filled by the host, an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered, if enabled (RXOUTE set) and RXOUTI is set. The CPU can also poll RXOUTI or FIFOCON, depending on the software architecture, • The CPU acknowledges the interrupt by clearing RXOUTI, • The CPU can read the number of byte (N) in the current bank (N=BYCT), • The CPU can read the data from the current bank (“N” read of UEDATX), • The CPU can free the bank by clearing FIFOCON when all the data is read, that is: – after “N” read of UEDATX, – as soon as RWAL is cleared by hardware. If the endpoint uses 2 banks, the second one can be filled by the HOST while the current one is being read by the CPU. Then, when the CPU clear FIFOCON, the next bank may be already ready and RXOUTI is set immediately. 274 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 22.14 IN endpoint management IN packets are sent by the USB device controller, upon an IN request from the host. All the data can be written by the CPU, which acknowledge or not the bank when it is full.Overview The Endpoint must be configured first. The TXINI bit is set by hardware when the current bank becomes free. This triggers an interrupt if the TXINE bit is set. The FIFOCON bit is set at the same time. The CPU writes into the FIFO and clears the FIFOCON bit to allow the USB controller to send the data. If the IN Endpoint is composed of multiple banks, this also switches to the next data bank. The TXINI and FIFOCON bits are automatically updated by hardware regarding the status of the next bank. TXINI shall always be cleared before clearing FIFOCON. The RWAL bit always reflects the state of the current bank. This bit is set if the firmware can write data to the bank, and cleared by hardware when the bank is full. Example with 1 IN data bank NAK DATA (bank 0) IN ACK IN HW TXINI FIFOCON SW write data from CPU BANK 0 SW SW SW write data from CPU BANK 0 Example with 2 IN data banks DATA (bank 0) IN ACK IN DATA (bank 1) ACK HW TXINI FIFOCON 22.14.1 SW write data from CPU BANK 0 SW SW write data from CPU BANK 1 SW SW write data from CPU BANK0 Detailed description The data are written by the CPU, following the next flow: • When the bank is empty, an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered, if enabled (TXINE set) and TXINI is set. The CPU can also poll TXINI or FIFOCON, depending the software architecture choice, • The CPU acknowledges the interrupt by clearing TXINI, • The CPU can write the data into the current bank (write in UEDATX), • The CPU can free the bank by clearing FIFOCON when all the data are written, that is: 275 7593K–AVR–11/09 • after “N” write into UEDATX • as soon as RWAL is cleared by hardware. If the endpoint uses 2 banks, the second one can be read by the HOST while the current is being written by the CPU. Then, when the CPU clears FIFOCON, the next bank may be already ready (free) and TXINI is set immediately. 22.14.1.1 Abort An “abort” stage can be produced by the host in some situations: • In a control transaction: ZLP data OUT received during a IN stage, • In an isochronous IN transaction: ZLP data OUT received on the OUT endpoint during a IN stage on the IN endpoint • ... The KILLBK bit is used to kill the last “written” bank. The best way to manage this abort is to perform the following operations: Table 22-1. Abort flow Endpoint Abort Clear UEIENX. TXINE NBUSYBK =0 Yes Disable the TXINI interrupt. Abort is based on the fact that no banks are busy, meaning that nothing has to be sent. No KILLBK=1 Endpoint reset Yes Kill the last written bank. KILLBK=1 Wait for the end of the procedure. No Abort done 22.15 Isochronous mode 22.15.1 Underflow An underflow can occur during IN stage if the host attempts to read a bank which is empty. In this situation, the UNDERFI interrupt is triggered. An underflow can also occur during OUT stage if the host send a packet while the banks are already full. Typically, he CPU is not fast enough. The packet is lost. It is not possible to have underflow error during OUT stage, in the CPU side, since the CPU should read only if the bank is ready to give data (RXOUTI=1 or RWAL=1) 276 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 22.15.2 CRC Error A CRC error can occur during OUT stage if the USB controller detects a bad received packet. In this situation, the STALLEDI interrupt is triggered. This does not prevent the RXOUTI interrupt from being triggered. 22.16 Overflow In Control, Isochronous, Bulk or Interrupt Endpoint, an overflow can occur during OUT stage, if the host attempts to write in a bank that is too small for the packet. In this situation, the OVERFI interrupt is triggered (if enabled). The packet is hacknowledged and the RXOUTI interrupt is also triggered (if enabled). The bank is filled with the first bytes of the packet. It is not possible to have overflow error during IN stage, in the CPU side, since the CPU should write only if the bank is ready to access data (TXINI=1 or RWAL=1). 22.17 Interrupts The next figure shows all the interrupts sources: Figure 22-4. USB Device Controller Interrupt System UPRSMI UDINT.6 EORSMI UDINT.5 UPRSME UDIEN.6 EORSME UDIEN.5 WAKEUPI UDINT.4 WAKEUPE UDIEN.4 EORSTI UDINT.3 SOFI UDINT.2 SUSPI UDINT.0 USB Device Interrupt EORSTE UDIEN.3 SOFE UDIEN.2 SUSPE UDIEN.0 There are 2 kind of interrupts: processing (i.e. their generation are part of the normal processing) and exception (errors). Processing interrupts are generated when: • VBUS plug-in detection (insert, remove)(VBUSTI) • Upstream resume(UPRSMI) • End of resume(EORSMI) • Wake up(WAKEUPI) • End of reset (Speed Initialization)(EORSTI) • Start of frame(SOFI, if FNCERR=0) • Suspend detected after 3 ms of inactivity(SUSPI) Exception Interrupts are generated when: • CRC error in frame number of SOF(SOFI, FNCERR=1) 277 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 22-5. USB Device Controller Endpoint Interrupt System Endpoint 6 Endpoint 5 Endpoint 4 Endpoint 3 Endpoint 2 Endpoint 1 Endpoint 0 OVERFI UESTAX.6 UNDERFI UESTAX.5 NAKINI UEINTX.6 NAKOUTI UEINTX.4 RXSTPI UEINTX.3 RXOUTI UEINTX.2 FLERRE UEIENX.7 NAKINE UEIENX.6 TXSTPE UEIENX.4 Endpoint Interrupt EPINT UEINT.X TXOUTE UEIENX.3 RXOUTE UEIENX.2 STALLEDI UEINTX.1 STALLEDE UEIENX.1 TXINI UEINTX.0 TXINE UEIENX.0 Processing interrupts are generated when: • Ready to accept IN data(EPINTx, TXINI=1) • Received OUT data(EPINTx, RXOUTI=1) • Received SETUP(EPINTx, RXSTPI=1) Exception Interrupts are generated when: • Stalled packet(EPINTx, STALLEDI=1) • CRC error on OUT in isochronous mode(EPINTx, STALLEDI=1) • Overflow in isochronous mode(EPINTx, OVERFI=1) • Underflow in isochronous mode(EPINTx, UNDERFI=1) • NAK IN sent(EPINTx, NAKINI=1) • NAK OUT sent(EPINTx, NAKOUTI=1) 22.18 Registers 22.18.1 USB device general registers Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - LSM RMWKUP DETACH Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 278 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 UDCON AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2 - LSM - USB Device Low Speed Mode Selection When configured USB is configured in device mode, this bit allows to select the USB the USB Low Speed or Full Speed Mod. Clear to select full speed mode (D+ internal pull-up will be activate with the ATTACH bit will be set) . Set to select low speed mode (D- internal pull-up will be activate with the ATTACH bit will be set). This bit has no effect when the USB interface is configured in HOST mode. • 1- RMWKUP - Remote Wake-up Bit Set to send an “upstream-resume” to the host for a remote wake-up (the SUSPI bit must be set). Cleared by hardware when signalling finished. Clearing by software has no effect. See Section 22.10, page 271 for more details. • 0 - DETACH - Detach Bit Set to physically detach de device (disconnect internal pull-up on D+ or D-). Clear to reconnect the device. See Section 22.9, page 270 for more details. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - UPRSMI EORSMI WAKEUPI EORSTI SOFI - SUSPI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDINT Read/Write Initial Value • 7 - Reserved The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 6 - UPRSMI - Upstream Resume Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when the USB controller is sending a resume signal called “Upstream Resume”. This triggers an USB interrupt if UPRSME is set. Shall be cleared by software (USB clocks must be enabled before). Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - EORSMI - End Of Resume Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when the USB controller detects a good “End Of Resume” signal initiated by the host. This triggers an USB interrupt if EORSME is set. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 4 - WAKEUPI - Wake-up CPU Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when the USB controller is re-activated by a filtered non-idle signal from the lines (not by an upstream resume). This triggers an interrupt if WAKEUPE is set. This interrupt should be enable only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode. Shall be cleared by software (USB clock inputs must be enabled before). Setting by software has no effect. 279 7593K–AVR–11/09 See Section 22.8, page 270 for more details. • 3 - EORSTI - End Of Reset Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an “End Of Reset” has been detected by the USB controller. This triggers an USB interrupt if EORSTE is set. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 2 - SOFI - Start Of Frame Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an USB “Start Of Frame” PID (SOF) has been detected (every 1 ms). This triggers an USB interrupt if SOFE is set.. • 1 - Reserved The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit • 0 - SUSPI - Suspend Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an USB “Suspend” ‘idle bus for 3 frame periods: a J state for 3 ms) is detected. This triggers an USB interrupt if SUSPE is set. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. See Section 22.8, page 270 for more details. The interrupt bits are set even if their corresponding ‘Enable’ bits is not set. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - UPRSME EORSME WAKEUPE EORSTE SOFE - SUSPE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDIEN Read/Write Initial Value • 7 - Reserved The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 6 - UPRSME - Upstream Resume Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the UPRSMI interrupt. Clear to disable the UPRSMI interrupt. • 5 - EORSME - End Of Resume Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the EORSMI interrupt. Clear to disable the EORSMI interrupt. • 4 - WAKEUPE - Wake-up CPU Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the WAKEUPI interrupt. For correct interrupt handle execution, this interrupt should be enable only before entering power-down mode. Clear to disable the WAKEUPI interrupt. • 3 - EORSTE - End Of Reset Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the EORSTI interrupt. This bit is set after a reset. Clear to disable the EORSTI interrupt. 280 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • 2 - SOFE - Start Of Frame Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the SOFI interrupt. Clear to disable the SOFI interrupt. • 1 - Reserved The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit • 0 - SUSPE - Suspend Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable the SUSPI interrupt. Clear to disable the SUSPI interrupt. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 ADDEN 2 1 0 UADD6:0 UDADDR Read/Write W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 7 - ADDEN - Address Enable Bit Set to activate the UADD (USB address). Cleared by hardware. Clearing by software has no effect. See Section 22.7, page 269 for more details. • 6-0 - UADD6:0 - USB Address Bits Load by software to configure the device address. . Bit 7 6 5 4 3 - - - - - 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FNUM10:8 UDFNUMH • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2-0 - FNUM10:8 - Frame Number Upper Value Set by hardware. These bits are the 3 MSB of the 11-bits Frame Number information. They are provided in the last received SOF packet. FNUM is updated if a corrupted SOF is received. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FNUM7:0 UDFNUML Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Frame Number Lower Value Set by hardware. These bits are the 8 LSB of the 11-bits Frame Number information. 281 7593K–AVR–11/09 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - FNCERR - - - - 0 0 0 0 Read/W rite Initial Value UDMFN R 0 0 0 0 • 7-5 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 4 - FNCERR -Frame Number CRC Error Flag Set by hardware when a corrupted Frame Number in start of frame packet is received. This bit and the SOFI interrupt are updated at the same time. • 3-0 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. 22.18.2 USB device endpoint registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 - - - - - 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM2:0 UENUM • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2-0 - EPNUM2:0 Endpoint Number Bits Load by software to select the number of the endpoint which shall be accessed by the CPU. See Section 22.5, page 268 for more details. EPNUM = 111b is forbidden. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - EPRST6 EPRST5 EPRST4 EPRST3 EPRST2 EPRST1 EPRST0 Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UERST • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-0 - EPRST6:0 - Endpoint FIFO Reset Bits Set to reset the selected endpoint FIFO prior to any other operation, upon hardware reset or when an USB bus reset has been received. See Section 22.3, page 267 for more information Then, clear by software to complete the reset operation and start using the endpoint. 282 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - STALLRQ STALLRQC RSTDT - - EPEN Read/Write R R W W W R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UECONX • 7-6 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 5 - STALLRQ - STALL Request Handshake Bit Set to request a STALL answer to the host for the next handshake. Cleared by hardware when a new SETUP is received. Clearing by software has no effect. See Section 22.11, page 271 for more details. • 4 - STALLRQC - STALL Request Clear Handshake Bit Set to disable the STALL handshake mechanism. Cleared by hardware immediately after the set. Clearing by software has no effect. See Section 22.11, page 271 for more details. 3 • RSTDT - Reset Data Toggle Bit Set to automatically clear the data toggle sequence: For OUT endpoint: the next received packet will have the data toggle 0. For IN endpoint: the next packet to be sent will have the data toggle 0. Cleared by hardware instantaneously. The firmware does not have to wait that the bit is cleared. Clearing by software has no effect. • 2 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 1 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 0 - EPEN - Endpoint Enable Bit Set to enable the endpoint according to the device configuration. Endpoint 0 shall always be enabled after a hardware or USB reset and participate in the device configuration. Clear this bit to disable the endpoint. See Section 22.6, page 268 for more details. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EPTYPE1:0 - - - - - EPDIR Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UECFG0X R/W 0 • 7-6 - EPTYPE1:0 - Endpoint Type Bits Set this bit according to the endpoint configuration: 283 7593K–AVR–11/09 00b: Control10b: Bulk 01b: Isochronous11b: Interrupt • 5-4 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 3-2 - Reserved for test purpose The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 1 - Reserved The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 0 - EPDIR - Endpoint Direction Bit Set to configure an IN direction for bulk, interrupt or isochronous endpoints. Clear to configure an OUT direction for bulk, interrupt, isochronous or control endpoints. Bit 7 6 - 5 4 3 EPSIZE2:0 2 EPBK1:0 1 0 ALLOC - Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UECFG1X R 0 • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-4 - EPSIZE2:0 - Endpoint Size Bits Set this bit according to the endpoint size: 000b: 8 bytes 100b: 128 bytes (only for endpoint 1) 001b: 16 bytes 101b: 256 bytes (only for endpoint 1) 010b: 32 bytes 110b: Reserved. Do not use this configuration. 011b: 64 bytes 111b: Reserved. Do not use this configuration. • 3-2 - EPBK1:0 - Endpoint Bank Bits Set this field according to the endpoint size: 00b: One bank 01b: Double bank 1xb: Reserved. Do not use this configuration. • 1 - ALLOC - Endpoint Allocation Bit Set this bit to allocate the endpoint memory. Clear to free the endpoint memory. See Section 22.6, page 268 for more details. • 0 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. 284 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Bit 7 6 5 4 CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - 3 2 Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DTSEQ1:0 1 0 NBUSYBK1:0 UESTA0X • 7 - CFGOK - Configuration Status Flag Set by hardware when the endpoint X size parameter (EPSIZE) and the bank parametrization (EPBK) are correct compared to the max FIFO capacity and the max number of allowed bank. This bit is updated when the bit ALLOC is set. If this bit is cleared, the user should reprogram the UECFG1X register with correct EPSIZE and EPBK values. • 6 - OVERFI - Overflow Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an overflow error occurs in an isochronous endpoint. An interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled). See Section 22.15, page 276 for more details. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - UNDERFI - Flow Error Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when an underflow error occurs in an isochronous endpoint. An interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled). See Section 22.15, page 276 for more details. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 4 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 3-2 - DTSEQ1:0 - Data Toggle Sequencing Flag Set by hardware to indicate the PID data of the current bank: 00b Data0 01b Data1 1xb Reserved. For OUT transfer, this value indicates the last data toggle received on the current bank. For IN transfer, it indicates the Toggle that will be used for the next packet to be sent. This is not relative to the current bank. • 1-0 - NBUSYBK1:0 - Busy Bank Flag Set by hardware to indicate the number of busy bank. For IN endpoint, it indicates the number of busy bank(s), filled by the user, ready for IN transfer. For OUT endpoint, it indicates the number of busy bank(s) filled by OUT transaction from the host. 00b All banks are free 285 7593K–AVR–11/09 01b 1 busy bank 10b 2 busy banks 11b Reserved. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 - - - - - CTRLDIR 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CURRBK1:0 UESTA1X • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2 - CTRLDIR - Control Direction (Flag, and bit for debug purpose) Set by hardware after a SETUP packet, and gives the direction of the following packet: - 1 for IN endpoint - 0 for OUT endpoint. Can not be set or cleared by software. • 1-0 - CURRBK1:0 - Current Bank (all endpoints except Control endpoint) Flag Set by hardware to indicate the number of the current bank: 00b Bank0 01b Bank1 1xb Reserved. Can not be set or cleared by software. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FIFOCON NAKINI RWAL NAKOUTI RXSTPI RXOUTI STALLEDI TXINI Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UEINTX • 7 - FIFOCON - FIFO Control Bit For OUT and SETUP Endpoint: Set by hardware when a new OUT message is stored in the current bank, at the same time than RXOUT or RXSTP. Clear to free the current bank and to switch to the following bank. Setting by software has no effect. For IN Endpoint: Set by hardware when the current bank is free, at the same time than TXIN. Clear to send the FIFO data and to switch the bank. Setting by software has no effect. • 6 - NAKINI - NAK IN Received Interrupt Flag 286 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Set by hardware when a NAK handshake has been sent in response of a IN request from the host. This triggers an USB interrupt if NAKINE is sent. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - RWAL - Read/Write Allowed Flag Set by hardware to signal: - for an IN endpoint: the current bank is not full i.e. the firmware can push data into the FIFO, - for an OUT endpoint: the current bank is not empty, i.e. the firmware can read data from the FIFO. The bit is never set if STALLRQ is set, or in case of error. Cleared by hardware otherwise. This bit shall not be used for the control endpoint. • 4 - NAKOUTI - NAK OUT Received Interrupt Flag Set by hardware when a NAK handshake has been sent in response of a OUT/PING request from the host. This triggers an USB interrupt if NAKOUTE is sent. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 3 - RXSTPI - Received SETUP Interrupt Flag Set by hardware to signal that the current bank contains a new valid SETUP packet. An interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled). Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. This bit is inactive (cleared) if the endpoint is an IN endpoint. • 2 - RXOUTI / KILLBK - Received OUT Data Interrupt Flag Set by hardware to signal that the current bank contains a new packet. An interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled). Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. Kill Bank IN Bit Set this bit to kill the last written bank. Cleared by hardware when the bank is killed. Clearing by software has no effect. See page 276 for more details on the Abort. • 1 - STALLEDI - STALLEDI Interrupt Flag Set by hardware to signal that a STALL handshake has been sent, or that a CRC error has been detected in a OUT isochronous endpoint. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 0 - TXINI - Transmitter Ready Interrupt Flag Set by hardware to signal that the current bank is free and can be filled. An interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled). Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. 287 7593K–AVR–11/09 This bit is inactive (cleared) if the endpoint is an OUT endpoint. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLERRE NAKINE - NAKOUTE RXSTPE RXOUTE STALLEDE TXINE Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UEIENX • 7 - FLERRE - Flow Error Interrupt Enable Flag Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when OVERFI or UNDERFI are sent. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when OVERFI or UNDERFI are sent. • 6 - NAKINE - NAK IN Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKINI is set. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKINI is set. • 5 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 4 - NAKOUTE - NAK OUT Interrupt Enable Bit Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKOUTI is set. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKOUTI is set. • 3 - RXSTPE - Received SETUP Interrupt Enable Flag Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXSTPI is sent. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXSTPI is sent. • 2 - RXOUTE - Received OUT Data Interrupt Enable Flag Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXOUTI is sent. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXOUTI is sent. • 1 - STALLEDE - Stalled Interrupt Enable Flag Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when STALLEDI is sent. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when STALLEDI is sent. • 0 - TXINE - Transmitter Ready Interrupt Enable Flag Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when TXINI is sent. Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when TXINI is sent. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAT D7 DAT D6 DAT D5 DAT D4 DAT D3 DAT D2 DAT D1 DAT D0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UEDATX • 7-0 - DAT7:0 -Data Bits Set by the software to read/write a byte from/to the endpoint FIFO selected by EPNUM. 288 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Bit 7 - 6 - 5 - 4 3 - 2 - 1 0 BYCT D10 BYCT D9 BYCT D8 Read/Write R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UEBCHX R 0 • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2-0 - BYCT10:8 - Byte count (high) Bits Set by hardware. This field is the MSB of the byte count of the FIFO endpoint. The LSB part is provided by the UEBCLX register. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BYCT D7 BYCT D6 BYCT D5 BYCT D4 BYCT D3 BYCT D2 BYCT D1 BYCT D0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UEBCLX • 7-0 - BYCT7:0 - Byte Count (low) Bits Set by the hardware. BYCT10:0 is: - (for IN endpoint) increased after each writing into the endpoint and decremented after each byte sent, - (for OUT endpoint) increased after each byte sent by the host, and decremented after each byte read by the software. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 - EPINT D6 EPINT D5 EPINT D4 EPINT D3 EPINT D2 EPINT D1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPINT D0 UEINT • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-0 - EPINT6:0 - Endpoint Interrupts Bits Set by hardware when an interrupt is triggered by the UEINTX register and if the corresponding endpoint interrupt enable bit is set. Cleared by hardware when the interrupt source is served. 289 7593K–AVR–11/09 23. USB Host Operating Modes This mode is available only on AT90USB647/1287 products. 23.1 Pipe description For the USB Host controller, the term of Pipe is used instead of Endpoint for the USB Device controller. A Host Pipe corresponds to a Device Endpoint, as described in the USB specification: Figure 23-1. Pipes and Endpoints in a USB system In the USB Host controller, a Pipe will be associated to a Device Endpoint, considering the Device Configuration Descriptors. 23.2 Detach The reset value of the DETACH bit is 1. Thus, the firmware has the responsibility of clearing this bit before switching to the Host mode (HOST set). 23.3 Power-on and Reset The next diagram explains the USB host controller main states on power-on: Figure 23-2. USB host controller states after reset Device disconnection Clock stopped Macro off <any other state> Host Idle Device connection Device disconnection Host Ready SOFE=0 SOFE=1 290 Host Suspend AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 USB host controller state after an hardware reset is ‘Reset’. When the USB controller is enabled and the USB Host controller is selected, the USB controller is in ‘Idle’ state. In this state, the USB Host controller waits for the Device connection, with a minimum power consumption. The USB Pad should be in Idle mode. The macro does not need to have the PLL activated to enter in ‘Host Ready’ state. The Host controller enters in Suspend state when the USB bus is in Suspend state, i.e. when the Host controller doesn’t generate the Start of Frame. In this state, the USB consumption is minimum. The Host controller exits to the Suspend state when starting to generate the SOF over the USB line. 23.4 Device Detection A Device is detected by the USB controller when the USB bus if different from D+ and D- low. In other words, when the USB Host Controller detects the Device pull-up on the D+ line. To enable this detection, the Host Controller has to provide the Vbus power supply to the Device. The Device Disconnection is detected by the USB Host controller when the USB Idle correspond to D+ and D- low on the USB line. 23.5 Pipe Selection Prior to any operation performed by the CPU, the Pipe must first be selected. This is done by setting PNUM2:0 bits (UPNUM register) with the Pipe number which will be managed by the CPU. The CPU can then access to the various Pipe registers and data. 23.6 Pipe Configuration The following flow must be respected in order to activate a Pipe: 291 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 23-3. Pipe activation flow: Pipe Activ ation UPCONX Enablethepipe PENABLE=1 UPCFG0X PTYPE PTOKEN PEPNUM UPCFG1X PSIZE PBK CFGMEM CFGOK=1 SelectthePipetype: * Type(Control,Bulk,Interrupt) * Token(IN,OUT ,SET UP) * Endpointnumber ConfigurethePipememory: * Pipesize * Numberofbanks No Y es UPCFG2X INT FRQ (interruptonly) ERROR Configurethepollinginterval forInterruptpipe Pipeactiv ated and f reezed Once the Pipe is activated (EPEN set) and, the hardware is ready to send requests to the Device. When configured (CFGOK = 1), only the Pipe Token (PTOKEN) and the polling interval for Interrupt pipe can be modified. A Control type pipe supports only 1 bank. Any other value will lead to a configuration error (CFGOK = 0). A clear of PEN will reset the configuration of the Pipe. All the corresponding Pipe registers are reset to there reset values. Please refers to the Memory Management chapter for more details. Note: The firmware has to configure the Default Control Pipe with the following parameters: • Type: Control • Token: SETUP • Data bank: 1 • Size: 64 Bytes The firmware asks for 8 bytes of the Device Descriptor sending a GET_DESCRIPTOR request. These bytes contains the MaxPacketSize of the Device default control endpoint and the firmware re-configures the size of the Default Control Pipe with this size parameter. 292 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 23.7 USB Reset The USB controller sends a USB Reset when the firmware set the RESET bit. The RSTI bit is set by hardware when the USB Reset has been sent. This triggers an interrupt if the RSTE has been set. When a USB Reset has been sent, all the Pipe configuration and the memory allocation are reset. The General Host interrupt enable register is left unchanged. If the bus was previously in suspend mode (SOFEN = 0), the USB controller automatically switches to the resume mode (HWUPI is set) and the SOFEN bit is set by hardware in order to generate SOF immediately after the USB Reset. 23.8 Address Setup Once the Device has answer to the first Host requests with the default address (0), the Host assigns a new address to the device. The Host controller has to send a USB reset to the device and perform a SET ADDRESS control request, with the new address to be used by the Device. This control request ended, the firmware write the new address into the UHADDR register. All following requests, on every Pipes, will be performed using this new address. When the Host controller send a USB reset, the UHADDR register is reset by hardware and the following Host requests will be performed using the default address (0). 23.9 Remote Wake-Up detection The Host Controller enters in Suspend mode when clearing the SOFEN bit. No more Start Of Frame is sent on the USB bus and the USB Device enters in Suspend mode 3ms later. The Device awakes the Host Controller by sending an Upstream Resume (Remote Wake-Up feature). The Host Controller detects a non-idle state on the USB bus and set the HWUPI bit. If the non-Idle correspond to an Upstream Resume (K state), the RXRSMI bit is set by hardware. The firmware has to generate a downstream resume within 1ms and for at least 20ms by setting the RESUME bit. Once the downstream Resume has been generated, the SOFEN bit is automatically set by hardware in order to generate SOF immediately after the USB resume. Host Ready SOFE=0 SOFE=1 or HWUP=1 Host Suspend 23.10 USB Pipe Reset The firmware can reset a Pipe using the pipe reset register. The configuration of the pipe and the data toggle remains unchanged. Only the bank management and the status bits are reset to their initial values. To completely reset a Pipe, the firmware has to disable and then enable the pipe. 23.11 Pipe Data Access In order to read or to write into the Pipe Fifo, the CPU selects the Pipe number with the UPNUM register and performs read or write action on the UPDATX register. 293 7593K–AVR–11/09 23.12 Control Pipe management A Control transaction is composed of 3 phases: • SETUP • Data (IN or OUT) • Status (OUT or IN) The firmware has to change the Token for each phase. The initial data toggle is set for the corresponding token (ONLY for Control Pipe): • SETUP: Data0 • OUT: Data1 • IN: Data1 (expected data toggle) 23.13 OUT Pipe management The Pipe must be configured and not frozen first. Note: if the firmware decides to switch to suspend mode (clear SOFEN) even if a bank is ready to be sent, the USB controller will automatically exit from Suspend mode and the bank will be sent. The TXOUT bit is set by hardware when the current bank becomes free. This triggers an interrupt if the TXOUTE bit is set. The FIFOCON bit is set at the same time. The CPU writes into the FIFO and clears the FIFOCON bit to allow the USB controller to send the data. 294 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 If the OUT Pipe is composed of multiple banks, this also switches to the next data bank. The TXOUT and FIFOCON bits are automatically updated by hardware regarding the status of the next bank. Example with 1 OUT data bank DATA (bank 0) OUT ACK OUT HW TXOUT SW SW FIFOCON SW SW write data from CPU BANK 0 write data from CPU BANK 0 Example with 2 OUT data banks DATA (bank 0) OUT ACK OUT DATA (bank 1) ACK HW TXOUT SW FIFOCON SW SW SW SW write data from CPU BANK 0 write data from CPU BANK0 write data from CPU BANK 1 Example with 2 OUT data banks OUT DATA (bank 0) ACK OUT DATA (bank 1) ACK HW TXOUT SW FIFOCON SW SW SW write data from CPU BANK 0 write data from CPU BANK 1 SW write data from CPU BANK0 23.14 IN Pipe management The Pipe must be configured first. When the Host requires data from the device, the firmware has to determine first the IN mode to use using the INMODE bit: • INMODE = 0. The INRQX register is taken in account. The Host controller will perform (INRQX+1) IN requests on the selected Pipe before freezing the Pipe. This mode avoids to have extra IN requests on a Pipe. • INMODE = 1. The USB controller will perform infinite IN request until the firmware freezes the Pipe. The IN request generation will start when the firmware clear the PFREEZE bit. 295 7593K–AVR–11/09 Each time the current bank is full, the RXIN and the FIFOCON bits are set. This triggers an interrupt if the RXINE bit is set. The firmware can acknowledge the USB interrupt by clearing the RXIN bit. The Firmware read the data and clear the FIFOCON bit in order to free the current bank. If the IN Pipe is composed of multiple banks, clearing the FIFOCON bit will switch to the next bank. The RXIN and FIFOCON bits are then updated by hardware in accordance with the status of the new bank. Example with 1 IN data bank IN DATA (to bank 0) ACK DATA (to bank 0) IN HW RXIN ACK HW SW FIFOCON SW read data from CPU BANK 0 SW read data from CPU BANK 0 Example with 2 IN data banks IN DATA (to bank 0) ACK IN DATA (to bank 1) HW RXIN FIFOCON 23.14.1 ACK HW SW read data from CPU BANK 0 SW SW read data from CPU BANK 1 CRC Error (isochronous only) A CRC error can occur during IN stage if the USB controller detects a bad received packet. In this situation, the STALLEDI/CRCERRI interrupt is triggered. This does not prevent the RXINI interrupt from being triggered. 23.15 Interrupt system 296 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 23-4. USB Host Controller Interrupt System HWUPI UHINT.6 HWUPE UHIEN.6 HSOFI UHINT.5 RXRSMI UHINT.4 RSMEDI UHINT.3 RSTI UHINT.2 DDISCI UHINT.1 DCONNI UHINT.0 HSOFE UHIEN.5 RXRSME UHIEN.4 USB Host Interrupt RSMEDE UHIEN.3 RSTE UHIEN.2 DDISCE UHIEN.1 DCONNE UHIEN.0 Figure 23-5. USB Device Controller Pipe Interrupt System PIPE 6 PIPE 5 PIPE 4 PIPE 3 PIPE 2 PIPE 1 PIPE 0 OVERFI UPSTAX.6 UNDERFI UPSTAX.5 NAKEDI UPINTX.6 PERRI UPINTX.4 TXSTPI UPINTX.3 TXOUTI UPINTX.2 FLERRE UPIEN.7 NAKEDE UPIEN.6 PERRE UPIEN.4 TXSTPE UPIEN.3 Pipe Interrupt FLERRE UPIEN.7 TXOUTE UPIEN.2 RXSTALLI UPINTX.1 RXSTALLE UPIEN.1 RXINI UPINTX.0 RXINE UPIEN.0 23.16 Registers 297 7593K–AVR–11/09 23.16.1 General USB Host registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - RESUME RESET SOFEN Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHCON • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2 - RESUME - Send USB Resume Set this bit to generate a USB Resume on the USB bus. Cleared by hardware when the USB Resume has been sent. Clearing by software has no effect. This bit should be set only when the start of frame generation is enable (SOFEN bit set). • 1 - RESET - Send USB Reset Set this bit to generate a USB Reset on the USB bus. Cleared by hardware when the USB Reset has been sent. Clearing by software has no effect. Refer to the USB reset section for more details. • 0 - SOFEN - Start Of Frame Generation Enable Set this bit to generate SOF on the USB bus in full speed mode and keep-alive in low speed mode. Clear this bit to disable the SOF generation and to leave the USB bus in Idle state. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - HWUPI HSOFI RXRSMI RSMEDI RSTI DDISCI DCONNI Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHINT • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6 - HWUPI Host Wake-Up Interrupt Set by hardware when a non-idle state is detected on the USB bus.This interrupt should be enable only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode. Shall be clear by software to acknowledge the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - HSOFI - Host Start Of Frame Interrupt Set by hardware when a SOF is issued by the Host controller. This triggers a USB interrupt when HSOFE is set. When using the host controller in low speed mode, this bit is also set when a keep-alive is sent. Shall be cleared by software to acknowledge the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. 298 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • 4 - RXRSMI - Upstream Resume Received Interrupt Set by hardware when an Upstream Resume has been received from the Device. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 3 - RSMEDI - Downstream Resume Sent Interrupt Set by hardware when a Downstream Resume has been sent to the Device. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 2 - RSTI - USB Reset Sent Interrupt Set by hardware when a USB Reset has been sent to the Device. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 1 - DDISCI Device Disconnection Interrupt Set by hardware when the device has been removed from the USB bus. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 0 - DCONNI - Device Connection Interrupt Set by hardware when a new device has been connected to the USB bus. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HWUPE HSOFE RXRSME RSMEDE RSTE DDISCE DCONNE Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHIEN R/W 0 • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6 - HWUPE - Host Wake-Up Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable HWUP interrupt.For correct interrupt handle execution, this interrupt should be enable only before entering power-down mode. Clear this bit to disable HWUP interrupt. • 5 - HSOFE - Host Start Of frame Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable HSOF interrupt. Clear this bit to disable HSOF interrupt. • 4 - RXRSME -Upstream Resume Received Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable the RXRSMI interrupt. Clear this bit to disable the RXRSMI interrupt. • 3 - RSMEDE - Downstream Resume Sent Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable the RSMEDI interrupt. Clear this bit to disable the RSMEDI interrupt. 299 7593K–AVR–11/09 • 2 - RSTE - USB Reset Sent Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable the RSTI interrupt. Clear this bit to disable the RSTI interrupt. • 1 - DDISCE - Device Disconnection Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable the DDISCI interrupt. Clear this bit to disable the DDISCI interrupt. • 0 - DCONNE - Device Connection Interrupt Enable Set this bit to enable the DCONNI interrupt. Clear this bit to disable the DCONNI interrupt. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HADDR6 HADDR5 HADDR4 HADDR3 HADDR2 HADDR1 HADDR0 HADDR6 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHADDR • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-0 - HADDR6:0 - USB Host Address These bits contain the address of the USB Device. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - FNUM10 FNUM9 FNUM8 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHFNUMH • 7-4 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 3-0 - FNUM10:8 - Frame Number The value contained in this register is the current SOF number. This value can be modified by software. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FNUM7 FNUM6 FNUM5 FNUM4 FNUM3 FNUM2 FNUM1 FNUM0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHFNUML • 7-0 - FNUM7:0 - Frame Number The value contained in this register is the current SOF number. This value can be modified by software. 300 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLEN7 FLEN6 FLEN5 FLEN4 FLEN3 FLEN2 FLEN1 FLEN0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UHFLEN • 7-0 - FLEN7:0 - Frame Length The value contained the data frame length transmited. 23.16.2 USB Host Pipe registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 PNUM0 RW RW 0 0 0 PNUM1 RW Read/Write 1 PNUM2 0 0 UPNUM • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2-0 - PNUM2:0 - Pipe Number Select the pipe using this register. The USB Host registers ended by a X correspond then to this number. This number is used for the USB controller following the value of the PNUMD bit. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - P6RST P5RST P4RST P3RST P2RST P1RST P0RST RW RW RW RW RW RW RW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write Initial Value 0 UPRST • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6 - P6RST - Pipe 6 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 6. • 5 - P5RST - Pipe 5 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 5. • 4 - P4RST - Pipe 4 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 4. • 3 - P3RST - Pipe 3 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 3. • 2 - P2RST - Pipe 2 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 2. 301 7593K–AVR–11/09 • 1 - P1RST - Pipe 1 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 1. • 0 - P0RST - Pipe 0 Reset Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - PFREEZE INMODE - RSTDT - - PEN RW RW 0 0 Read/Write Initial Value 0 RW 0 0 UPCONX RW 0 0 0 • 7 - Reserved The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 6 - PFREEZE - Pipe Freeze Set this bit to Freeze the Pipe requests generation. Clear this bit to enable the Pipe request generation. This bit is set by hardware when: - the pipe is not configured - a STALL handshake has been received on this Pipe - An error occurs on the Pipe (UPINTX.PERRI = 1) - (INRQ+1) In requests have been processed This bit is set at 1 by hardware after a Pipe reset or a Pipe enable. • 5 - INMODE - IN Request mode Set this bit to allow the USB controller to perform infinite IN requests when the Pipe is not frozen. Clear this bit to perform a pre-defined number of IN requests. This number is stored in the UINRQX register. • 4 - Reserved The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit. • 3 - RSTDT - Reset Data Toggle Set this bit to reset the Data Toggle to its initial value for the current Pipe. Cleared by hardware when proceed. Clearing by software has no effect. • 2 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 1 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 0 - PEN - Pipe Enable Set to enable the Pipe. 302 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Clear to disable and reset the Pipe. Bit 7 6 PTYPE1 PTYPE0 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTOKEN1 PTOKEN0 PEPNUM3 PEPNUM2 PEPNUM1 PEPNUM0 UPCFG0X • 7-6 - PTYPE1:0 - Pipe Type Select the type of the Pipe: - 00: Control - 01: Isochronous - 10: Bulk - 11: Interrupt • 5-4 - PTOKEN1:0 - Pipe Token Select the Token to associate to the Pipe - 00: SETUP - 01: IN - 10: OUT - 11: reserved • 3-0 - PEPNUM3:0 - Pipe Endpoint Number Set this field according to the Pipe configuration. Set the number of the Endpoint targeted by the Pipe. This value is from 0 and 15. Bit 7 6 - 5 4 3 PSIZE2:0 2 1 0 ALLOC PBK1:0 - Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPCFG1X RW 0 • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-4 - PSIZE2:0 - Pipe Size Select the size of the Pipe: - 000: 8 - 100: 128 (only for endpoint 1) - 001: 16 - 101: 256 (only for endpoint 1) - 010: 32 - 110: Reserved. Do not use this configuration. - 011: 64 - 111: Reserved. Do not use this configuration. • 3-2 - PBK1:0 - Pipe Bank Select the number of bank to declare for the current Pipe. 303 7593K–AVR–11/09 - 00: 1 bank - 01: 2 banks - 10: invalid - 11: invalid • ALLOC Configure Pipe Memory Set to configure the pipe memory with the characteristics. Clear to update the memory allocation. Refer to the Memory Management chapter for more details. 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INTFRQ7 INTFRQ6 INTFRQ5 INTFRQ4 INTFRQ3 INTFRQ2 INTFRQ1 0 Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INTFRQ0 UPCFG2X • 7 - INTFRQ7:0 - Interrupt Pipe Request Frequency These bits are the maximum value in millisecond of the polling period for an Interrupt Pipe. This value has no effect for a non-Interrupt Pipe. Bit 7 6 5 4 CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - Read/Write R RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 3 2 1 DTSEQ1:0 0 NBUSYBK UPSTAX R 0 R R R 0 0 0 0 • 7 - CFGOK - Configure Pipe Memory OK Set by hardware if the required memory configuration has been successfully performed. Cleared by hardware when the pipe is disabled. The USB reset and the reset pipe have no effect on the configuration of the pipe. • 6 - OVERFI - Overflow Set by hardware when a the current Pipe has received more data than the maximum length of the current Pipe. An interrupt is triggered if the FLERRE bit is set. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - UNDERFI - Underflow Set by hardware when a transaction underflow occurs in the current isochronous or interrupt Pipe. The Pipe can’t send the data flow required by the device. A ZLP will be sent instead. An interrupt is triggered if the FLERRE bit is set. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. 304 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note: the Host controller has to send a OUT packet, but the bank is empty. A ZLP will be sent and the UNDERFI bit is set. • 4 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 3-2 - DTSEQ1:0 - Toggle Sequencing Flag Set by hardware to indicate the PID data of the current bank: 00b Data0 01b Data1 1xb Reserved. For OUT Pipe, this value indicates the next data toggle that will be sent. This is not relative to the current bank. For IN Pipe, this value indicates the last data toggle received on the current bank. • 1-0 - NBUSYBK1:0 - Busy Bank Flag Set by hardware to indicate the number of busy bank. For OUT Pipe, it indicates the number of busy bank(s), filled by the user, ready for OUT transfer. For IN Pipe, it indicates the number of busy bank(s) filled by IN transaction from the Device. 00b All banks are free 01b 1 busy bank 10b 2 busy banks 11b Reserved. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INRQ7 INRQ6 INRQ5 INRQ4 INRQ3 INRQ2 INRQ1 INRQ0 Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPINRQX • 7-0 - INRQ7:0 - IN Request Number Before Freeze Enter the number of IN transactions before the USB controller freezes the pipe. The USB controller will perform (INRQ+1) IN requests before to freeze the Pipe. This counter is automatically decreased by 1 each time a IN request has been successfully performed. This register has no effect when the INMODE bit is set (infinite IN requests generation till the pipe is not frozen). Bit 7 6 - COUNTER1:0 Read/Write Initial Value 5 4 3 2 CRC16 TIMEOUT PID 1 0 DATAPID DATATGL RW 0 RW RW RW RW RW 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPERRX RW 0 • 7-6 - Reserved 305 7593K–AVR–11/09 The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 5 - COUNTER1:0 - Error counter This counter is increased by the USB controller each time an error occurs on the Pipe. When this value reaches 3, the Pipe is automatically frozen. Clear these bits by software. • 4 - CRC16 - CRC16 Error Set by hardware when a CRC16 error has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 3 - TIMEOUT - Time-out Error Set by hardware when a time-out error has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 2 - PID - PID Error Set by hardware when a PID error has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 1 - DATAPID - Data PID Error Set by hardware when a data PID error has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. • 0 - DATATGL - Bad Data Toggle Set by hardware when a data toggle error has been detected. Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FIFOCON NAKEDI RWAL PERRI TXSTPI TXOUTI RXSTALLI RXINI Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPINTX • 7 - FIFOCON - FIFO Control For OUT and SETUP Pipe: Set by hardware when the current bank is free, at the same time than TXOUT or TXSTP. Clear to send the FIFO data and to switch the bank. Setting by software has no effect. For IN Pipe: Set by hardware when a new IN message is stored in the current bank, at the same time than RXIN. Clear to free the current bank and to switch to the following bank. Setting by software has no effect. • 6 - NAKEDI - NAK Handshake received 306 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Set by hardware when a NAK has been received on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt if the NAKEDE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be clear to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. • 5 - RWAL - Read/Write Allowed OUT Pipe: Set by hardware when the firmware can write a new data into the Pipe FIFO. Cleared by hardware when the current Pipe FIFO is full. IN Pipe: Set by hardware when the firmware can read a new data into the Pipe FIFO. Cleared by hardware when the current Pipe FIFO is empty. This bit is also cleared by hardware when the RXSTALL or the PERR bit is set • 4 - PERRI -PIPE Error Set by hardware when an error occurs on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt if the PERRE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Refers to the UPERRX register to determine the source of the error. Automatically cleared by hardware when the error source bit is cleared. • 3 - TXSTPI - SETUP Bank ready Set by hardware when the current SETUP bank is free and can be filled. This triggers an interrupt if the TXSTPE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. • 2 - TXOUTI -OUT Bank ready Set by hardware when the current OUT bank is free and can be filled. This triggers an interrupt if the TXOUTE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. • 1 - RXSTALLI / CRCERR - STALL Received / Isochronous CRC Error Set by hardware when a STALL handshake has been received on the current bank of the Pipe. The Pipe is automatically frozen. This triggers an interrupt if the RXSTALLE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. For Isochronous Pipe: Set by hardware when a CRC error occurs on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt if the TXSTPE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. • 0 - RXINI - IN Data received Set by hardware when a new USB message is stored in the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt if the RXINE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect. 307 7593K–AVR–11/09 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLERRE NAKEDE - PERRE TXSTPE TXOUTE RXSTALLE RXINE Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPIENX • 7 - FLERRE - Flow Error Interrupt enable Set to enable the OVERFI and UNDERFI interrupts. Clear to disable the OVERFI and UNDERFI interrupts. • 6 - NAKEDE -NAK Handshake Received Interrupt Enable Set to enable the NAKEDI interrupt. Clear to disable the NAKEDI interrupt. • 5 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 4 - PERRE -PIPE Error Interrupt Enable Set to enable the PERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the PERRI interrupt. • 3 - TXSTPE - SETUP Bank ready Interrupt Enable Set to enable the TXSTPI interrupt. Clear to disable the TXSTPI interrupt. • 2 - TXOUTE - OUT Bank ready Interrupt Enable Set to enable the TXOUTI interrupt. Clear to disable the TXOUTI interrupt. • 1 - RXSTALLE - STALL Received Interrupt Enable Set to enable the RXSTALLI interrupt. Clear to disable the RXSTALLI interrupt. • 0 - RXINE - IN Data received Interrupt Enable Set to enable the RXINI interrupt. Clear to disable the RXINI interrupt. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PDAT7 PDAT6 PDAT5 PDAT4 PDAT3 PDAT2 PDAT1 PDAT0 Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPDATX • 7-0 - PDAT7:0 - Pipe Data Bits Set by the software to read/write a byte from/to the Pipe FIFO selected by PNUM. 308 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - PBYCT10 PBYCT9 PBYCT8 R R R 0 0 0 Read/Write Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 UPBCHX • 7-3 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 2-0 - PBYCT10:8 - Byte count (high) Bits Set by hardware. This field is the MSB of the byte count of the FIFO endpoint. The LSB part is provided by the UPBCLX register. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PBYCT7 PBYCT6 PBYCT5 PBYCT4 PBYCT3 PBYCT2 PBYCT1 PBYCT0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPBCLX • 7-0 - PBYCT7:0 - Byte Count (low) Bits Set by the hardware. PBYCT10:0 is: - (for OUT Pipe) increased after each writing into the Pipe and decremented after each byte sent, - (for IN Pipe) increased after each byte received by the host, and decremented after each byte read by the software. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - PINT6 PINT5 PINT4 PINT3 PINT2 PINT1 PINT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UPINT Read/Write Initial Value • 7 - Reserved The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits. • 6-0 - PINT6:0 - Pipe Interrupts Bits Set by hardware when an interrupt is triggered by the UPINTX register and if the corresponding endpoint interrupt enable bit is set. Cleared by hardware when the interrupt source is served. 309 7593K–AVR–11/09 24. Analog Comparator The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator’s output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown in Figure 24-1. The Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in “Power Reduction Register 0 - PRR0” on page 54 must be disabled by writing a logical zero to be able to use the ADC input MUX. Figure 24-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram(2) BANDGAP REFERENCE ACBG ACME ADEN ADC MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT (1) Notes: 1. See Table 24-2 on page 312. 2. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3 and Table 10-6 on page 80 for Analog Comparator pin placement. 24.0.1 ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – ACME – – - ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADCSRB • Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed description of this bit, see “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 312. 24.0.2 Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 0 ACIS0 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 ACSR • Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable 310 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is changed. • Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog Comparator. See “Internal Voltage Reference” on page 62. • Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles. • Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. • Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Analog Comparator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled. • Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable When written logic one, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be triggered by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly connected to the input capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When written logic zero, no connection between the Analog Comparator and the input capture function exists. To make the comparator trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1) must be set. • Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The different settings are shown in Table 24-1. Table 24-1. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings ACIS1 ACIS0 Interrupt Mode 0 0 Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge. 1 1 Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge. When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed. 311 7593K–AVR–11/09 24.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input It is possible to select any of the ADC7..0 pins to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), and MUX2..0 in ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table 24-2. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog Comparator. Table 24-2. Analog Comparator Mulitiplexed Input ACME MUX2..0 0 x xxx AIN1 1 1 xxx AIN1 1 0 000 ADC0 1 0 001 ADC1 1 0 010 ADC2 1 0 011 ADC3 1 0 100 ADC4 1 0 101 ADC5 1 0 110 ADC6 1 24.1.1 ADEN Analog Comparator Negative Input 0 111 ADC7 Digital Input Disable Register 1 – DIDR1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – – – – – – AIN1D 0 AIN0D Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DIDR1 • Bit 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer. 312 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 25. Analog to Digital Converter - ADC 25.1 Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-bit Resolution 0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity ± 2 LSB Absolute Accuracy 65 - 260 µs Conversion Time Up to 15 kSPS at Maximum Resolution Eight Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels Seven Differential input channels Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout 0 - VCC ADC Input Voltage Range Selectable 2.56 V ADC Reference Voltage Free Running or Single Conversion Mode ADC Start Conversion by Auto Triggering on Interrupt Sources Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete Sleep Mode Noise Canceler The AT90USB64/128 features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected to an 8-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight single-ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of Port A. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND). The device also supports 16 differential voltage input combinations. Two of the differential inputs (ADC1, ADC0 and ADC3, ADC2) are equipped with a programmable gain stage, providing amplification steps of 0 dB (1x), 20 dB (10x), or 46 dB (200x) on the differential input voltage before the A/D conversion. Seven differential analog input channels share a common negative terminal (ADC1), while any other ADC input can be selected as the positive input terminal. If 1x or 10x gain is used, 8-bit resolution can be expected. If 200x gain is used, 7-bit resolution can be expected. The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 25-1. The ADC has a separate analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. AVCC must not differ more than ± 0.3V from VCC. See the paragraph “ADC Noise Canceler” on page 320 on how to connect this pin. Internal reference voltages of nominally 2.56V or AVCC are provided On-chip. The voltage reference may be externally decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor for better noise performance. 313 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 25-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic ADC CONVERSION COMPLETE IRQ INTERRUPT FLAGS ADTS[2:0] TRIGGER SELECT ADC[9:0] ADPS1 0 ADC DATA REGISTER (ADCH/ADCL) ADPS0 ADPS2 ADIF ADATE ADEN ADSC MUX1 15 ADC CTRL. & STATUS REGISTER (ADCSRA) MUX0 MUX3 MUX2 MUX4 REFS0 ADLAR REFS1 ADC MULTIPLEXER SELECT (ADMUX) ADIE ADIF 8-BIT DATA BUS AVCC PRESCALER START GAIN SELECTION CHANNEL SELECTION MUX DECODER CONVERSION LOGIC INTERNAL REFERENCE SAMPLE & HOLD COMPARATOR AREF 10-BIT DAC + ADHSM GND BANDGAP REFERENCE ADC7 SINGLE ENDED / DIFFERENTIAL SELECTION ADC6 ADC5 ADC MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT POS. INPUT MUX ADC4 ADC3 + DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 NEG. INPUT MUX 25.2 Operation The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approximation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on 314 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 the AREF pin minus 1 LSB. Optionally, AVCC or an internal 2.56V reference voltage may be connected to the AREF pin by writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX Register. The internal voltage reference may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve noise immunity. The analog input channel and differential gain are selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input pins, as well as GND and a fixed bandgap voltage reference, can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. A selection of ADC input pins can be selected as positive and negative inputs to the differential amplifier. The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power saving sleep modes. The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX. If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the Data Registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to Data Registers is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read, ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled. The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. The ADC access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will trigger even if the result is lost. 25.3 Starting a Conversion A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC. This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change. Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (See description of the ADTS bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting conversions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal is still set when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during conversion, the edge will be ignored. Note that an interrupt flag will be set even if the specific interrupt is disabled or the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the interrupt flag must be cleared in order to trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event. 315 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 25-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic ADTS[2:0] PRESCALER START CLKADC ADATE ADIF SOURCE 1 . . . . CONVERSION LOGIC EDGE DETECTOR SOURCE n ADSC Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, constantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first conversion must be started by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform successive conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not. If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started. 25.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing Figure 25-3. ADC Prescaler ADEN START Reset 7-BIT ADC PRESCALER CK/64 CK/128 CK/32 CK/8 CK/16 CK/4 CK/2 CK ADPS0 ADPS1 ADPS2 ADC CLOCK SOURCE By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50 kHz and 200 kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200 kHz to get a higher sample rate. Alternatively, setting the ADHSM bit in ADCSRB allows an increased ADC clock frequency at the expense of higher power consumption. The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA. The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit 316 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously reset when ADEN is low. When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle. See “Differential Channels” on page 318 for details on differential conversion timing. A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry. The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conversion and 13.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge. When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the trigger source signal. Three additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic. In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion completes, while ADSC remains high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 25-1. Figure 25-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode) Next Conversion First Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 ADC Clock ADEN ADSC ADIF Sign and MSB of Result ADCH LSB of Result ADCL MUX and REFS Update MUX and REFS Update Conversion Complete Sample & Hold Figure 25-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion One Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Next Conversion 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 ADC Clock ADSC ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Sample & Hold MUX and REFS Update Conversion Complete MUX and REFS Update 317 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 25-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion One Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Next Conversion 10 9 11 12 13 1 2 ADC Clock Trigger Source ADATE ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Prescaler Reset Sample & Hold Prescaler Reset Conversion Complete MUX and REFS Update Figure 25-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion One Conversion Cycle Number 11 12 Next Conversion 13 1 2 3 4 ADC Clock ADSC ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Conversion Complete Table 25-1. ADC Conversion Time Condition Sample & Hold (Cycles from Start of Convertion) Conversion Time (Cycles) 25.4.1 Sample & Hold MUX and REFS Update First Conversion Normal Conversion, Single Ended Auto Triggered Convertion 14.5 1.5 2 25 13 13.5 Differential Channels When using differential channels, certain aspects of the conversion need to be taken into consideration. Differential conversions are synchronized to the internal clock CKADC2 equal to half the ADC clock frequency. This synchronization is done automatically by the ADC interface in such a way that the sample-and-hold occurs at a specific phase of CKADC2. A conversion initiated by the user (i.e., all single conversions, and the first free running conversion) when CKADC2 is low will take the same amount of time as a single ended conversion (13 ADC clock cycles from the next prescaled clock cycle). A conversion initiated by the user when CKADC2 is high will take 14 ADC 318 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 clock cycles due to the synchronization mechanism. In Free Running mode, a new conversion is initiated immediately after the previous conversion completes, and since CKADC2 is high at this time, all automatically started (i.e., all but the first) Free Running conversions will take 14 ADC clock cycles. If differential channels are used and conversions are started by Auto Triggering, the ADC must be switched off between conversions. When Auto Triggering is used, the ADC prescaler is reset before the conversion is started. Since the stage is dependent of a stable ADC clock prior to the conversion, this conversion will not be valid. By disabling and then re-enabling the ADC between each conversion (writing ADEN in ADCSRA to “0” then to “1”), only extended conversions are performed. The result from the extended conversions will be valid. See “Prescaling and Conversion Timing” on page 316 for timing details. The gain stage is optimized for a bandwidth of 4 kHz at all gain settings. Higher frequencies may be subjected to non-linear amplification. An external low-pass filter should be used if the input signal contains higher frequency components than the gain stage bandwidth. Note that the ADC clock frequency is independent of the gain stage bandwidth limitation. E.g. the ADC clock period may be 6 µs, allowing a channel to be sampled at 12 kSPS, regardless of the bandwidth of this channel. 25.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Continuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection values to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written. If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion will be affected by the new settings. If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways: a. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared. b. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event. c. After a conversion, before the interrupt flag used as trigger source is cleared. When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC conversion. Special care should be taken when changing differential channels. Once a differential channel has been selected, the stage may take as much as 125 µs to stabilize to the new value. Thus conversions should not be started within the first 125 µs after selecting a new differential channel. Alternatively, conversion results obtained within this period should be discarded. The same settling time should be observed for the first differential conversion after changing ADC reference (by changing the REFS1:0 bits in ADMUX). 319 7593K–AVR–11/09 The settling time and gain stage bandwidth is independent of the ADHSM bit setting. 25.5.1 ADC Input Channels When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure that the correct channel is selected: • In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete before changing the channel selection. • In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the channel selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection. When switching to a differential gain channel, the first conversion result may have a poor accuracy due to the required settling time for the automatic offset cancellation circuitry. The user should preferably disregard the first conversion result. 25.5.2 ADC Voltage Reference The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single ended channels that exceed VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as either AVCC, internal 2.56V reference, or external AREF pin. AVCC is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 2.56V reference is generated from the internal bandgap reference (VBG) through an internal amplifier. In either case, the external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC, and the reference voltage can be made more immune to noise by connecting a capacitor between the AREF pin and ground. VREF can also be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedant voltmeter. Note that VREF is a high impedant source, and only a capacitive load should be connected in a system. If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use the other reference voltage options in the application, as they will be shorted to the external voltage. If no external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user may switch between AVCC and 2.56V as reference selection. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference voltage source may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result. If differential channels are used, the selected reference should not be closer to AVCC than indicated in Table 30-5 on page 405. 25.6 ADC Noise Canceler The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure should be used: 320 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 a. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode must be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled. b. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the CPU has been halted. c. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete, that interrupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will be generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command is executed. Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before entering such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption. If the ADC is enabled in such sleep modes and the user wants to perform differential conversions, the user is advised to switch the ADC off and on after waking up from sleep to prompt an extended conversion to get a valid result. 25.6.1 Analog Input Circuitry The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 25-8. An analog source applied to ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless of whether that channel is selected as input for the ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined resistance in the input path). The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 kΩ or less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher impedance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge the S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H capacitor. If differential gain channels are used, the input circuitry looks somewhat different, although source impedances of a few hundred kΩ or less is recommended. Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present for either kind of channels, to avoid distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as inputs to the ADC. Figure 25-8. Analog Input Circuitry IIH ADCn 1..100 kΩ CS/H= 14 pF IIL VCC/2 321 7593K–AVR–11/09 25.6.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by applying the following techniques: a. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks. b. The AVCC pin on the device should be connected to the digital VCC supply voltage via an LC network as shown in Figure 25-9. c. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU. d. If any ADC port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not switch while a conversion is in progress. Figure 25-9. ADC Power Connections (AD0) PA0 VCC 51 52 GND 53 (ADC7) PF7 54 (ADC6) PF6 55 (ADC5) PF5 56 (ADC4) PF4 57 (ADC3) PF3 58 (ADC2) PF2 59 (ADC1) PF1 60 (ADC0) PF0 61 AREF 62 GND AVCC 100nF Analog Ground Plane 63 64 1 NC 10μH 25.6.3 Offset Compensation Schemes The gain stage has a built-in offset cancellation circuitry that nulls the offset of differential measurements as much as possible. The remaining offset in the analog path can be measured directly by selecting the same channel for both differential inputs. This offset residue can be then subtracted in software from the measurement results. Using this kind of software based offset correction, offset on any channel can be reduced below one LSB. 25.6.4 ADC Accuracy Definitions An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and V REF in 2 n s teps (LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1. Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior: 322 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB. Figure 25-10. Offset Error Output Code Ideal ADC Actual ADC Offset Error VREF Input Voltage • Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB Figure 25-11. Gain Error Output Code Gain Error Ideal ADC Actual ADC VREF Input Voltage • Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0 LSB. 323 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 25-12. Integral Non-linearity (INL) Output Code INL Ideal ADC Actual ADC VREF Input Voltage • Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB. Figure 25-13. Differential Non-linearity (DNL) Output Code 0x3FF 1 LSB DNL 0x000 0 VREF Input Voltage • Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes, a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ± 0.5 LSB. • Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ± 0.5 LSB. 25.7 ADC Conversion Result After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH). For single ended conversion, the result is: 324 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 V IN ⋅ 1023 ADC = -------------------------V REF where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see Table 25-3 on page 327 and Table 25-4 on page 327). 0x000 represents analog ground, and 0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB. If differential channels are used, the result is: ( V POS – V NEG ) ⋅ GAIN ⋅ 512 ADC = ----------------------------------------------------------------------V REF where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative input pin, GAIN the selected gain factor and VREF the selected voltage reference. The result is presented in two’s complement form, from 0x200 (-512d) through 0x1FF (+511d). Note that if the user wants to perform a quick polarity check of the result, it is sufficient to read the MSB of the result (ADC9 in ADCH). If the bit is one, the result is negative, and if this bit is zero, the result is positive. Figure 25-14 shows the decoding of the differential input range. Table 82 shows the resulting output codes if the differential input channel pair (ADCn - ADCm) is selected with a reference voltage of VREF. Figure 25-14. Differential Measurement Range Output Code 0x1FF 0x000 - VREF 0x3FF 0 VREF Differential Input Voltage (Volts) 0x200 325 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 25-2. Correlation Between Input Voltage and Output Codes VADCn Read code Corresponding decimal value VADCm + VREF /GAIN 0x1FF 511 VADCm + 0.999 VREF /GAIN 0x1FF 511 VADCm + 0.998 VREF /GAIN 0x1FE 510 ... ... ... VADCm + 0.001 VREF /GAIN 0x001 1 VADCm 0x000 0 VADCm - 0.001 VREF /GAIN 0x3FF -1 ... ... ... VADCm - 0.999 VREF /GAIN 0x201 -511 VADCm - VREF /GAIN 0x200 -512 Example 1: – ADMUX = 0xED (ADC3 - ADC2, 10x gain, 2.56V reference, left adjusted result) – Voltage on ADC3 is 300 mV, voltage on ADC2 is 500 mV. – ADCR = 512 * 10 * (300 - 500) / 2560 = -400 = 0x270 – ADCL will thus read 0x00, and ADCH will read 0x9C. Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the result: ADCL = 0x70, ADCH = 0x02. Example 2: – ADMUX = 0xFB (ADC3 - ADC2, 1x gain, 2.56V reference, left adjusted result) – Voltage on ADC3 is 300 mV, voltage on ADC2 is 500 mV. – ADCR = 512 * 1 * (300 - 500) / 2560 = -41 = 0x029. – ADCL will thus read 0x40, and ADCH will read 0x0A. Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the result: ADCL = 0x00, ADCH = 0x29. 25.8 25.8.1 ADC Register Description ADC Multiplexer Selection Register – ADMUX Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADMUX • Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection Bits These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 25-3. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete 326 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). The internal voltage reference options may not be used if an external reference voltage is being applied to the AREF pin. Table 25-3. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC REFS1 REFS0 Voltage Reference Selection 0 0 AREF, Internal Vref turned off 0 1 AVCC with external capacitor on AREF pin 1 0 Reserved 1 1 Internal 2.56V Voltage Reference with external capacitor on AREF pin • Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register. Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see “The ADC Data Register – ADCL and ADCH” on page 329. • Bits 4:0 – MUX4:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC. These bits also select the gain for the differential channels. See Table 25-4 for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Table 25-4. Input Channel and Gain Selections MUX4..0 Single Ended Input 00000 ADC0 00001 ADC1 00010 ADC2 00011 ADC3 00100 ADC4 00101 ADC5 00110 ADC6 00111 Positive Differential Input Negative Differential Input ADC7 Gain N/A 327 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 25-4. MUX4..0 Input Channel and Gain Selections (Continued) Single Ended Input Positive Differential Input Negative Differential Input Gain ADC0 10x ADC0 200x 01000 (ADC0 / ADC0 / 10x) 01001 ADC1 01010 (ADC0 / ADC0 / 200x) 01011 ADC1 01100 (Reserved - ADC2 / ADC2 / 10x) 01101 ADC3 01110 (ADC2 / ADC2 / 200x) 01111 ADC2 10x ADC3 ADC2 200x 10000 ADC0 ADC1 1x 10001 (ADC1 / ADC1 / 1x) ADC2 ADC1 1x 10011 ADC3 ADC1 1x 10100 ADC4 ADC1 1x 10101 ADC5 ADC1 1x 10110 ADC6 ADC1 1x 10111 ADC7 ADC1 1x 11000 ADC0 ADC2 1x 11001 ADC1 ADC2 1x 11010 (ADC2 / ADC2 / 1x) 11011 ADC3 ADC2 1x 11100 ADC4 ADC2 1x 11101 ADC5 ADC2 1x 10010 N/A 11110 11111 25.8.2 1.1V (VBand Gap) 0V (GND) N/A ADC Control and Status Register A – ADCSRA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADCSRA • Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion. • Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode, write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled, 328 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initialization of the ADC. ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete, it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect. • Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a conversion on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB. • Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the Data Registers are updated. The ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-ModifyWrite on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions are used. • Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is activated. • Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits These bits determine the division factor between the XTAL frequency and the input clock to the ADC. Table 25-5. ADC Prescaler Selections ADPS2 Division Factor 0 0 2 0 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 8 1 0 0 16 1 0 1 32 1 1 0 64 1 25.8.3.1 ADPS0 0 25.8.3 ADPS1 1 1 128 The ADC Data Register – ADCL and ADCH ADLAR = 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 – – – – – – ADC9 ADC8 ADCH ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value 329 7593K–AVR–11/09 25.8.3.2 ADLAR = 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH ADC1 ADC0 – – – – – – ADCL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers. If differential channels are used, the result is presented in two’s complement form. When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision (7 bit + sign bit for differential input channels) is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH. The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result is right adjusted. • ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in “ADC Conversion Result” on page 324. 25.8.4 ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADHSM ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADCSRB • Bit 7 – ADHSM: ADC High Speed Mode Writing this bit to one enables the ADC High Speed mode. This mode enables higher conversion rate at the expense of higher power consumption. • Bit 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected interrupt flag. Note that switching from a trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set. Table 25-6. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections ADTS2 ADTS0 0 0 0 Free Running mode 0 0 1 Analog Comparator 0 1 0 External Interrupt Request 0 0 330 ADTS1 Trigger Source 1 1 Timer/Counter0 Compare Match AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 25-6. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections ADTS2 ADTS0 1 0 0 Timer/Counter0 Overflow 1 0 1 Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B 1 1 0 Timer/Counter1 Overflow 1 25.8.5 ADTS1 Trigger Source 1 1 Timer/Counter1 Capture Event Digital Input Disable Register 0 – DIDR0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DIDR0 • Bit 7:0 – ADC7D..ADC0D: ADC7:0 Digital Input Disable When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the ADC7..0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer. 331 7593K–AVR–11/09 26. JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System 26.0.1 Features • JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 Compliant) Interface • Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the IEEE std. 1149.1 (JTAG) Standard • Debugger Access to: – All Internal Peripheral Units – Internal and External RAM – The Internal Register File – Program Counter – EEPROM and Flash Memories • Extensive On-chip Debug Support for Break Conditions, Including – AVR Break Instruction – Break on Change of Program Memory Flow – Single Step Break – Program Memory Break Points on Single Address or Address Range – Data Memory Break Points on Single Address or Address Range • Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface • On-chip Debugging Supported by AVR Studio® 26.1 Overview The AVR IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface can be used for • Testing PCBs by using the JTAG Boundary-scan capability • Programming the non-volatile memories, Fuses and Lock bits • On-chip debugging A brief description is given in the following sections. Detailed descriptions for Programming via the JTAG interface, and using the Boundary-scan Chain can be found in the sections “Programming via the JTAG Interface” on page 385 and “IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan” on page 338, respectively. The On-chip Debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within ATMEL and to selected third party vendors only. Figure 26-1 shows a block diagram of the JTAG interface and the On-chip Debug system. The TAP Controller is a state machine controlled by the TCK and TMS signals. The TAP Controller selects either the JTAG Instruction Register or one of several Data Registers as the scan chain (Shift Register) between the TDI – input and TDO – output. The Instruction Register holds JTAG instructions controlling the behavior of a Data Register. The ID-Register, Bypass Register, and the Boundary-scan Chain are the Data Registers used for board-level testing. The JTAG Programming Interface (actually consisting of several physical and virtual Data Registers) is used for serial programming via the JTAG interface. The Internal Scan Chain and Break Point Scan Chain are used for On-chip debugging only. 26.2 Test Access Port – TAP The JTAG interface is accessed through four of the AVR’s pins. In JTAG terminology, these pins constitute the Test Access Port – TAP. These pins are: • TMS: Test mode select. This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller state machine. • TCK: Test Clock. JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK. 332 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • TDI: Test Data In. Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data Register (Scan Chains). • TDO: Test Data Out. Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register. The IEEE std. 1149.1 also specifies an optional TAP signal; TRST – Test ReSeT – which is not provided. When the JTAGEN Fuse is unprogrammed, these four TAP pins are normal port pins, and the TAP controller is in reset. When programmed, the input TAP signals are internally pulled high and the JTAG is enabled for Boundary-scan and programming. The device is shipped with this fuse programmed. For the On-chip Debug system, in addition to the JTAG interface pins, the RESET pin is monitored by the debugger to be able to detect external reset sources. The debugger can also pull the RESET pin low to reset the whole system, assuming only open collectors on the reset line are used in the application. Figure 26-1. Block Diagram I/O PORT 0 DEVICE BOUNDARY BOUNDARY SCAN CHAIN TDI TDO TCK TMS JTAG PROGRAMMING INTERFACE TAP CONTROLLER AVR CPU INSTRUCTION REGISTER ID REGISTER M U X FLASH MEMORY Address Data BREAKPOINT UNIT BYPASS REGISTER INTERNAL SCAN CHAIN PC Instruction FLOW CONTROL UNIT DIGITAL PERIPHERAL UNITS ANALOG PERIPHERIAL UNITS Analog inputs BREAKPOINT SCAN CHAIN ADDRESS DECODER JTAG / AVR CORE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE OCD STATUS AND CONTROL Control & Clock lines I/O PORT n 333 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 26-2. TAP Controller State Diagram 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 0 1 0 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 0 Shift-DR 1 1 Exit1-DR 0 0 Pause-DR 0 Pause-IR 1 1 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR 26.3 1 Exit1-IR 0 1 0 Shift-IR 1 0 1 Update-IR 0 1 0 TAP Controller The TAP controller is a 16-state finite state machine that controls the operation of the Boundaryscan circuitry, JTAG programming circuitry, or On-chip Debug system. The state transitions depicted in Figure 26-2 depend on the signal present on TMS (shown adjacent to each state transition) at the time of the rising edge at TCK. The initial state after a Power-on Reset is TestLogic-Reset. As a definition in this document, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers. Assuming Run-Test/Idle is the present state, a typical scenario for using the JTAG interface is: • At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift Instruction Register – Shift-IR state. While in this state, shift the four bits of the JTAG instructions into the JTAG Instruction Register from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK. The TMS input must be held low during input of the 3 LSBs in order to remain in the Shift-IR state. The MSB of the instruction is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high. While the instruction is shifted in from the TDI pin, the captured IR-state 0x01 is shifted out on the TDO pin. The JTAG Instruction selects a particular Data Register as path between TDI and TDO and controls the circuitry surrounding the selected Data Register. 334 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 • Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. The instruction is latched onto the parallel output from the Shift Register path in the Update-IR state. The Exit-IR, Pause-IR, and Exit2-IR states are only used for navigating the state machine. • At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift Data Register – Shift-DR state. While in this state, upload the selected Data Register (selected by the present JTAG instruction in the JTAG Instruction Register) from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK. In order to remain in the Shift-DR state, the TMS input must be held low during input of all bits except the MSB. The MSB of the data is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high. While the Data Register is shifted in from the TDI pin, the parallel inputs to the Data Register captured in the Capture-DR state is shifted out on the TDO pin. • Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. If the selected Data Register has a latched parallel-output, the latching takes place in the Update-DR state. The Exit-DR, Pause-DR, and Exit2-DR states are only used for navigating the state machine. As shown in the state diagram, the Run-Test/Idle state need not be entered between selecting JTAG instruction and using Data Registers, and some JTAG instructions may select certain functions to be performed in the Run-Test/Idle, making it unsuitable as an Idle state. Note: Independent of the initial state of the TAP Controller, the Test-Logic-Reset state can always be entered by holding TMS high for five TCK clock periods. For detailed information on the JTAG specification, refer to the literature listed in “Bibliography” on page 337. 26.4 Using the Boundary-scan Chain A complete description of the Boundary-scan capabilities are given in the section “IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan” on page 338. 26.5 Using the On-chip Debug System As shown in Figure 26-1, the hardware support for On-chip Debugging consists mainly of • A scan chain on the interface between the internal AVR CPU and the internal peripheral units. • Break Point unit. • Communication interface between the CPU and JTAG system. All read or modify/write operations needed for implementing the Debugger are done by applying AVR instructions via the internal AVR CPU Scan Chain. The CPU sends the result to an I/O memory mapped location which is part of the communication interface between the CPU and the JTAG system. The Break Point Unit implements Break on Change of Program Flow, Single Step Break, two Program Memory Break Points, and two combined Break Points. Together, the four Break Points can be configured as either: • 4 single Program Memory Break Points. • 3 Single Program Memory Break Point + 1 single Data Memory Break Point. • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 2 single Data Memory Break Points. • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 1 Program Memory Break Point with mask (“range Break Point”). 335 7593K–AVR–11/09 • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 1 Data Memory Break Point with mask (“range Break Point”). A debugger, like the AVR Studio, may however use one or more of these resources for its internal purpose, leaving less flexibility to the end-user. A list of the On-chip Debug specific JTAG instructions is given in “On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions” on page 336. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. In addition, the OCDEN Fuse must be programmed and no Lock bits must be set for the On-chip debug system to work. As a security feature, the On-chip debug system is disabled when either of the LB1 or LB2 Lock bits are set. Otherwise, the On-chip debug system would have provided a back-door into a secured device. The AVR Studio enables the user to fully control execution of programs on an AVR device with On-chip Debug capability, AVR In-Circuit Emulator, or the built-in AVR Instruction Set Simulator. AVR Studio® supports source level execution of Assembly programs assembled with Atmel Corporation’s AVR Assembler and C programs compiled with third party vendors’ compilers. AVR Studio runs under Microsoft® Windows® 95/98/2000 and Microsoft Windows NT®. For a full description of the AVR Studio, please refer to the AVR Studio User Guide. Only highlights are presented in this document. All necessary execution commands are available in AVR Studio, both on source level and on disassembly level. The user can execute the program, single step through the code either by tracing into or stepping over functions, step out of functions, place the cursor on a statement and execute until the statement is reached, stop the execution, and reset the execution target. In addition, the user can have an unlimited number of code Break Points (using the BREAK instruction) and up to two data memory Break Points, alternatively combined as a mask (range) Break Point. 26.6 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions The On-chip debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within ATMEL and to selected third party vendors only. Instruction opcodes are listed for reference. 26.6.1 PRIVATE0; 0x8 Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 26.6.2 PRIVATE1; 0x9 Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 26.6.3 PRIVATE2; 0xA Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 26.6.4 PRIVATE3; 0xB Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 336 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 26.7 26.7.1 On-chip Debug Related Register in I/O Memory On-chip Debug Register – OCDR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB/IDRD LSB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OCDR R/W 0 The OCDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in the microcontroller to the debugger. The CPU can transfer a byte to the debugger by writing to this location. At the same time, an internal flag; I/O Debug Register Dirty – IDRD – is set to indicate to the debugger that the register has been written. When the CPU reads the OCDR Register the 7 LSB will be from the OCDR Register, while the MSB is the IDRD bit. The debugger clears the IDRD bit when it has read the information. In some AVR devices, this register is shared with a standard I/O location. In this case, the OCDR Register can only be accessed if the OCDEN Fuse is programmed, and the debugger enables access to the OCDR Register. In all other cases, the standard I/O location is accessed. Refer to the debugger documentation for further information on how to use this register. 26.8 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities Programming of AVR parts via JTAG is performed via the 4-pin JTAG port, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. These are the only pins that need to be controlled/observed to perform JTAG programming (in addition to power pins). It is not required to apply 12V externally. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the MCUCR Register must be cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. The JTAG programming capability supports: • Flash programming and verifying. • EEPROM programming and verifying. • Fuse programming and verifying. • Lock bit programming and verifying. The Lock bit security is exactly as in parallel programming mode. If the Lock bits LB1 or LB2 are programmed, the OCDEN Fuse cannot be programmed unless first doing a chip erase. This is a security feature that ensures no back-door exists for reading out the content of a secured device. The details on programming through the JTAG interface and programming specific JTAG instructions are given in the section “Programming via the JTAG Interface” on page 385. 26.9 Bibliography For more information about general Boundary-scan, the following literature can be consulted: • IEEE: IEEE Std. 1149.1-1990. IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-scan Architecture, IEEE, 1993. • Colin Maunder: The Board Designers Guide to Testable Logic Circuits, Addison-Wesley, 1992. 337 7593K–AVR–11/09 27. IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan 27.1 Features • • • • • 27.2 JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard Full Scan of all Port Functions as well as Analog Circuitry having Off-chip Connections Supports the Optional IDCODE Instruction Additional Public AVR_RESET Instruction to Reset the AVR System Overview The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connections. At system level, all ICs having JTAG capabilities are connected serially by the TDI/TDO signals to form a long Shift Register. An external controller sets up the devices to drive values at their output pins, and observe the input values received from other devices. The controller compares the received data with the expected result. In this way, Boundary-scan provides a mechanism for testing interconnections and integrity of components on Printed Circuits Boards by using the four TAP signals only. The four IEEE 1149.1 defined mandatory JTAG instructions IDCODE, BYPASS, SAMPLE/PRELOAD, and EXTEST, as well as the AVR specific public JTAG instruction AVR_RESET can be used for testing the Printed Circuit Board. Initial scanning of the Data Register path will show the ID-Code of the device, since IDCODE is the default JTAG instruction. It may be desirable to have the AVR device in reset during test mode. If not reset, inputs to the device may be determined by the scan operations, and the internal software may be in an undetermined state when exiting the test mode. Entering reset, the outputs of any port pin will instantly enter the high impedance state, making the HIGHZ instruction redundant. If needed, the BYPASS instruction can be issued to make the shortest possible scan chain through the device. The device can be set in the reset state either by pulling the external RESET pin low, or issuing the AVR_RESET instruction with appropriate setting of the Reset Data Register. The EXTEST instruction is used for sampling external pins and loading output pins with data. The data from the output latch will be driven out on the pins as soon as the EXTEST instruction is loaded into the JTAG IR-Register. Therefore, the SAMPLE/PRELOAD should also be used for setting initial values to the scan ring, to avoid damaging the board when issuing the EXTEST instruction for the first time. SAMPLE/PRELOAD can also be used for taking a snapshot of the external pins during normal operation of the part. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the I/O Register MCUCR must be cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. When using the JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, using a JTAG TCK clock frequency higher than the internal chip frequency is possible. The chip clock is not required to run. 27.3 Data Registers The Data Registers relevant for Boundary-scan operations are: • Bypass Register • Device Identification Register • Reset Register • Boundary-scan Chain 338 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 27.3.1 Bypass Register The Bypass Register consists of a single Shift Register stage. When the Bypass Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO, the register is reset to 0 when leaving the Capture-DR controller state. The Bypass Register can be used to shorten the scan chain on a system when the other devices are to be tested. 27.3.2 Device Identification Register Figure 27-1 shows the structure of the Device Identification Register. Figure 27-1. The Format of the Device Identification Register LSB MSB Bit Version Part Number Manufacturer ID 1 4 bits 27.3.2.1 31 Device ID 16 bits 11 bits 1-bit 28 27 12 11 1 0 Version Version is a 4-bit number identifying the revision of the component. The JTAG version number follows the revision of the device. Revision A is 0x0, revision B is 0x1 and so on. 27.3.2.2 Part Number The part number is a 16-bit code identifying the component. The JTAG Part Number for AT90USB64/128 is listed in Table 27-1. Table 27-1. AVR JTAG Part Number Part Number JTAG Part Number (Hex) AVR USB 27.3.2.3 Manufacturer ID The Manufacturer ID is a 11-bit code identifying the manufacturer. The JTAG manufacturer ID for ATMEL is listed in Table 27-2. Table 27-2. Manufacturer ATMEL 27.3.3 0x9782 Manufacturer ID JTAG Manufactor ID (Hex) 0x01F Reset Register The Reset Register is a test Data Register used to reset the part. Since the AVR tri-states Port Pins when reset, the Reset Register can also replace the function of the unimplemented optional JTAG instruction HIGHZ. A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external Reset low. The part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the fuse settings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a reset time-out period (refer to “Clock Sources” on page 40) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 27-2. 339 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 27-2. Reset Register To TDO From Other Internal and External Reset Sources From TDI D Q Internal reset ClockDR · AVR_RESET 27.3.4 Boundary-scan Chain The Boundary-scan Chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connections. See “Boundary-scan Chain” on page 342 for a complete description. 27.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. Listed below are the JTAG instructions useful for Boundary-scan operation. Note that the optional HIGHZ instruction is not implemented, but all outputs with tri-state capability can be set in high-impedant state by using the AVR_RESET instruction, since the initial state for all port pins is tri-state. As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers. The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction. 27.4.1 EXTEST; 0x0 Mandatory JTAG instruction for selecting the Boundary-scan Chain as Data Register for testing circuitry external to the AVR package. For port-pins, Pull-up Disable, Output Control, Output Data, and Input Data are all accessible in the scan chain. For Analog circuits having off-chip connections, the interface between the analog and the digital logic is in the scan chain. The contents of the latched outputs of the Boundary-scan chain is driven out as soon as the JTAG IRRegister is loaded with the EXTEST instruction. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The Internal Scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: Data from the scan chain is applied to output pins. 27.4.2 IDCODE; 0x1 Optional JTAG instruction selecting the 32 bit ID-Register as Data Register. The ID-Register consists of a version number, a device number and the manufacturer code chosen by JEDEC. This is the default instruction after power-up. 340 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data in the IDCODE Register is sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The IDCODE scan chain is shifted by the TCK input. 27.4.3 SAMPLE_PRELOAD; 0x2 Mandatory JTAG instruction for pre-loading the output latches and taking a snap-shot of the input/output pins without affecting the system operation. However, the output latches are not connected to the pins. The Boundary-scan Chain is selected as Data Register. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The Boundary-scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: Data from the Boundary-scan chain is applied to the output latches. However, the output latches are not connected to the pins. 27.4.4 AVR_RESET; 0xC The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for forcing the AVR device into the Reset mode or releasing the JTAG reset source. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched. The active states are: • Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input. 27.4.5 BYPASS; 0xF Mandatory JTAG instruction selecting the Bypass Register for Data Register. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Loads a logic “0” into the Bypass Register. • Shift-DR: The Bypass Register cell between TDI and TDO is shifted. 27.5 27.5.1 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O Memory MCU Control Register – MCUCR The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JTD – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE Read/Write R/W R R R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MCUCR • Bits 7 – JTD: JTAG Interface Disable When this bit is zero, the JTAG interface is enabled if the JTAGEN Fuse is programmed. If this bit is one, the JTAG interface is disabled. In order to avoid unintentional disabling or enabling of the JTAG interface, a timed sequence must be followed when changing this bit: The application software must write this bit to the desired value twice within four cycles to change its value. Note that this bit must not be altered when using the On-chip Debug system. 341 7593K–AVR–11/09 27.5.2 MCU Status Register – MCUSR The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 See Bit Description MCUSR • Bit 4 – JTRF: JTAG Reset Flag This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. 27.6 Boundary-scan Chain The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connection. 27.6.1 Scanning the Digital Port Pins Figure 27-3 shows the Boundary-scan Cell for a bi-directional port pin. The pull-up function is disabled during Boundary-scan when the JTAG IC contains EXTEST or SAMPLE_PRELOAD. The cell consists of a bi-directional pin cell that combines the three signals Output Control OCxn, Output Data - ODxn, and Input Data - IDxn, into only a two-stage Shift Register. The port and pin indexes are not used in the following description The Boundary-scan logic is not included in the figures in the datasheet. Figure 27-4 shows a simple digital port pin as described in the section “I/O-Ports” on page 72. The Boundary-scan details from Figure 27-3 replaces the dashed box in Figure 27-4. When no alternate port function is present, the Input Data - ID - corresponds to the PINxn Register value (but ID has no synchronizer), Output Data corresponds to the PORT Register, Output Control corresponds to the Data Direction - DD Register, and the Pull-up Enable - PUExn - corresponds to logic expression PUD · DDxn · PORTxn. Digital alternate port functions are connected outside the dotted box in Figure 27-4 to make the scan chain read the actual pin value. For analog function, there is a direct connection from the external pin to the analog circuit. There is no scan chain on the interface between the digital and the analog circuitry, but some digital control signal to analog circuitry are turned off to avoid driving contention on the pads. When JTAG IR contains EXTEST or SAMPLE_PRELOAD the clock is not sent out on the port pins even if the CKOUT fuse is programmed. Even though the clock is output when the JTAG IR contains SAMPLE_PRELOAD, the clock is not sampled by the boundary scan. 342 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 27-3. Boundary-scan Cell for Bi-directional Port Pin with Pull-up Function. To Next Cell ShiftDR EXTEST Pull-up Enable (PUE) Vcc 0 1 Output Control (OC) FF1 LD1 0 D Q D Q 0 1 1 G 0 1 FF0 LD0 0 D Q D 1 Q 0 1 Port Pin (PXn) Output Data (OD) G Input Data (ID) From Last Cell ClockDR UpdateDR 343 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 27-4. General Port Pin Schematic Diagram See Boundary-scan Description for Details! PUExn PUD Q D DDxn Q CLR RESET OCxn WDx Q Pxn ODxn D PORTxn Q CLR WRx IDxn DATA BUS RDx RESET RRx SLEEP SYNCHRONIZER D Q D RPx Q PINxn L Q Q CLK I/O PUD: PUExn: OCxn: ODxn: IDxn: SLEEP: 27.6.2 PULLUP DISABLE PULLUP ENABLE for pin Pxn OUTPUT CONTROL for pin Pxn OUTPUT DATA to pin Pxn INPUT DATA from pin Pxn SLEEP CONTROL WDx: RDx: WRx: RRx: RPx: CLK I/O : WRITE DDRx READ DDRx WRITE PORTx READ PORTx REGISTER READ PORTx PIN I/O CLOCK Scanning the RESET Pin The RESET pin accepts 5V active low logic for standard reset operation, and 12V active high logic for High Voltage Parallel programming. An observe-only cell as shown in Figure 27-5 is inserted for the 5V reset signal. Figure 27-5. Observe-only Cell To Next Cell ShiftDR From System Pin To System Logic FF1 0 D Q 1 From Previous Cell 344 ClockDR AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 27.7 AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order Table 27-3 shows the Scan order between TDI and TDO when the Boundary-scan chain is selected as data path. Bit 0 is the LSB; the first bit scanned in, and the first bit scanned out. The scan order follows the pin-out order as far as possible. Therefore, the bits of Port A and Port Fis scanned in the opposite bit order of the other ports. Exceptions from the rules are the Scan chains for the analog circuits, which constitute the most significant bits of the scan chain regardless of which physical pin they are connected to. In Figure 27-3, PXn. Data corresponds to FF0, PXn. Control corresponds to FF1, PXn. Bit 4, 5, 6 and 7 of Port F is not in the scan chain, since these pins constitute the TAP pins when the JTAG is enabled. The USB pads are not included in the boundary-scan. Table 27-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order Bit Number Signal Name 88 PE6.Data 87 PE6.Control 86 PE7.Data 85 PE7.Control 84 PE3.Data 83 PE3.Control 82 PB0.Data 81 PB0.Control 80 PB1.Data 79 PB1.Control 78 PB2.Data 77 PB2.Control 76 PB3.Data 75 PB3.Control 74 PB4.Data 73 PB4.Control 72 PB5.Data 71 PB5.Control 70 PB6.Data 69 PB6.Control 68 PB7.Data 67 PB7.Control 66 PE4.Data 65 PE4.Control 64 PE5.Data 63 Module PE5.Control Port E Port B PORTE 345 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 27-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 62 RSTT Reset Logic (Observe Only) 61 PD0.Data 60 PD0.Control 59 PD1.Data 58 PD1.Control 57 PD2.Data 56 PD2.Control 55 PD3.Data 54 PD3.Control 53 PD4.Data 52 PD4.Control 51 PD5.Data 50 PD5.Control 49 PD6.Data 48 PD6.Control 47 PD7.Data 46 PD7.Control 45 PE0.Data 44 PE0.Control 43 PE1.Data 42 PE1.Control Port D Port E 346 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 27-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name 41 PC0.Data 40 PC0.Control 39 PC1.Data 38 PC1.Control 37 PC2.Data 36 PC2.Control 35 PC3.Data 34 PC3.Control 33 PC4.Data 32 PC4.Control 31 PC5.Data 30 PC5.Control 29 PC6.Data 28 PC6.Control 27 PC7.Data 26 PC7.Control 25 PE2.Data 24 PE2.Control 23 PA7.Data 22 PA7.Control 21 PA6.Data 20 PA6.Control 19 PA5.Data 18 PA5.Control 17 PA4.Data 16 PA4.Control 15 PA3.Data 14 PA3.Control 13 PA2.Data 12 PA2.Control 11 PA1.Data 10 PA1.Control 9 PA0.Data 8 Module PA0.Control Port C Port E Port A 347 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 27-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name 7 PF3.Data 6 PF3.Control 5 PF2.Data 4 PF2.Control 3 PF1.Data 2 PF1.Control 1 PF0.Data 0 Module PF0.Control Port F 27.8 Boundary-scan Description Language Files Boundary-scan Description Language (BSDL) files describe Boundary-scan capable devices in a standard format used by automated test-generation software. The order and function of bits in the Boundary-scan Data Register are included in this description. BSDL files are available for AT90USB64/128. 348 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 28. Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming The Boot Loader Support provides a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. This feature allows flexible application software updates controlled by the MCU using a Flash-resident Boot Loader program. The Boot Loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Flash memory, or read the code from the program memory. The program code within the Boot Loader section has the capability to write into the entire Flash, including the Boot Loader memory. The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if the feature is not needed anymore. The size of the Boot Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection. General information on SPM and ELPM is provided in See “AVR CPU Core” on page 10. 28.1 Boot Loader Features • • • • • • • Read-While-Write Self-Programming Flexible Boot Memory Size High Security (Separate Boot Lock Bits for a Flexible Protection) Separate Fuse to Select Reset Vector Optimized Page(1) Size Code Efficient Algorithm Efficient Read-Modify-Write Support Note: 28.2 1. A page is a section in the Flash consisting of several bytes (see Table 29-11 on page 371) used during programming. The page organization does not affect normal operation. Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections The Flash memory is organized in two main sections, the Application section and the Boot Loader section (see Figure 28-2). The size of the different sections is configured by the BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Table 28-8 on page 364 and Figure 28-2. These two sections can have different level of protection since they have different sets of Lock bits. 28.2.1 Application Section The Application section is the section of the Flash that is used for storing the application code. The protection level for the Application section can be selected by the application Boot Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 0), see Table 28-2 on page 353. The Application section can never store any Boot Loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled when executed from the Application section. 28.2.2 BLS – Boot Loader Section While the Application section is used for storing the application code, the The Boot Loader software must be located in the BLS since the SPM instruction can initiate a programming when executing from the BLS only. The SPM instruction can access the entire Flash, including the BLS itself. The protection level for the Boot Loader section can be selected by the Boot Loader Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 1), see Table 28-3 on page 353. 28.3 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections Whether the CPU supports Read-While-Write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot Loader software update is dependent on which address that is being programmed. In addition to the two 349 7593K–AVR–11/09 sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as described above, the Flash is also divided into two fixed sections, the Read-While-Write (RWW) section and the No Read-WhileWrite (NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW- and NRWW sections is given in Table 281 and Figure 28-1 on page 351. The main difference between the two sections is: • When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section can be read during the operation. • When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire operation. Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW section during a Boot Loader software operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write section” refers to which section that is being programmed (erased or written), not which section that actually is being read during a Boot Loader software update. 28.3.1 RWW – Read-While-Write Section If a Boot Loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is possible to read code from the Flash, but only code that is located in the NRWW section. During an ongoing programming, the software must ensure that the RWW section never is being read. If the user software is trying to read code that is located inside the RWW section (i.e., by load program memory, call, or jump instructions or an interrupt) during programming, the software might end up in an unknown state. To avoid this, the interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the Boot Loader section. The Boot Loader section is always located in the NRWW section. The RWW Section Busy bit (RWWSB) in the Store Program Memory Control and Status Register (SPMCSR) will be read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After a programming is completed, the RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading code located in the RWW section. See “Store Program Memory Control and Status Register – SPMCSR” on page 355. for details on how to clear RWWSB. 28.3.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the Boot Loader software is updating a page in the RWW section. When the Boot Loader code updates the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire Page Erase or Page Write operation. Table 28-1. Read-While-Write Features Which Section does the Zpointer Address During the Programming? Is the CPU Halted? Read-While-Write Supported? RWW Section NRWW Section No Yes NRWW Section 350 Which Section Can be Read During Programming? None Yes No AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 28-1. Read-While-Write vs. No Read-While-Write Read-While-Write (RWW) Section Z-pointer Addresses RWW Section Z-pointer Addresses NRWW Section No Read-While-Write (NRWW) Section CPU is Halted During the Operation Code Located in NRWW Section Can be Read During the Operation 351 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 28-2. Memory Sections Program Memory BOOTSZ = '10' Program Memory BOOTSZ = '11' 0x0000 No Read-While-Write Section Read-While-Write Section Application Flash Section End RWW Start NRWW Application Flash Section Boot Loader Flash Section End Application Start Boot Loader Flashend No Read-While-Write Section Read-While-Write Section 0x0000 Program Memory BOOTSZ = '01' Application Flash Section End RWW Start NRWW Application Flash Section End Application Start Boot Loader Boot Loader Flash Section Flashend Program Memory BOOTSZ = '00' 28.4 Read-While-Write Section Application Flash Section No Read-While-Write Section Note: 0x0000 End RWW Start NRWW Application Flash Section End Application Start Boot Loader Boot Loader Flash Section Flashend No Read-While-Write Section Read-While-Write Section 0x0000 Application Flash Section End RWW, End Application Start NRWW, Start Boot Loader Boot Loader Flash Section Flashend 1. The parameters in the figure above are given in Table 28-8 on page 364. Boot Loader Lock Bits If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire Flash is available for application code. The Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection. The user can select: • To protect the entire Flash from a software update by the MCU. • To protect only the Boot Loader Flash section from a software update by the MCU. • To protect only the Application Flash section from a software update by the MCU. • Allow software update in the entire Flash. See Table 28-2 and Table 28-3 for further details. The Boot Lock bits can be set by software and in Serial or in Parallel Programming mode. They can only be cleared by a Chip Erase command only. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 2) does not control the programming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general Read/Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 1) does not control reading nor writing by (E)LPM/SPM, if it is attempted. 352 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 28-2. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection Modes (Application Section)(1) BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Application section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section. 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and (E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. 1 (E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. 3 0 4 Note: 0 Protection 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed Table 28-3. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection Modes (Boot Loader Section)(1) BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Boot Loader section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section. 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and (E)LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. 1 (E)LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. 3 4 Note: 28.5 0 0 Protection 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed Entering the Boot Loader Program The bootloader can be executed with three different conditions: 28.5.1 Regular application conditions. A jump or call from the application program. This may be initiated by a trigger such as a command received via USART, SPI or USB. 28.5.2 Boot Reset Fuse The Boot Reset Fuse (BOOTRST) can be programmed so that the Reset Vector is pointing to the Boot Flash start address after a reset. In this case, the Boot Loader is started after a reset. After the application code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note that the fuses cannot be changed by the MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse 353 7593K–AVR–11/09 is programmed, the Reset Vector will always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only be changed through the serial or parallel programming interface. Table 28-4. BOOTRST Boot Reset Fuse(1) Reset Address 1 0 Note: 28.5.3 Reset Vector = Application Reset (address 0x0000) Reset Vector = Boot Loader Reset (see Table 28-8 on page 364) 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed External Hardware conditions The Hardware Boot Enable Fuse (HWBE) can be programmed (See Table 28-5) so that upon special hardware conditions under reset, the bootloader execution is forced after reset. Table 28-5. HWBE Hardware Boot Enable Fuse(1) Reset Address 1 0 Note: ALE/HWB pin can not be used to force Boot Loader execution after reset ALE/HWB pin is used during reset to force bootloader execution after reset 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed When the HWBE fuse is enable the ALE/HWB pin is configured as input during reset and sampled during reset rising edge. When ALE/HWB pin is ‘0’ during reset rising edge, the reset vector will be set as the Boot Loader Reset address and the Boot Loader will be executed (See Figures 28-3). 354 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 28-3. Boot Process Description RESET tHHRH tSHRH ALE/HWB HWBE ? Ext. Hardware Conditions ? BOOTRST ? Reset Vector = Application Reset 28.5.4 Reset Vector =Boot Lhoader Reset Store Program Memory Control and Status Register – SPMCSR The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to control the Boot Loader operations. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS 0 SPMEN Read/Write R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPMCSR • Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the SPM ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the SPMEN bit in the SPMCSR Register is cleared. • Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy When a Self-Programming (Page Erase or Page Write) operation to the RWW section is initiated, the RWWSB will be set (one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the RWW section cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if the RWWSRE bit is written to one after a Self-Programming operation is completed. Alternatively the RWWSB bit will automatically be cleared if a page load operation is initiated. • Bit 5 – SIGRD: Signature Row Read If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next LPM instruction within three clock cycles will read a byte from the signature row into the destination register. see “Reading the Signature Row from Software” on page 360 for details. An SPM instruction within four cycles 355 7593K–AVR–11/09 after SIGRD and SPMEN are set will have no effect. This operation is reserved for future use and should not be used. • Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable When programming (Page Erase or Page Write) to the RWW section, the RWW section is blocked for reading (the RWWSB will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW section, the user software must wait until the programming is completed (SPMEN will be cleared). Then, if the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The RWW section cannot be re-enabled while the Flash is busy with a Page Erase or a Page Write (SPMEN is set). If the RWWSRE bit is written while the Flash is being loaded, the Flash load operation will abort and the data loaded will be lost. • Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles sets Boot Lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address in the Zpointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared upon completion of the Lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. An (E)LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the SPMCSR Register, will read either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See “Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 360 for details. • Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed. • Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed. • Bit 0 – SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with either RWWSRE, BLBSET, PGWRT’ or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is written, the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer. The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and Page Write, the SPMEN bit remains high until the operation is completed. Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower five bits will have no effect. 356 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Note: 28.6 Only one SPM instruction should be active at any time. Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands. The Z pointer consists of the Z-registers ZL and ZH in the register file, and RAMPZ in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the RAMPZ register is only implemented when the program space is larger than 64K bytes. Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 RAMPZ RAMPZ7 RAMPZ6 RAMPZ5 RAMPZ4 RAMPZ3 RAMPZ2 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8 ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 29-11 on page 371), the Program Counter can be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages. This is shown in Figure 28-4. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the Boot Loader software addresses the same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation. Once a programming operation is initiated, the address is latched and the Z-pointer can be used for other operations. The (E)LPM instruction use the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the Flash byte-by-byte, also bit Z0 of the Z-pointer is used. Figure 28-4. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1) BIT 23 ZPCMSB ZPAGEMSB 10 0 PCMSB PROGRAM COUNTER Z - POINTER PAGEMSB PCPAGE PAGE ADDRESS WITHIN THE FLASH PCWORD WORD ADDRESS WITHIN A PAGE PROGRAM MEMORY PAGE PAGE INSTRUCTION WORD PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]: 00 01 02 PAGEEND 357 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 28.7 1. The different variables used in Figure 28-4 are listed in Table 28-10 on page 364. Self-Programming the Flash The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation: Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase • Fill temporary page buffer • Perform a Page Erase • Perform a Page Write Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase • Perform a Page Erase • Fill temporary page buffer • Perform a Page Write If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. When using alternative 1, the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is addressing the same page. See “Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page 362 for an assembly code example. 28.7.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation. • Page Erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Erase. • Page Erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation. 28.7.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading) To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write “00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the RWWSRE bit in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer. If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be lost. 28.7.3 358 Performing a Page Write To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation. • Page Write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Write. • Page Write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation. 28.7.4 Using the SPM Interrupt If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt when the SPMEN bit in SPMCSR is cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used instead of polling the SPMCSR Register in software. When using the SPM interrupt, the Interrupt Vectors should be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is accessing the RWW section when it is blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts is described in “Interrupts” on page 68. 28.7.5 Consideration While Updating BLS Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving Boot Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the entire Boot Loader, and further software updates might be impossible. If it is not necessary to change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to program the Boot Lock bit11 to protect the Boot Loader software from any internal software changes. 28.7.6 Prevent Reading the RWW Section During Self-Programming During Self-Programming (either Page Erase or Page Write), the RWW section is always blocked for reading. The user software itself must prevent that this section is addressed during the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the SPMCSR will be set as long as the RWW section is busy. During Self-Programming the Interrupt Vector table should be moved to the BLS as described in “Interrupts” on page 68, or the interrupts must be disabled. Before addressing the RWW section after the programming is completed, the user software must clear the RWWSB by writing the RWWSRE. See “Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page 362 for an example. 28.7.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM To set the Boot Loader Lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write “X0001001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The only accessible Lock bits are the Boot Lock bits that may prevent the Application and Boot Loader section from any software update by the MCU. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R0 1 1 BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 1 1 See Table 28-2 and Table 28-3 for how the different settings of the Boot Loader bits affect the Flash access. If bits 5..2 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding Boot Lock bit will be programmed if an SPM instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in SPMCSR. The Z-pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for future compatibility it is recommended to load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the lOck bits). For future compatibility it is also recommended to set bits 7, 6, 1, and 0 in R0 to “1” when writing the Lock bits. When programming the Lock bits the entire Flash can be read during the operation. 28.7.8 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It 359 7593K–AVR–11/09 is recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register. 28.7.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The BLBSET and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no (E)LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SPMEN are cleared, (E)LPM will work as described in the Instruction set Manual. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd – – BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1 The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for reading the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse Low byte (FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 29-5 on page 368 for a detailed description and mapping of the Fuse Low byte. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0 Similarly, when reading the Fuse High byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte (FHB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 29-4 on page 368 for detailed description and mapping of the Fuse High byte. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0 When reading the Extended Fuse byte, load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Extended Fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 29-3 on page 367 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended Fuse byte. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd – – – – – EFB2 EFB1 EFB0 Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are unprogrammed, will be read as one. 28.7.10 360 Reading the Signature Row from Software To read the Signature Row from software, load the Z-pointer with the signature byte address given in Table 28-6 on page 361 and set the SIGRD and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the SIGRD and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the signature byte value will be loaded in the destination register. The SIGRD and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Signature Row Lock bits or if no LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles. When SIGRD and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the Instruction set Manual AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 AT90USB64/128 includes a unique 10 bytes serial number located in the signature row. This unique serial number can be used as a USB serial number in the device enumeration process. The pointer addresses to access this unique serial number are given in Table 28-6 on page 361.. Table 28-6. Signature Row Addressing Signature Byte Z-Pointer Address Device Signature Byte 1 0x0000 Device Signature Byte 2 0x0002 Device Signature Byte 3 0x0004 RC Oscillator Calibration Byte 0x0001 Unique Serial Number From 0x000E to 0x0018 Note: 28.7.11 All other addresses are reserved for future use. Preventing Flash Corruption During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied. A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions is too low. Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient): 1. If there is no need for a Boot Loader update in the system, program the Boot Loader Lock bits to prevent any Boot Loader software updates. 2. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient. 3. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes. 28.7.12 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 28-7 shows the typical programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU. Table 28-7. SPM Programming Time Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and write Lock bits by SPM) 3.7 ms 4.5 ms 361 7593K–AVR–11/09 28.7.13 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader ;- the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash ; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y-pointer ; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer ;- error handling is not included ;- the routine must be placed inside the Boot space ; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section can ; be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page Write). ;- registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24), ; loophi (r25), spmcsrval (r20) ; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine ; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size ;- it is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the Boot ; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled. .equ PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2 .org SMALLBOOTSTART ;PAGESIZEB is page size in BYTES, not words Write_page: ; Page Erase ldi spmcsrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcsrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 Wrloop: ld r0, Y+ ld r1, Y+ ldi spmcsrval, (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm adiw ZH:ZL, 2 sbiw loophi:looplo, 2 brne Wrloop ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256 ; execute Page Write subi ZL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer sbci ZH, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 ldi spmcsrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcsrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; read back and check, optional ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 subi YL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer sbci YH, high(PAGESIZEB) 362 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Rdloop: lpm r0, Z+ ld r1, Y+ cpse r0, r1 jmp Error sbiw loophi:looplo, 1 brne Rdloop ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256 ; return to RWW section ; verify that RWW section is safe to read Return: in temp1, SPMCSR sbrs temp1, RWWSB ; If RWWSB is set, the RWW section is not ready yet ret ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcsrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm rjmp Return Do_spm: ; check for previous SPM complete Wait_spm: in temp1, SPMCSR sbrc temp1, SPMEN rjmp Wait_spm ; input: spmcsrval determines SPM action ; disable interrupts if enabled, store status in temp2, SREG cli ; check that no EEPROM write access is present Wait_ee: sbic EECR, EEWE rjmp Wait_ee ; SPM timed sequence out SPMCSR, spmcsrval spm ; restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally enabled) out SREG, temp2 ret 28.7.14 AT90USB64/128 Boot Loader Parameters In Table 28-8 through Table 28-10, the parameters used in the description of the Self-Programming are given. 363 7593K–AVR–11/09 (Start Boot Loader Section) Boot Reset Address Boot Loader Flash Section 4 0x0000 - 0x7DFF 0x7E00 - 0x7FFF 0x7DFF 0x7E00 1 0 1024 words 8 0x0000 - 0x7BFF 0x7C00 - 0x7FFF 0x7BFF 0x7C00 0 1 2048 words 16 0x0000 - 0x77FF 0x7800 - 0x7FFF 0x77FF 0x7800 0 0 4096 words 32 0x0000 - 0x6FFF 0x7000 - 0x7FFF 0x6FFF 0x7000 1 1 512 words 4 0x0000 - 0xFDFF 0xFE00 - 0xFFFF 0xFDFF 0xFE00 1 0 1024 words 8 0x0000 - 0xFBFF 0xFC00 - 0xFFFF 0xFBFF 0xFC00 0 1 2048 words 16 0x0000 - 0xF7FF 0xF800 - 0xFFFF 0xF7FF 0xF800 0 0 4096 words 32 0x0000 - 0xEFFF 0xF000 - 0xFFFF 0xEFFF 0xF000 Note: Pages End Application Section BOOTSZ0 512 words Boot Size BOOTSZ1 1 Device AT90USB64 1 AT90USB128 Application Flash Section Boot Size Configuration (Word Addresses)(1) Table 28-8. 1. The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 28-2 Table 28-9. Device Read-While-Write Limit (Word Addresses)(1) Section Pages Address Read-While-Write section (RWW) 224 0x0000 - 0x6FFF No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0x7000 - 0x7FFF Read-While-Write section (RWW) 480 0x0000 - 0xEFFF No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0xF000 - 0xFFFF AT90USB64 AT90USB28 Note: 1. For details about these two section, see “NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section” on page 350 and “RWW – Read-While-Write Section” on page 350. Table 28-10. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 28-4 and the mapping to the Zpointer Corresponding Z-value Variable PCMSB 364 16 Description(1) Most significant bit in the Program Counter. (The Program Counter is 17 bits PC[16:0]) AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 28-10. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 28-4 and the mapping to the Zpointer Corresponding Z-value Variable PAGEMSB Description(1) Most significant bit which is used to address the words within one page (128 words in a page requires seven bits PC [6:0]). 6 ZPCMSB Z17 Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1. ZPAGEMSB Z7 Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1. PCPAGE PC[16:7] Z17:Z8 Program Counter page address: Page select, for Page Erase and Page Write PCWORD PC[6:0] Z7:Z1 Program Counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary buffer (must be zero during Page Write operation) PCMSB 15 Most significant bit in the program counter. (The program counter is 16 bits PC[15:0]) PAGEMSB 6 Most significant bit which is used to address the words within one page (128 words in a page requires 7 bits PC [6:0]). ZPCMSB Z16 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1. ZPAGEMSB Z7 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PAGEMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1. PCPAGE PC[15:7] Z16:Z7 Program counter page address: Page select, for Page Erase and Page Write. PCWORD PC[6:0] Z7:Z1 Program counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary buffer (must be zero during PAGE WRITE operation). Note: 1. Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the (E)LPM instruction. See “Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming” on page 357 for details about the use of Z-pointer during Self-Programming. 365 7593K–AVR–11/09 29. Memory Programming 29.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits The AT90USB64/128 provides six Lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in Table 29-2. The Lock bits can only be erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command. Table 29-1. Lock Bit Byte(1) Lock Bit Byte Description Default Value 7 – 1 (unprogrammed) 6 – 1 (unprogrammed) BLB12 5 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) BLB11 4 Boot Lock bit 0 (programmed) BLB02 3 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) BLB01 2 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) LB2 1 Lock bit 0 (programmed) LB1 0 Lock bit 0 (programmed) Note: Bit No 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed Table 29-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2) Memory Lock Bits Protection Type LB Mode LB2 LB1 1 1 1 No memory lock features enabled. 0 Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in Parallel and Serial Programming mode. The Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel Programming mode.(1) Further programming and verification of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in Parallel and Serial Programming mode. The Boot Lock bits and Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel Programming mode.(1) 2 1 3 0 0 BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Application section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section. 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and (E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. 1 (E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. 3 4 366 0 0 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2) (Continued) Table 29-2. Memory Lock Bits Protection Type BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Boot Loader section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section. 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and (E)LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. 1 (E)LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. 3 0 4 Notes: 0 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2. 2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed 29.2 Fuse Bits The AT90USB64/128 has four Fuse bytes. Table 29-3 - Table 29-5 describe briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the Fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed. Table 29-3. Extended Fuse Byte (0xF3) Fuse Low Byte Bit No Description Default Value – 7 – 1 – 6 – 1 – 5 – 1 – 4 – 1 HWBE 3 Hardware Boot Enable 0 (programmed) (1) 2 Brown-out Detector trigger level 0 (programmed) (1) BODLEVEL1 1 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed) BODLEVEL0(1) 0 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed) BODLEVEL2 Note: 1. See Table 8-2 on page 60 for BODLEVEL Fuse decoding. 367 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 29-4. Fuse High Byte (AT90USB128 : 0x99 - AT90USB64 : 0x9B) Fuse High Byte Bit No Description Default Value OCDEN 7 Enable OCD 1 (unprogrammed, OCD disabled) JTAGEN 6 Enable JTAG 0 (programmed, JTAG enabled) SPIEN(1) 5 Enable Serial Program and Data Downloading 0 (programmed, SPI prog. enabled) WDTON(3) 4 Watchdog Timer always on 1 (unprogrammed) EESAVE 3 EEPROM memory is preserved through the Chip Erase 1 (unprogrammed, EEPROM not preserved) BOOTSZ1 2 Select Boot Size (see Table 29-6 for details) 0 (programmed)(2) BOOTSZ0 1 Select Boot Size (see Table 29-6 for details) 0 (programmed)(2) (AT90USB128) 1 (unprogrammed)(2) (AT90USB64) BOOTRST 0 Select Reset Vector 1 (unprogrammed) (4) Note: 1. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode. 2. See Table 28-8 on page 364 for details. 3. See “Watchdog Timer Control Register - WDTCSR” on page 65 for details. 4. Never ship a product with the OCDEN Fuse programmed regardless of the setting of Lock bits and JTAGEN Fuse. A programmed OCDEN Fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes. This may increase the power consumption. Table 29-5. Fuse Low Byte (0x5E) Fuse Low Byte Description Default Value 7 Divide clock by 8 0 (programmed) CKOUT(3) 6 Clock output 1 (unprogrammed) SUT1 5 Select start-up time 0 (programmed)(1) SUT0 4 Select start-up time 1 (unprogrammed)(1) CKSEL3 3 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)(2) CKSEL2 2 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)(2) CKSEL1 1 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)(2) CKSEL0 0 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2) (4) CKDIV8 Note: Bit No 1. The default value of SUT1..0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source (258K CK + 4.1ms). See Table 8-1 on page 58 for details. 2. The default setting of CKSEL3..0 results in External Crystal Oscillator @ 8 MHz. See Table 61 on page 40 for details. 3. The CKOUT Fuse allow the system clock to be output on PORTC7. See “Clock Output Buffer” on page 46 for details. 4. See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 47 for details. The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are locked if Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits. 29.2.1 368 Latching of Fuses The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This does not apply to AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on Power-up in Normal mode. 29.3 Signature Bytes All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code can be read in both serial and parallel mode, also when the device is locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space. AT90USB128x Signature Bytes: 1. 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel). 2. 0x001: 0x97 (indicates 128KB Flash memory). 3. 0x002: 0x82 (indicates AT90USB128x device). AT90USB64x Signature Bytes: 1. 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel). 2. 0x001: 0x96 (indicates 64KB Flash memory). 3. 0x002: 0x82 (indicates AT90USB64x device). 29.4 Calibration Byte The AT90USB64/128 has a byte calibration value for the internal RC Oscillator. This byte resides in the high byte of address 0x000 in the signature address space. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL Register to ensure correct frequency of the calibrated RC Oscillator. 29.5 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM Data memory, Memory Lock bits, and Fuse bits in the AT90USB64/128. Pulses are assumed to be at least 250 ns unless otherwise noted. 29.5.1 Signal Names In this section, some pins of the AT90USB64/128 are referenced by signal names describing their functionality during parallel programming, see Figure 29-1 and Table 29-6. Pins not described in the following table are referenced by pin names. The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse. The bit coding is shown in Table 29-9. When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The different commands are shown in Table 29-10. 369 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 29-1. Parallel Programming(1) +5V RDY/BSY PD1 OE PD2 WR PD3 BS1 PD4 XA0 PD5 XA1 PD6 PAGEL PD7 +12 V VCC +5V AVCC PB7 - PB0 DATA RESET BS2 PA0 XTAL1 GND Note: 1. Unused Pins should be left floating. Table 29-6. Pin Name Mapping Signal Name in Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function RDY/BSY PD1 O 0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is ready for new command. OE PD2 I Output Enable (Active low). WR PD3 I Write Pulse (Active low). BS1 PD4 I Byte Select 1. XA0 PD5 I XTAL Action Bit 0. XA1 PD6 I XTAL Action Bit 1. PAGEL PD7 I Program Memory and EEPROM data Page Load. BS2 PA0 I Byte Select 2. DATA PB7-0 I/O Table 29-7. Bi-directional Data bus (Output when OE is low). BS2 and BS1 Encoding BS2 0 0 Low Byte Low Byte Low Byte Fuse Low Byte 0 1 High Byte High Byte High Byte Lockbits 1 0 Extended High Byte Reserved Extended Byte Extended Fuse Byte 1 370 BS1 Flash / EEPROM Address Flash Data Loading / Reading Fuse Programming Reading Fuse and Lock Bits 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Fuse High Byte AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 , Table 29-8. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode Pin Symbol Value PAGEL Prog_enable[3] 0 XA1 Prog_enable[2] 0 XA0 Prog_enable[1] 0 BS1 Prog_enable[0] 0 Table 29-9. XA1 and XA0 Enoding XA1 XA0 Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed 0 0 Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by BS2 and BS1). 0 1 Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by BS1). 1 0 Load Command 1 1 No Action, Idle Table 29-10. Command Byte Bit Encoding Command Byte Command Executed 1000 0000 Chip Erase 0100 0000 Write Fuse bits 0010 0000 Write Lock bits 0001 0000 Write Flash 0001 0001 Write EEPROM 0000 1000 Read Signature Bytes and Calibration byte 0000 0100 Read Fuse and Lock bits 0000 0010 Read Flash 0000 0011 Read EEPROM Table 29-11. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE PCMSB 16K words (32K bytes) 64 words PC[6:0] 256 PC[13:7] 13 32K words (64K bytes) 128 words PC[6:0] 256 PC[14:7] 14 64K words (128K bytes) 128 words PC[6:0] 512 PC[15:7] 15 Flash Size 371 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 29-12. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM EEPROM Size No. of Pages PCPAGE EEAMSB 4 bytes EEA[2:0] 256 EEA[9:3] 9 2K bytes 8 bytes EEA[2:0] 256 EEA[10:3] 10 4K bytes 29.6.1 PCWORD 1K bytes 29.6 Page Size 8 bytes EEA[2:0] 512 EEA[11:3] 11 Parallel Programming Enter Programming Mode The following algorithm puts the device in parallel programming mode: 1. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND. 2. Set RESET to “0” and toggle XTAL1 at least six times. 3. Set the Prog_enable pins listed in Table 29-8 on page 371 to “0000” and wait at least 100 ns. 4. Apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET. Any activity on Prog_enable pins within 100 ns after +12V has been applied to RESET, will cause the device to fail entering programming mode. 5. Wait at least 50 µs before sending a new command. 29.6.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the following should be considered. • The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations. • Skip writing the data value 0xFF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the EESAVE Fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase. • Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes reading. 29.6.3 Chip Erase The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are not reset until the program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are reprogrammed. Note: 1. The EEPRPOM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is programmed. Load Command “Chip Erase” 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set BS1 to “0”. 3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase. 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command. 5. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low. 372 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 6. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command. 29.6.4 Programming the Flash The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 29-11 on page 371. When programming the Flash, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire Flash memory: A. Load Command “Write Flash” 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set BS1 to “0”. 3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash. 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command. B. Load Address Low byte (Address bits 7..0) 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading. 2. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects the address low byte. 3. Set DATA = Address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte. C. Load Data Low Byte 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading. 2. Set DATA = Data low byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte. D. Load Data High Byte 1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte. 2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading. 3. Set DATA = Data high byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte. E. Latch Data 1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte. 2. Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data bytes. (See Figure 29-3 for signal waveforms) F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is loaded. While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits address the pages within the FLASH. This is illustrated in Figure 29-2 on page 374. Note that if less than eight bits are required to address words in the page (pagesize < 256), the most significant bit(s) in the address low byte are used to address the page when performing a Page Write. G. Load Address High byte (Address bits15..8) 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading. 2. Set BS2, BS1 to “01”. This selects the address high byte. 3. Set DATA = Address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte. H. Load Address Extended High byte (Address bits 23..16) 373 7593K–AVR–11/09 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading. 2. Set BS2, BS1 to “10”. This selects the address extended high byte. 3. Set DATA = Address extended high byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte. I. Program Page 1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00” 2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data. RDY/BSY goes low. 3. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high (See Figure 29-3 for signal waveforms). J. Repeat B through I until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been programmed. K. End Page Programming 1. 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation. 3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are reset. Figure 29-2. Addressing the Flash Which is Organized in Pages(1) PCMSB PROGRAM COUNTER PAGEMSB PCPAGE PAGE ADDRESS WITHIN THE FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY PAGE PCWORD WORD ADDRESS WITHIN A PAGE PAGE INSTRUCTION WORD PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]: 00 01 02 PAGEEND Note: 374 1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 29-11 on page 371. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 29-3. Programming the Flash Waveforms(1) F A DATA B C D E 0x10 ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH XX B ADDR. LOW C D DATA LOW DATA HIGH E XX G H ADDR. HIGH ADDR. EXT.H I XX XA1 XA0 BS1 BS2 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL Note: 29.6.5 1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above. Programming the EEPROM The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 29-12 on page 372. When programming the EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM data memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command, Address and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”. 2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. C: Load Data (0x00 - 0xFF). 5. E: Latch data (give PAGEL a positive pulse). K: Repeat 3 through 5 until the entire buffer is filled. L: Program EEPROM page 1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. 2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY goes low. 3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next page (See Figure 29-4 for signal waveforms). 375 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 29-4. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms K A DATA G 0x11 ADDR. HIGH B ADDR. LOW C DATA E XX B ADDR. LOW C DATA E L XX XA1 XA0 BS1 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL BS2 29.6.6 Reading the Flash The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”. 2. H: Load Address Extended Byte (0x00- 0xFF). 3. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 5. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA. 6. Set BS to “1”. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA. 7. Set OE to “1”. 29.6.7 Reading the EEPROM The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”. 2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA. 5. Set OE to “1”. 29.6.8 Programming the Fuse Low Bits The algorithm for programming the Fuse Low bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 376 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 29.6.9 Programming the Fuse High Bits The algorithm for programming the Fuse High bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. Set BS2, BS1 to “01”. This selects high data byte. 4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 5. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects low data byte. 29.6.10 Programming the Extended Fuse Bits The algorithm for programming the Extended Fuse bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. 3. Set BS2, BS1 to “10”. This selects extended data byte. 4. 4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 5. 5. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects low data byte. Figure 29-5. Programming the FUSES Waveforms Write Fuse Low byte A DATA C 0x40 DATA Write Fuse high byte A XX C 0x40 DATA Write Extended Fuse byte A XX C 0x40 DATA XX XA1 XA0 BS1 BS2 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL 29.6.11 Programming the Lock Bits The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit. If LB mode 3 is programmed (LB1 and LB2 is programmed), it is not possible to program the Boot Lock bits by any External Programming mode. 3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase. 377 7593K–AVR–11/09 29.6.12 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”. 2. Set OE to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “00”. The status of the Fuse Low bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 3. Set OE to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “11”. The status of the Fuse High bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 4. Set OE to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “10”. The status of the Extended Fuse bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 5. Set OE to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “01”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 6. Set OE to “1”. Figure 29-6. Mapping Between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse and Lock Bits During Read 0 Fuse Low Byte 0 Extended Fuse Byte 1 DATA BS2 0 Lock Bits 1 Fuse High Byte 1 BS1 BS2 29.6.13 Reading the Signature Bytes The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”. 2. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0x02). 3. Set OE to “0”, and BS to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA. 4. Set OE to “1”. 29.6.14 Reading the Calibration Byte The algorithm for reading the Calibration byte is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 373 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”. 2. B: Load Address Low Byte, 0x00. 3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “1”. The Calibration byte can now be read at DATA. 4. Set OE to “1”. 378 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 29.6.15 Parallel Programming Characteristics Figure 29-7. Parallel Programming Timing, Including some General Timing Requirements tXLWL tXHXL XTAL1 tDVXH tXLDX Data & Contol (DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2) tPLBX t BVWL tBVPH PAGEL tWLBX tPHPL tWLWH WR tPLWL WLRL RDY/BSY tWLRH Figure 29-8. Parallel Programming Timing, Loading Sequence with Timing Requirements(1) LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) LOAD DATA LOAD DATA (HIGH BYTE) LOAD DATA (LOW BYTE) tXLPH t XLXH LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) tPLXH XTAL1 BS1 PAGEL DATA ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte) XA0 XA1 Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to loading operation. Figure 29-9. Parallel Programming Timing, Reading Sequence (within the Same Page) with Timing Requirements(1) LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) READ DATA (LOW BYTE) READ DATA (HIGH BYTE) LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) tXLOL XTAL1 tBVDV BS1 tOLDV OE DATA tOHDZ ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte) XA0 XA1 379 7593K–AVR–11/09 Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to reading operation. Table 29-13. Parallel Programming Characteristics, VCC = 5V ± 10% Symbol Parameter Min VPP Programming Enable Voltage 11.5 IPP Programming Enable Current tDVXH Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High 67 ns tXLXH XTAL1 Low to XTAL1 High 200 ns tXHXL XTAL1 Pulse Width High 150 ns tXLDX Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low 67 ns tXLWL XTAL1 Low to WR Low 0 ns tXLPH XTAL1 Low to PAGEL high 0 ns tPLXH PAGEL low to XTAL1 high 150 ns tBVPH BS1 Valid before PAGEL High 67 ns tPHPL PAGEL Pulse Width High 150 ns tPLBX BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low 67 ns tWLBX BS2/1 Hold after WR Low 67 ns tPLWL PAGEL Low to WR Low 67 ns tBVWL BS2/1 Valid to WR Low 67 ns tWLWH WR Pulse Width Low 150 ns tWLRL WR Low to RDY/BSY Low Max Units 12.5 V 250 μA 0 WR Low to RDY/BSY High (2) 1 μs 3.7 (1) tWLRH Typ 4.5 ms 7.5 9 ms tWLRH_CE WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase tXLOL XTAL1 Low to OE Low 0 tBVDV BS1 Valid to DATA valid 0 tOLDV tOHDZ ns 250 ns OE Low to DATA Valid 250 ns OE High to DATA Tri-stated 250 ns 29.7 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write Flash, Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock bits commands. 2. Notes: tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command. Serial Downloading Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using a serial programming bus while RESET is pulled to GND. The serial programming interface consists of pins SCK, PDI (input) and PDO (output). After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 29-14 on page 381, the pin mapping for serial programming is listed. Not all packages use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal Serial Peripheral Interface - SPI. 380 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 29.8 Serial Programming Pin Mapping Table 29-14. Pin Mapping Serial Programming Symbol Pins (TQFP-64) I/O Description PDI PB2 I Serial Data in PDO PB3 O Serial Data out SCK PB1 I Serial Clock Figure 29-10. Serial Programming and Verify(1) +1.8 - 5.5V VCC +1.8 - 5.5V(2) PDI AVCC PDO SCK XTAL1 RESET GND Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal Oscillator, it is no need to connect a clock source to the XTAL1 pin. 2. VCC - 0.3V < AVCC < VCC + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 1.8 - 5.5V When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF. Depending on CKSEL Fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows: Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz 29.8.1 Serial Programming Algorithm When writing serial data to the AT90USB64/128, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK. When reading data from the AT90USB64/128, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 29-11 for timing details. To program and verify the AT90USB64/128 in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is recommended (See four byte instruction formats in Table 29-16): 381 7593K–AVR–11/09 1. Power-up sequence: Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration after SCK has been set to “0”. 2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming Enable serial instruction to pin PDI. 3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command. 4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 7 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the address lines 15..8. Before issuing this command, make sure the instruction Load Extended Address Byte has been used to define the MSB of the address. The extended address byte is stored until the command is re-issued, i.e., the command needs only be issued for the first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page. (See Table 2915.) Accessing the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming. 5. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See Table 29-15.) In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed. 6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the content at the selected address at serial output PDO. When reading the Flash memory, use the instruction Load Extended Address Byte to define the upper address byte, which is not included in the Read Program Memory instruction. The extended address byte is stored until the command is re-issued, i.e., the command needs only be issued for the first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary. 7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation. 8. Power-off sequence (if needed): Set RESET to “1”. Turn VCC power off. Table 29-15. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location Symbol tWD_FLASH 4.5 ms tWD_EEPROM 9.0 ms tWD_ERASE 382 Minimum Wait Delay 9.0 ms AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 29-11. Serial Programming Waveforms SERIAL DATA INPUT (MOSI) MSB LSB SERIAL DATA OUTPUT (MISO) MSB LSB SERIAL CLOCK INPUT (SCK) SAMPLE 383 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 29-16. Serial Programming Instruction Set Instruction Format Instruction Byte 3 Byte4 1010 1100 0101 0011 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Enable Serial Programming after RESET goes low. 1010 1100 100x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash. 0000 0000 cccc cccc xxxx xxxx Defines Extended Address Byte for Read Program Memory and Write Program Memory Page. 0010 H000 aaaa aaaa bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read H (high or low) data o from Program memory at word address c:a:b. 0100 H000 xxxx xxxx xxbb bbbb iiii iiii Write H (high or low) data i to Program Memory page at word address b. Data low byte must be loaded before Data high byte is applied within the same address. 0100 1100 aaaa aaaa bbxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Write Program Memory Page at address c:a:b. 1010 0000 0000 aaaa bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read data o from EEPROM memory at address a:b. 1100 0000 0000 aaaa bbbb bbbb iiii iiii Write data i to EEPROM memory at address a:b. 1100 0001 0000 0000 0000 00bb iiii iiii Load data i to EEPROM memory page buffer. After data is loaded, program EEPROM page. 1100 0010 0000 aaaa bbbb bb00 xxxx xxxx 0101 1000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxoo oooo Read Lock bits. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. See Table 29-1 on page 366 for details. 1010 1100 111x xxxx xxxx xxxx 11ii iiii Write Lock bits. Set bits = “0” to program Lock bits. See Table 29-1 on page 366 for details. 0011 0000 000x xxxx xxxx xxbb oooo oooo Read Signature Byte o at address b. 1010 1100 1010 0000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to unprogram. 1010 1100 1010 1000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to unprogram. 1010 1100 Chip Erase Byte 2 0100 1101 Programming Enable Byte 1 1010 0100 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to unprogram. See Table 29-3 on page 367 for details. 0101 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Fuse bits. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. 0101 1000 0000 1000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Fuse High bits. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. Load Extended Address Byte Read Program Memory Load Program Memory Page Write Program Memory Page Read EEPROM Memory Write EEPROM Memory Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) Read Lock bits Write Lock bits Read Signature Byte Write Fuse bits Write Fuse High bits Write Extended Fuse Bits Read Fuse bits Read Fuse High bits 384 Operation Write EEPROM page at address a:b. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 29-16. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Continued) Instruction Format Instruction Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4 0101 0000 0000 1000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Extended Fuse bits. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. See Table 29-3 on page 367 for details. 0011 1000 000x xxxx 0000 0000 oooo oooo Read Calibration Byte 1111 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxo If o = “1”, a programming operation is still busy. Wait until this bit returns to “0” before applying another command. Read Extended Fuse Bits Read Calibration Byte Poll RDY/BSY Note: 29.8.2 29.9 Operation a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Serial Programming Characteristics For characteristics of the Serial Programming module see “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 403. Programming via the JTAG Interface Programming through the JTAG interface requires control of the four JTAG specific pins: TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Control of the reset and clock pins is not required. To be able to use the JTAG interface, the JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed. The device is default shipped with the fuse programmed. In addition, the JTD bit in MCUCR must be cleared. Alternatively, if the JTD bit is set, the external reset can be forced low. Then, the JTD bit will be cleared after two chip clocks, and the JTAG pins are available for programming. This provides a means of using the JTAG pins as normal port pins in Running mode while still allowing In-System Programming via the JTAG interface. Note that this technique can not be used when using the JTAG pins for Boundary-scan or On-chip Debug. In these cases the JTAG pins must be dedicated for this purpose. During programming the clock frequency of the TCK Input must be less than the maximum frequency of the chip. The System Clock Prescaler can not be used to divide the TCK Clock Input into a sufficiently low frequency. As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first of all Shift Registers. 29.9.1 Programming Specific JTAG Instructions The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. The JTAG instructions useful for programming are listed below. The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction. The Run-Test/Idle state of the TAP controller is used to generate internal clocks. It can also be used as an idle state between JTAG sequences. The state machine sequence for changing the instruction word is shown in Figure 29-12. 385 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 29-12. State Machine Sequence for Changing the Instruction Word 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 0 1 0 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 0 Shift-DR 1 1 Exit1-DR 0 0 Pause-DR 0 Pause-IR 1 1 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR 29.9.2 1 Exit1-IR 0 1 0 Shift-IR 1 0 1 Update-IR 0 1 0 AVR_RESET (0xC) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for setting the AVR device in the Reset mode or taking the device out from the Reset mode. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched. The active states are: • Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input. 29.9.3 PROG_ENABLE (0x4) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for enabling programming via the JTAG port. The 16bit Programming Enable Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the following: • Shift-DR: The programming enable signature is shifted into the Data Register. • Update-DR: The programming enable signature is compared to the correct value, and Programming mode is entered if the signature is valid. 386 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 29.9.4 PROG_COMMANDS (0x5) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for entering programming commands via the JTAG port. The 15-bit Programming Command Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the following: • Capture-DR: The result of the previous command is loaded into the Data Register. • Shift-DR: The Data Register is shifted by the TCK input, shifting out the result of the previous command and shifting in the new command. • Update-DR: The programming command is applied to the Flash inputs • Run-Test/Idle: One clock cycle is generated, executing the applied command 29.9.5 PROG_PAGELOAD (0x6) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly load the Flash data page via the JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following: • Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: The content of the Flash Data Byte Register is copied into a temporary register. A write sequence is initiated that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the program counter increment into the next page. 29.9.6 PROG_PAGEREAD (0x7) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly capture the Flash content via the JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following: • Capture-DR: The content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte Register. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Capture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page. • Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input. 29.9.7 Data Registers The Data Registers are selected by the JTAG instruction registers described in section “Programming Specific JTAG Instructions” on page 385. The Data Registers relevant for programming operations are: • Reset Register • Programming Enable Register • Programming Command Register • Flash Data Byte Register 387 7593K–AVR–11/09 29.9.8 Reset Register The Reset Register is a Test Data Register used to reset the part during programming. It is required to reset the part before entering Programming mode. A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external reset low. The part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the Fuse settings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a Reset Time-out period (refer to “Clock Sources” on page 40) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 8-1 on page 58. 29.9.9 Programming Enable Register The Programming Enable Register is a 16-bit register. The contents of this register is compared to the programming enable signature, binary code 0b1010_0011_0111_0000. When the contents of the register is equal to the programming enable signature, programming via the JTAG port is enabled. The register is reset to 0 on Power-on Reset, and should always be reset when leaving Programming mode. Figure 29-13. Programming Enable Register TDI D A T A 0xA370 = D Q Programming Enable ClockDR & PROG_ENABLE TDO 29.9.10 388 Programming Command Register The Programming Command Register is a 15-bit register. This register is used to serially shift in programming commands, and to serially shift out the result of the previous command, if any. The JTAG Programming Instruction Set is shown in Table 29-17. The state sequence when shifting in the programming commands is illustrated in Figure 29-15. AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 29-14. Programming Command Register TDI S T R O B E S A D D R E S S / D A T A Flash EEPROM Fuses Lock Bits TDO 389 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 29-17. JTAG Programming Instruction Set a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence 1a. Chip Erase 0100011_10000000 0110001_10000000 0110011_10000000 0110011_10000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 1b. Poll for Chip Erase Complete 0110011_10000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx 2a. Enter Flash Write 0100011_00010000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2e. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2f. Load Data High Byte 0010111_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2g. Latch Data 0110111_00000000 1110111_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 2h. Write Flash Page 0110111_00000000 0110101_00000000 0110111_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 2i. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 3a. Enter Flash Read 0100011_00000010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3e. Read Data Low and High Byte 0110010_00000000 0110110_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo xxxxxxx_oooooooo 4a. Enter EEPROM Write 0100011_00010001 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4d. Load Data Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4e. Latch Data 0110111_00000000 1110111_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 4f. Write EEPROM Page 0110011_00000000 0110001_00000000 0110011_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 390 Notes (2) (10) (10) Low byte High byte (10) AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 29-17. JTAG Programming Instruction (Continued) Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes 4g. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 5a. Enter EEPROM Read 0100011_00000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 5b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 5c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 5d. Read Data Byte 0110011_bbbbbbbb 0110010_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 6a. Enter Fuse Write 0100011_01000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6b. Load Data Low Byte(6) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 6c. Write Fuse Extended Byte 0111011_00000000 0111001_00000000 0111011_00000000 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 6d. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 6f. Write Fuse High Byte 0110111_00000000 0110101_00000000 0110111_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 6g. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 6h. Load Data Low Byte(7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 6i. Write Fuse Low Byte 0110011_00000000 0110001_00000000 0110011_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 6j. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 7a. Enter Lock Bit Write 0100011_00100000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 7b. Load Data Byte(9) 0010011_11iiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (4) 7c. Write Lock Bits 0110011_00000000 0110001_00000000 0110011_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 7d. Poll for Lock Bit Write complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 8a. Enter Fuse/Lock Bit Read 0100011_00000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 8b. Read Extended Fuse Byte(6) 0111010_00000000 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 8c. Read Fuse High Byte(7) 0111110_00000000 0111111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 6e. Load Data Low Byte (7) (10) 391 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 29-17. JTAG Programming Instruction (Continued) Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence 8d. Read Fuse Low Byte(8) 0110010_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 8e. Read Lock Bits(9) 0110110_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxoooooo (5) 8f. Read Fuses and Lock Bits 0111010_00000000 0111110_00000000 0110010_00000000 0110110_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo xxxxxxx_oooooooo xxxxxxx_oooooooo xxxxxxx_oooooooo (5) Fuse Ext. byte Fuse High byte Fuse Low byte Lock bits 9a. Enter Signature Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 9b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 9c. Read Signature Byte 0110010_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 10a. Enter Calibration Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 10b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 10c. Read Calibration Byte 0110110_00000000 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_oooooooo 11a. Load No Operation Command 0100011_00000000 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx Notes: Notes 1. This command sequence is not required if the seven MSB are correctly set by the previous command sequence (which is normally the case). 2. Repeat until o = “1”. 3. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Fuse, “1” to unprogram the Fuse. 4. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Lock bit, “1” to leave the Lock bit unchanged. 5. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. 6. The bit mapping for Fuses Extended byte is listed in Table 29-3 on page 367 7. The bit mapping for Fuses High byte is listed in Table 29-4 on page 368 8. The bit mapping for Fuses Low byte is listed in Table 29-5 on page 368 9. The bit mapping for Lock bits byte is listed in Table 29-1 on page 366 10. Address bits exceeding PCMSB and EEAMSB (Table 29-11 and Table 29-12) are don’t care 11. All TDI and TDO sequences are represented by binary digits (0b...). 392 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 29-15. State Machine Sequence for Changing/Reading the Data Word 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 0 1 0 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 Shift-DR Shift-IR 0 1 Exit1-DR 0 Pause-DR 0 0 Pause-IR 1 1 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR 29.9.11 1 Exit1-IR 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 Update-IR 0 1 0 Flash Data Byte Register The Flash Data Byte Register provides an efficient way to load the entire Flash page buffer before executing Page Write, or to read out/verify the content of the Flash. A state machine sets up the control signals to the Flash and senses the strobe signals from the Flash, thus only the data words need to be shifted in/out. The Flash Data Byte Register actually consists of the 8-bit scan chain and a 8-bit temporary register. During page load, the Update-DR state copies the content of the scan chain over to the temporary register and initiates a write sequence that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the Program Counter increment into the next page. During Page Read, the content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte Register during the Capture-DR state. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Cap- 393 7593K–AVR–11/09 ture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page. Figure 29-16. Flash Data Byte Register STROBES TDI State Machine ADDRESS Flash EEPROM Fuses Lock Bits D A T A TDO The state machine controlling the Flash Data Byte Register is clocked by TCK. During normal operation in which eight bits are shifted for each Flash byte, the clock cycles needed to navigate through the TAP controller automatically feeds the state machine for the Flash Data Byte Register with sufficient number of clock pulses to complete its operation transparently for the user. However, if too few bits are shifted between each Update-DR state during page load, the TAP controller should stay in the Run-Test/Idle state for some TCK cycles to ensure that there are at least 11 TCK cycles between each Update-DR state. 29.9.12 Programming Algorithm All references below of type “1a”, “1b”, and so on, refer to Table 29-17. 29.9.13 Entering Programming Mode 1. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 1 in the Reset Register. 2. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b1010_0011_0111_0000 in the Programming Enable Register. 29.9.14 Leaving Programming Mode 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Disable all programming instructions by using no operation instruction 11a. 3. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b0000_0000_0000_0000 in the programming Enable Register. 4. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 0 in the Reset Register. 394 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 29.9.15 Performing Chip Erase 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Start Chip Erase using programming instruction 1a. 3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for tWLRH_CE (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 29.9.16 Programming the Flash Before programming the Flash a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase” on page 395. 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a. 3. Load address Extended High byte using programming instruction 2b. 4. Load address High byte using programming instruction 2c. 5. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 2d. 6. Load data using programming instructions 2e, 2f and 2g. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all instruction words in the page. 8. Write the page using programming instruction 2h. 9. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 until all data have been programmed. A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction: 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a. 3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2b, 2c and 2d. PCWORD (refer to Table 29-11 on page 371) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0. 4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD. 5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte, starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of the last instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash Data Byte Register into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program Counter before each new word. 6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 7. Write the page using programming instruction 2h. 8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed. 29.9.17 Reading the Flash 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a. 3. Load address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d. 4. Read data using programming instruction 3e. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read. A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction: 395 7593K–AVR–11/09 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a. 3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d. PCWORD (refer to Table 29-11 on page 371) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0. 4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD. 5. Read the entire page (or Flash) by shifting out all instruction words in the page (or Flash), starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page (Flash) and ending with the MSB of the last instruction in the page (Flash). The Capture-DR state both captures the data from the Flash, and also auto-increments the program counter after each word is read. Note that Capture-DR comes before the shift-DR state. Hence, the first byte which is shifted out contains valid data. 6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read. 29.9.18 Programming the EEPROM Before programming the EEPROM a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase” on page 395. 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable EEPROM write using programming instruction 4a. 3. Load address High byte using programming instruction 4b. 4. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 4c. 5. Load data using programming instructions 4d and 4e. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page. 7. Write the data using programming instruction 4f. 8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed. Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the EEPROM. 29.9.19 Reading the EEPROM 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable EEPROM read using programming instruction 5a. 3. Load address using programming instructions 5b and 5c. 4. Read data using programming instruction 5d. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read. Note that the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction can not be used when reading the EEPROM. 29.9.20 Programming the Fuses 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Fuse write using programming instruction 6a. 3. Load data high byte using programming instructions 6b. A bit value of “0” will program the corresponding fuse, a “1” will unprogram the fuse. 4. Write Fuse High byte using programming instruction 6c. 5. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6d, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 396 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 6. Load data low byte using programming instructions 6e. A “0” will program the fuse, a “1” will unprogram the fuse. 7. Write Fuse low byte using programming instruction 6f. 8. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6g, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 29.9.21 Programming the Lock Bits 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Lock bit write using programming instruction 7a. 3. Load data using programming instructions 7b. A bit value of “0” will program the corresponding lock bit, a “1” will leave the lock bit unchanged. 4. Write Lock bits using programming instruction 7c. 5. Poll for Lock bit write complete using programming instruction 7d, or wait for tWLRH (refer to Table 29-13 on page 380). 29.9.22 Reading the Fuses and Lock Bits 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Fuse/Lock bit read using programming instruction 8a. 3. To read all Fuses and Lock bits, use programming instruction 8e. To only read Fuse High byte, use programming instruction 8b. To only read Fuse Low byte, use programming instruction 8c. To only read Lock bits, use programming instruction 8d. 29.9.23 Reading the Signature Bytes 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Signature byte read using programming instruction 9a. 3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 9b. 4. Read first signature byte using programming instruction 9c. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with address 0x01 and address 0x02 to read the second and third signature bytes, respectively. 29.9.24 Reading the Calibration Byte 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Calibration byte read using programming instruction 10a. 3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 10b. 4. Read the calibration byte using programming instruction 10c. 397 7593K–AVR–11/09 30. Electrical Characteristics for AT90USB64/128 30.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* Operating Temperature.................................... -40°C to +85°C *NOTICE: Storage Temperature ..................................... -65°C to +150°C Voltage on any Pin except RESET and VBUS with respect to Ground(7) .............................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Voltage on VBUS with respect to Ground..........-0.5V to +6.0V Maximum Operating Voltage .......................................... +6.0V DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA 30.2 DC Characteristics TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) Max.(5) Units -0.5 0.2VCC(1) V VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1) V Input Low Voltage, RESET pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1) V VIH Input High Voltage, Except XTAL1 and RESET pins VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.6VCC(2) VCC + 0.5 V VIH1 Input High Voltage, XTAL1 pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.7VCC(2) VCC + 0.5 V VIH2 Input High Voltage, RESET pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.9VCC(2) VCC + 0.5 V VOL Output Low Voltage(3), IOL = 10mA, VCC = 5V IOL = 5mA, VCC = 3V 0.7 0.5 V VOH Output High Voltage(4), IOH = -20mA, VCC = 5V IOH = -10mA, VCC = 3V IIL Input Leakage Current I/O Pin VCC = 5.5V, pin low (absolute value) 1 µA IIH Input Leakage Current I/O Pin VCC = 5.5V, pin high (absolute value) 1 µA RRST Reset Pull-up Resistor 30 60 kΩ RPU I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor 20 50 kΩ Symbol Parameter Condition VIL Input Low Voltage,Except XTAL1 and Reset pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V VIL1 Input Low Voltage, XTAL1 pin VIL2 398 Min.(5) Typ. 0.3 0.2 4.2 2.3 4.5 2.6 V AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) (Continued) Units 2.5 5 mA Active 8MHz, VCC = 3V (AT90USB64/128) 5 10 mA Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V (AT90USB64/128) 10 18 mA 19 30 mA WDT enabled, BOD enabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C 30 µA WDT enabled, BOD disabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C 10 µA WDT disabled, BOD disabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C Icc Max.(5) Active 16MHz, VCC = 5V (AT90USB64/128) ICC Parameter Typ. Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V (AT90USB64/128) Symbol 2 µA 10 Condition (6) Min.(5) Power Supply Current Power-down mode VACIO Analog Comparator Input Offset Voltage VCC = 5V Vin = VCC/2 IACLK Analog Comparator Input Leakage Current VCC = 5V Vin = VCC/2 tACID Analog Comparator Propagation Delay VCC = 2.7V VCC = 4.0V 750 500 Iq USB Regulator Quiescent Current UVcc > 3.6V, I = 0mA 10 30 µA Vusb USB Regulator Output Voltage (Ucap) UVcc > 3.6V, I = 40mA(8) 3.3 3.5 V Note: 3.0 mV 50 -50 40 nA ns 1. "Max" means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low 2. "Min" means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high 3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed: AT90USB64/128: 1.)The sum of all IOL, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100 mA. 2.)The sum of all IOL, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100 mA. 3.)The sum of all IOL, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100 mA. 4.)The sum of all IOL, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100 mA. If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed test condition. 4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed: AT90USB64/128: 1)The sum of all IOH, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100 mA. 2)The sum of all IOH, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100 mA. 3)The sum of all IOH, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100 mA. 4)The sum of all IOH, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100 mA. 5. All DC Characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization of other AVR microcontrollers manufactured in the same process technology. These values are preliminary values representing design targets, and will be updated after characterization of actual silicon 6. Values with “Power Reduction Register 1 - PRR1” disabled (0x00). 399 7593K–AVR–11/09 7. As specified on the USB Electrical chapter of USB Specifications 2.0, the D+/D- pads can withstand voltages down to -1V applied through a 39 Ohms resistor 8. USB Peripheral consumes up to 50mA from the regulator or UVcc pin when USB is used at full-load 30.3 External Clock Drive Waveforms Figure 30-1. External Clock Drive Waveforms V IH1 V IL1 30.4 External Clock Drive Table 30-1. External Clock Drive VCC=1.8-5.5V VCC=2.7-5.5V VCC=4.5-5.5V Symbol Parameter Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0 2 0 8 0 16 MHz tCLCL Clock Period 500 125 62.5 ns tCHCX High Time 200 50 25 ns tCLCX Low Time 200 50 25 ns tCLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 μs tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 μs ΔtCLCL Change in period from one clock cycle to the next 2 2 2 % Note: 30.5 All DC Characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization of other AVR microcontrollers manufactured in the same process technology. These values are preliminary values representing design targets, and will be updated after characterization of actual silicon. Maximum speed vs. VCC Maximum frequency is depending on VCC. As shown in Figure 30-2, the Maximum Frequency vs. VCC curve is linear between 2.7V < VCC < 5.5V. 400 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 30-2. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, AT90USB64/128 16 MHz 8 MHz 30.6 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics Table 30-2 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus. The AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface meets or exceeds these requirements under the noted conditions. Timing symbols refer to Figure 30-3. Table 30-2. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements Symbol Parameter VIL Max Units -0.5 0.3 VCC V Input High-voltage (1) Min Input Low-voltage VIH 0.7 VCC VCC + 0.5 V – V Vhys Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs (1) VOL Output Low-voltage Condition (1) tr Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax 3 mA sink current Rise Time for both SDA and SCL (1) tof 0.05 VCC (1) tSP Spikes Suppressed by Input Filter Ii Input Current each I/O Pin Ci(1) Capacitance for each I/O Pin fSCL SCL Clock Frequency 0 0.4 V (3)(2) 300 ns 20 + 0.1Cb(3)(2) 250 ns (2) ns 20 + 0.1Cb 10 pF < Cb < 400 pF(3) (2) 0 tLOW 10 µA – 10 pF fCK(4) > max(16fSCL, 250kHz)(5) 0 400 kHz V CC – 0,4V ---------------------------3mA 1000ns -----------------Cb Ω fSCL > 100 kHz tHD;STA -10 fSCL ≤ 100 kHz Rp 0.1VCC < Vi < 0.9VCC 50 V CC – 0,4V ---------------------------3mA 300ns --------------Cb Ω fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 4.0 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz Value of Pull-up resistor Hold Time (repeated) START Condition Low Period of the SCL Clock 0.6 – µs (6) 4.7 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz(7) 1.3 – µs fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 401 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 30-2. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements (Continued) Symbol Parameter tHIGH High period of the SCL clock tSU;STA Set-up time for a repeated START condition tHD;DAT Data hold time tSU;DAT Data setup time tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition tBUF Bus free time between a STOP and START condition Notes: Condition Min Max Units fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 4.0 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 4.7 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 0 3.45 µs fSCL > 100 kHz 0 0.9 µs fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 250 – ns fSCL > 100 kHz 100 – ns fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 4.0 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs fSCL ≤ 100 kHz 4.7 – µs fSCL > 100 kHz 1.3 – µs 1. In AT90USB64/128, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested. 2. Required only for fSCL > 100 kHz. 3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF. 4. fCK = CPU clock frequency 5. This requirement applies to all AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement. 6. The actual low period generated by the AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus fCK must be greater than 6 MHz for the low time requirement to be strictly met at fSCL = 100 kHz. 7. The actual low period generated by the AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus the low time requirement will not be strictly met for fSCL > 308 kHz when fCK = 8 MHz. Still, AT90USB64/128 devices connected to the bus may communicate at full speed (400 kHz) with other AT90USB64/128 devices, as well as any other device with a proper tLOW acceptance margin. Figure 30-3. 2-wire Serial Bus Timing tof tHIGH tLOW tr tLOW SCL tSU;STA SDA tHD;STA tHD;DAT tSU;DAT tSU;STO tBUF 402 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 30.7 SPI Timing Characteristics See Figure 30-4 and Figure 30-5 for details. Table 30-3. SPI Timing Parameters Description Mode 1 SCK period Master See Table 17-4 2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle 3 Rise/Fall time Master 3.6 4 Setup Master 10 5 Hold Master 10 6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 • tsck 7 SCK to out Master 10 8 SCK to out high Master 10 9 SS low to out Slave 15 10 SCK period Slave 4 • tck Slave 2 • tck 11 SCK high/low (1) Min 12 Rise/Fall time Setup Slave Hold Slave tck 15 SCK to out Slave 16 SCK to SS high Slave 17 SS high to tri-state Slave 18 SS low to SCK Slave ns 10 14 Max Slave 13 Typ Note: 1.6 µs 15 ns 20 10 20 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is: - 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12 MHz - 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12 MHz Figure 30-4. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Master Mode) SS 6 1 SCK (CPOL = 0) 2 2 SCK (CPOL = 1) 4 MISO (Data Input) 5 3 MSB ... LSB 8 7 MOSI (Data Output) MSB ... LSB 403 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 30-5. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Slave Mode) SS 10 9 16 SCK (CPOL = 0) 11 11 SCK (CPOL = 1) 13 MOSI (Data Input) 14 12 MSB ... LSB 15 MISO (Data Output) 30.8 17 MSB ... LSB X Hardware Boot EntranceTiming Characteristics Figure 30-6. Hardware Boot Timing Requirements RESET tSHRH tHHRH ALE/HWB Table 30-4. Hardware Boot Timings Symbol Parameter tSHRH HWB low Setup before Reset High tHHRH 404 HWB low Hold after Reset High Min Max 0 StartUpTime( SUT) + Time Out Delay(TOUT) AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 30.9 ADC Characteristics Table 30-5. Symbol ADC Characteristics Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units Single Ended Conversion Bits Differential Conversion Gain = 1x or 10x 8 Bits Differential Conversion Gain = 200x Resolution 10 7 Bits 1.5 LSB Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 1 MHz Absolute accuracy (Including INL, DNL, quantization error, gain and offset error) LSB Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz Noise Reduction Mode 1.5 LSB Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 1 MHz Noise Reduction Mode LSB Absolute accuracy Gain = 1x, 10x, 200x Vref = 4V, Vcc = 5V ADC Clock = 50 - 200 kHz 1 Integral Non-Linearity (INL) Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.5 1 LSB Integral Non-Linearity (INL) (Accuracy after calibration for offset and gain error) Gain = 1x, 10x, 200x Vref = 4V, Vcc = 5V ADC Clock = 50 - 200 kHz 0.5 1 LSB Differential Non-Linearity (DNL) Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.3 1 LSB LSB Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz -2 0 +2 LSB Gain = 1x, 10x, 200x -2 0 +2 LSB Single Ended Conversion VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V, ADC clock = 200 kHz -2 1 +2 LSB Gain = 1x, 10x, 200x Vref = 4V, Vcc = 5V ADC Clock = 50 - 200 kHz -1 0 +1 LSB Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 65 260 µs Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 50 1000 kHz Gain Error Offset Error 405 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 30-5. Symbol ADC Characteristics (Continued) Parameter Units VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V 2.0 AVCC V Differential Conversion 2.0 AVCC - 0.5 V Single ended channels 0 VREF V Differential Conversion 0 AVCC V Analog Supply Voltage VREF Max Single Ended Conversion AVCC Condition Min Typ Reference Voltage VIN Input Voltage Single Ended Channels 38,5 kHz 4 kHz Input Bandwidth Differential Channels VINT1 Internal Voltage Reference 1.1V 1.0 1.1 1.2 V VINT2 Internal Voltage Reference 2.56V 2.4 2.56 2.8 V RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 kΩ RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 MΩ 406 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 30.10 External Data Memory Timing Table 30-6. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state 8 MHz Oscillator Symbol Parameter 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns 2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5(1) ns 3a tLLAX_ST Address Hold After ALE Low, write access 5 5 ns 3b tLLAX_LD Address Hold after ALE Low, read access 5 5 ns 4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5(1) ns 5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns 6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns 7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low 47.5 8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 10 tRLDV tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 47.5 Max Min Max Unit 0.0 Read Low to Data Valid 11 Min Variable Oscillator 16 MHz 67.5 0.5tCLCL-15(2) 0.5tCLCL+5(2) ns 67.5 (2) (2) ns 40 0.5tCLCL-15 0.5tCLCL+5 40 ns 75 1.0tCLCL-50 0 0 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns ns 13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 42.5 14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 125 1.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10 ns Notes: 0.5tCLCL-20 ns (1) ns 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1. 2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1. Table 30-7. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, 1 Cycle Wait-state 8 MHz Oscillator Min Max Variable Oscillator Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 240 2.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10 ns 200 2.0tCLCL-50 ns 407 7593K–AVR–11/09 Table 30-8. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0 4 MHz Oscillator Symbol Parameter 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10 ns Table 30-9. Min Max Variable Oscillator Min Max Unit 0.0 16 MHz 325 3.0tCLCL-50 ns External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1 4 MHz Oscillator Min Max Variable Oscillator Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10 ns 14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 240 2.0tCLCL-10 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10 ns 325 3.0tCLCL-50 ns Table 30-10. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state 4 MHz Oscillator Symbol Parameter 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 235 tCLCL-15 ns 2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10(1) ns 3a tLLAX_ST Address Hold After ALE Low, write access 5 5 ns 3b tLLAX_LD Address Hold after ALE Low, read access 5 5 ns 4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10(1) ns 5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15 ns 6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15 7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low Min 8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 115 9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 45 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 11 tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 130 408 130 Min Max Unit 0.0 115 Max Variable Oscillator 8 MHz 0.5tCLCL-10 (2) 0.5tCLCL-10 (2) 0.5tCLCL+5 ns 0.5tCLCL+5 (2) ns 45 190 0 ns (2) ns 1.0tCLCL-60 0 ns ns AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Table 30-10. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state (Continued) 4 MHz Oscillator Symbol 12 Parameter Min tRLRH RD Pulse Width Max 235 Variable Oscillator Min Max 1.0tCLCL-15 Unit ns (1) 13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 105 14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 235 1.0tCLCL-15 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 250 1.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 235 1.0tCLCL-15 ns Notes: 0.5tCLCL-20 ns 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1. 2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1. Table 30-11. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1 4 MHz Oscillator Min Max Variable Oscillator Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 500 2.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15 ns 440 2.0tCLCL-60 ns Table 30-12. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0 4 MHz Oscillator Min Max Variable Oscillator Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15 ns 690 3.0tCLCL-60 ns Table 30-13. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1 4 MHz Oscillator Min Max Variable Oscillator Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit 0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz 10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15 ns 14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 485 2.0tCLCL-15 ns 15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL ns 16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15 ns 690 3.0tCLCL-60 ns 409 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 30-7. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 0 T1 T2 T3 T4 System Clock (CLKCPU ) 1 ALE 4 A15:8 7 Prev. addr. Address 15 3a DA7:0 Prev. data Address 13 XX Data 14 16 6 Write 2 WR 3b DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) 11 9 Data 5 Read Address 10 8 12 RD Figure 30-8. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1) T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 System Clock (CLKCPU ) 1 ALE 4 A15:8 7 Prev. addr. Address 15 3a DA7:0 Prev. data Address 13 Data XX 14 16 6 Write 2 WR 3b 9 Address 11 Data 5 Read DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) 10 8 12 RD 410 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 30-9. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0) T1 T2 T3 T5 T4 T6 System Clock (CLKCPU ) 1 ALE 4 A15:8 7 Address Prev. addr. 15 DA7:0 Prev. data 3a Address 13 XX Data 14 16 6 Write 2 WR 9 3b DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address 11 5 Read Data 10 8 12 RD Figure 30-10. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1)() T1 T2 T3 T4 T6 T5 T7 System Clock (CLKCPU ) 1 ALE 4 A15:8 7 Address Prev. addr. 15 3a DA7:0 Prev. data Address 13 XX Data 14 16 6 Write 2 WR 9 3b Address 11 Data 5 Read DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) 10 8 12 RD The ALE pulse in the last period (T4-T7) is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). 411 7593K–AVR–11/09 31. AT90USB64/128 Typical Characteristics The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-ups enabled. A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source. All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR registers set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is disabled during these measurements. The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection. The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency. The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin. The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates. The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the Watchdog Timer. 412 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 31.1 Input Voltage Levels Figure 31-1. Input Low Voltage vs. Vcc, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, XTAL1 and Reset 1.75 Thres hold (V) 1.5 1.25 85 25 -40 1 0.75 0.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) Figure 31-2. Input High Voltage vs. Vcc, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, XTAL1 and Reset 1.75 Thres hold (V) 1.5 1.25 85 25 -40 1 0.75 0.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 413 7593K–AVR–11/09 31.2 Output Voltage Levels Figure 31-3. Output Low Voltage vs. Output Current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, Vcc=3V 1.2 1 V OL (V) 0.8 85 25 0.6 -40 0.4 0.2 0 0 5 10 15 20 IOL ( mA) Figure 31-4. Output Low Voltage vs. Output Current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, Vcc=5V 0.7 0.6 V OL (V) 0.5 85 0.4 25 0.3 -40 0.2 0.1 0 0 5 10 15 20 IOL ( mA) 414 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 31-5. Output High Voltage vs. Output Current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, Vcc=3V 3 2.8 V OH (V) 2.6 85 25 2.4 -40 2.2 2 1.8 0 5 10 15 20 IOH ( mA) Figure 31-6. Output High Voltage vs. Output Current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, Vcc=5V 5 V OH (V) 4.8 85 25 4.6 -40 4.4 4.2 0 5 10 15 20 IOH ( mA) 415 7593K–AVR–11/09 31.3 Power-down Supply Current Figure 31-7. Power-down Supply Current vs. Vcc, with BOD Disabled, WDT Disabled, T=25°C 3 2.5 ICC (uA) 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) Figure 31-8. Power-down Supply Current vs. Vcc, with BOD Disabled, WDT Enabled, T=25°C 16 14 12 ICC (µA) 10 8 6 4 2 0 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 416 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Figure 31-9. Power-down Supply Current vs. Vcc, with BOD Enabled, WDT Enabled, T=25°C 60 50 ICC (µA) 40 30 20 10 0 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 31.4 Power-save Supply Current Figure 31-10. Power-save Supply Current vs. VCc, with BOD & WDT Disabled, T=25°C 8 7 6 ICC (µA) 5 4 3 2 1 0 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 417 7593K–AVR–11/09 31.5 Idle Supply Current Figure 31-11. Idle Supply Current vs Frequency, T=25°C 20 ICC (mA) 15 10 5.5 5 4.5 5 3.3 2.7 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Fre que nc y (MHz 31.6 Active Supply Current Figure 31-12. Active Supply Current vs Frequency, T=25°C 25 ICC (mA) 20 15 5.5 5 10 4.5 3.3 5 2.7 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Fre que nc y (MHz 418 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 31.7 Reset Supply Current Figure 31-13. Reset Supply Current vs Frequency 12 10 ICC (mA) 8 6 5.5 5 4 4.5 3.3 2 2.7 0 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Fre que nc y (MHz 31.8 I/O Pull-up Current Figure 31-14. I/O Pull-Up Current vs. Pin Voltage, Vcc=5V 140 120 100 IOP (uA) 80 85 60 25 40 -40 20 0 -20 0 1 2 3 4 5 V OP ( V) 419 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 31-15. Reset Pull-Up Current vs. Pin Voltage, Vcc=5V 120 100 IRES ET (uA) 80 85 60 25 -40 40 20 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 V RE S E T ( V) 31.9 Bandgap Voltage Figure 31-16. Bandgap voltage vs. Temperature 1.115 Bandgap Voltage (V) 1.11 1.105 1.1 5.5 1.0 9 5 5 4.5 1.0 9 4 1.085 1.08 -40 3.6 2.7 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture (˚ 420 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 31.10 Internal ARef Voltage Figure 31-17. Internal ARef Reference Voltage vs. Temperature, Vcc=2.7-5.5V Tens ion VrefInter (V) 2.64 2.62 2.6 2.58 2.56 2.54 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 Te mpe ra ture 31.11 USB Regulator Figure 31-18. USB Regulator Quiescent Current vs. Input Voltage, No Load 100 90 80 ICC (uA) 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 Volta ge (V) 421 7593K–AVR–11/09 Figure 31-19. USB Regulator Output Voltage vs. Input Voltage, Load=75 Ohms 3.4 Output Voltage (V) 3.2 85 25 3 -40 2.8 2.6 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 Input Volta ge (V) Note: The 75 Ohms load is equivalent to the maximum average consumption of the USB peripheral in operation (full bus load) 31.12 BOD Levels Figure 31-20. BOD Voltage (2.4V level) vs. Temperature 2.54 Thres hold (V) 2.52 2.5 Rising Vcc 2.48 Falling Vcc 2.46 2.44 2.42 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture (C Figure 31-21. BOD Voltage (3.4V level) vs. Temperature 422 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 3.56 3.54 Thres hold (V) 3.52 3.5 Rising Vcc Falling Vcc 3.48 3.46 3.44 3.42 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture (C Figure 31-22. BOD Voltage (4.3V level) vs. Temperature 4.5 4.48 Thres hold (V) 4.46 4.44 Rising Vcc 4.42 Falling Vcc 4.4 4.38 4.36 4.34 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture (C 31.13 Watchdog Timer Frequency Figure 31-23. WDT Oscillator Frequency vs. Vcc 423 7593K–AVR–11/09 124 122 FRC (kHz) 120 118 85 25 116 -40 114 112 110 108 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 31.14 Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Figure 31-24. RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL, T=25°C 16 14 FRC (MHz) 12 10 8 6 4 2 -1 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 15 9 175 191 207 223 23 9 255 OSCCAL (X1) Figure 31-25. RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Vcc Figure 31-26. RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature 424 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 8.8 8.7 8.6 FRC (MHz) 8.5 8.4 85 8.3 25 8.2 -40 8.1 8 7.9 7.8 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V CC ( V) 8.8 FRC (MHz) 8.6 8.4 5.5 8.2 4 3.3 3 8 2.7 7.8 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture 31.15 Power-On Reset Figure 31-27. Power-On Reset Level vs. Temperature 425 7593K–AVR–11/09 1.7 1.6 POR Voltage (V) 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Te mpe ra ture 426 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 32. Register Summary Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 (0xFF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xFE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xFD) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xFC) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xFB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xFA) Reserved - - - - - - - (0xF9) OTGTCON Page (0xF8) UPBCHX (0xF6) VALUE UPINT (0xF7) - PAGE PINT7:0 UPBCLX - - - - - PBYCT10:8 PBYCT7:0 (0xF5) UPERRX (0xF4) UEINT (0xF3) UEBCHX (0xF2) UEBCLX (0xF1) UEDATX (0xF0) UEIENX FLERRE NAKINE - NAKOUTE RXSTPE RXOUTE (0xEF) UESTA1X - - - - - CTRLDIR CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - (0xEE) UESTA0X (0xED) UEINTX (0xE7) PID - - - DATAPID DATATGL - BYCT10:8 BYCT7:0 DAT7:0 UENUM (0xE8) TIMEOUT UERST (0xE9) - UECONX (0xEA) CRC16 EPINT6:0 UECFG0X (0xEB) COUNTER1:0 UECFG1X (0xEC) - Reserved NBUSYBK1:0 EPBK1:0 EPTYPE1:0 ALLOC - STALLRQC TXINE CURRBK1:0 DTSEQ1:0 EPSIZE2:0 STALLRQ STALLEDE - RSTDT EPDIR EPEN EPRST6:0 EPNUM2:0 FIFOCON NAKINI RWAL NAKOUTI RXSTPI RXOUTI - - - - (0xE6) UDMFN (0xE5) UDFNUMH (0xE4) UDFNUML (0xE3) UDADDR (0xE2) UDIEN UPRSME EORSME WAKEUPE EORSTE SOFE (0xE1) UDINT UPRSMI EORSMI WAKEUPI EORSTI SOFI (0xE0) UDCON STALLEDI TXINI FNCERR FNUM10:8 FNUM7:0 ADDEN UADD6:0 LSM SUSPE SUSPI RMWKUP DETACH (0xDF) OTGINT STOI HNPERRI ROLEEXI BCERRI VBERRI SRPI (0xDE) OTGIEN STOE HNPERRE ROLEEXE BCERRE VBERRE SRPE (0xDD) OTGCON HNPREQ SRPREQ SRPSEL VBUSHWC VBUSREQ VBUSRQC (0xDC) Reserved (0xDB) Reserved IDTI VBUSTI (0xDA) USBINT (0xD9) USBSTA (0xD8) USBCON USBE HOST UIMOD UIDE (0xD7) UHWCON (0xD6) VBUSTE Reserved (0xD3) VBUS IDTE OTGPADE Reserved (0xD4) FRZCLK ID Reserved (0xD5) SPEED UVCONE UVREGE Reserved (0xD2) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD0) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCE) UDR1 (0xCD) UBRR1H (0xCC) UBRR1L USART1 I/O Data Register - - - - USART1 Baud Rate Register High Byte USART1 Baud Rate Register Low Byte (0xCB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCA) UCSR1C UMSEL11 UMSEL10 UPM11 UPM10 USBS1 UCSZ11 UCSZ10 UCPOL1 (0xC9) UCSR1B RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSZ12 RXB81 TXB81 (0xC8) UCSR1A RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 FE1 DOR1 PE1 U2X1 MPCM1 (0xC7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC6) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC5) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC4) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC3) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC2) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC0) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBF) Reserved - - - - - - - - 427 7593K–AVR–11/09 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 (0xBE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 - (0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN - TWIE (0xBB) TWDR (0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE (0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 - TWPS1 TWPS0 (0xB8) TWBR (0xB7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB6) ASSR - EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB (0xB5) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB4) OCR2B Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B (0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A (0xB2) TCNT2 (0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B - - WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 (0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 - - WGM21 WGM20 FLERRE NAKEDE - PERRE TXSTPE TXOUTE RXSTALLE RXINE (0xAF) UPIENX (0xAD) 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register 2-wire Serial Interface Bit Rate Register Timer/Counter2 (8 Bit) UPDATX (0xAE) UPCFG2X (0xAC) UPSTAX (0xAB) UPCONX (0xA8) INTFRQ7:0 UPCFG0X (0xA9) PDAT7:0 UPCFG1X (0xAA) CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI DTSEQ1:0 PSIZE2:0 PBK1:0 UPRST PTYPE1:0 NBUSYBK1:0 ALLOC PTOKEN1:0 PFREEZE PEPNUM3:0 INMODE RSTDT PEN PRST6:0 (0xA7) UPNUM (0xA6) UPINTX (0xA5) UPINRQX INRQ7:0 (0xA4) UHFLEN FLEN7:0 (0xA3) UHFNUMH (0xA2) UHFNUML (0xA1) UHADDR (0xA0) UHIEN HWUPE HSOFE RXRSME RSMEDE RSTE DDISCE DCONNE (0x9F) UHINT HWUPI HSOFI RXRSMI RSMEDI RSTI DDISCI DCONNI (0x9E) UHCON RESUME RESET SOFEN (0x9D) PNUM2:0 OCR3CH - FIFOCON NAKEDI RWAL PERRI TXSTPI TXOUTI RXSTALLI RXINI FNUM10:8 FNUM7:0 HADD6:0 Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C High Byte (0x9C) OCR3CL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte (0x9B) OCR3BH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B High Byte (0x9A) OCR3BL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte (0x99) OCR3AH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A High Byte (0x98) OCR3AL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte (0x97) ICR3H Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register High Byte (0x96) ICR3L Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register Low Byte (0x95) TCNT3H Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register High Byte (0x94) TCNT3L (0x93) Reserved - - - - - - - (0x92) TCCR3C FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C - - - - - (0x91) TCCR3B ICNC3 ICES3 - WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register Low Byte (0x90) TCCR3A COM3A1 COM3A0 COM3B1 COM3B0 COM3C1 COM3C0 WGM31 WGM30 (0x8F) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8E) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8D) OCR1CH - Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C High Byte (0x8C) OCR1CL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte (0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte (0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte (0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte (0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte (0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte (0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte (0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte (0x84) TCNT1L (0x83) Reserved - - - - - - - (0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C - - - - - (0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 - WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 WGM10 Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte (0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 COM1C1 COM1C0 WGM11 (0x7F) DIDR1 - - - - - - AIN1D AIN0D (0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D (0x7D) 428 Page - - - - - - - - - AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 (0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 (0x7B) ADCSRB ADHSM ACME - - - ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 (0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 (0x79) ADCH (0x78) ADCL (0x77) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x76) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x75) XMCRB XMBK - - - - XMM2 XMM1 XMM0 (0x74) XMCRA SRE SRL2 SRL1 SRL0 SRW11 SRW10 SRW01 SRW00 (0x73) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x72) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x71) TIMSK3 - - ICIE3 - OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 (0x70) TIMSK2 - - - - - OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 (0x6F) TIMSK1 - - ICIE1 - OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A Page TOIE1 ADC Data Register High byte ADC Data Register Low byte (0x6E) TIMSK0 - - - - - OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 (0x6D) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x6C) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 (0x6A) EICRB ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40 (0x69) EICRA ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 (0x68) PCICR - - - - - - - PCIE0 (0x67) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register (0x65) PRR1 PRUSB - - - PRTIM3 - - PRUSART1 (0x64) PRR0 PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 - PRTIM1 PRSPI - PRADC (0x63) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x62) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE - - - CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 WDP0 (0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 0x3E (0x5E) SPH SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 0x3C (0x5C) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x3B (0x5B) RAMPZ - - - - - - RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 0x3A (0x5A) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x39 (0x59) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x38 (0x58) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN 0x36 (0x56) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x35 (0x55) MCUCR JTD - - PUD - - IVSEL IVCE 0x34 (0x54) MCUSR - - - JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 0x33 (0x53) SMCR - - - - SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 0x32 (0x52) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x31 (0x51) OCDR/ MONDR OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0 0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 0x2F (0x4F) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x2E (0x4E) SPDR Monitor Data Register SPI Data Register 0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL - - - - - SPI2X 0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 PLLP0 PLLE PLOCK General Purpose I/O Register 2 0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 0x29 (0x49) PLLCSR General Purpose I/O Register 1 0x28 (0x48) OCR0B Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register B 0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register A 0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B - - WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 - - WGM01 WGM00 0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM - - - - - PSRASY PSRSYNC 0x22 (0x42) EEARH - - - - 0x21 (0x41) EEARL 0x20 (0x40) EEDR 0x1F (0x3F) EECR 0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 0x1C (0x3C) EIFR INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 INTF0 - - - PLLP2 PLLP1 Timer/Counter0 (8 Bit) EEPROM Address Register High Byte EEPROM Address Register Low Byte EEPROM Data Register - - EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE General Purpose I/O Register 0 429 7593K–AVR–11/09 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0x1B (0x3B) PCIFR - - - - - - - PCIF0 0x1A (0x3A) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x19 (0x39) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x18 (0x38) TIFR3 - - ICF3 - OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 - - - - - OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 - - ICF1 - OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 - - - - - OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 0x14 (0x34) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x13 (0x33) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x12 (0x32) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x11 (0x31) PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 Page PORTF0 0x10 (0x30) DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 0x0F (0x2F) PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 PORTE0 0x0E (0x2E) PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 0x0D (0x2D) DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 0x0C (0x2C) PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 0x08 (0x28) PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 0x07 (0x27) DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 0x06 (0x26) PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 0x02 (0x22) PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 0x01 (0x21) DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 0x00 (0x20) PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written. 2. I/O registers within the address range $00 - $1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. 3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on all bits in the I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only. 4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses $00 - $3F must be used. When addressing I/O registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, $20 must be added to these addresses. The AT90USB64/128 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from $60 - $1FF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. 430 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 33. Instruction Set Summary Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2 SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 1 SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd ← Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2 AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z,N,V 1 ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd ← Rd • K Z,N,V 1 OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1 ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1 EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z,N,V 1 COM Rd One’s Complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z,C,N,V 1 NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1 CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1 INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1 DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z,N,V 1 1 TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z,N,V CLR Rd Clear Register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z,N,V 1 SER Rd Set Register Rd ← 0xFF None 1 MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned 1 R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 Z,C 2 Z,C 2 2 FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS Relative Jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) None 2 EIJMP Extended Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ← Z PC ←(EIND:Z) None 2 RJMP k JMP k Direct Jump PC ← k None 3 RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 4 ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) 4 Extended Indirect Call to (Z) PC ← Z PC ←(EIND:Z) None EICALL None 4 Direct Subroutine Call PC ← k None 5 RET Subroutine Return PC ← STACK None 5 RETI Interrupt Return PC ← STACK I 5 Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 CALL CPSE k Rd,Rr CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd − Rr − C Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd − K Z, N,V,C,H 1 SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2 BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2 BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 431 7593K–AVR–11/09 Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2 CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2 LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1 LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1 ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)←C,Rd(n+1)← Rd(n),C←Rd(7) Z,C,N,V 1 ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)←C,Rd(n)← Rd(n+1),C←Rd(0) Z,C,N,V 1 ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1 SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)←Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)←Rd(3..0) None 1 BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1 1 BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1 BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) ← T None 1 SEC Set Carry C←1 C 1 CLC Clear Carry C←0 C 1 SEN Set Negative Flag N←1 N 1 CLN Clear Negative Flag N←0 N 1 SEZ Set Zero Flag Z←1 Z 1 CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z←0 Z 1 SEI Global Interrupt Enable I←1 I 1 CLI Global Interrupt Disable I←0 I 1 SES Set Signed Test Flag S←1 S 1 CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S←0 S 1 SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V←1 V 1 CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V←0 V 1 SET Set T in SREG T←1 T 1 CLT Clear T in SREG T←0 T 1 SEH CLH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H←1 H←0 H H 1 1 1 DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd ← Rr Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None MOVW None 1 LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd ← K None 1 LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd ← (X) None 2 LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2 LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2 LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2 LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2 2 LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2 LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2 LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2 LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2 LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2 LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2 ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) ← Rr None 2 ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2 ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2 ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2 ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2 2 ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2 ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2 2 ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2 STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2 STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2 Load Program Memory R0 ← (Z) None 3 3 LPM LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3 Extended Load Program Memory R0 ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3 ELPM ELPM 432 Rd, Z Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3 ELPM Rd, Z+ Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z), RAMPZ:Z ←RAMPZ:Z+1 None 3 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 Mnemonics Operands IN Description Operation Flags Store Program Memory SPM (Z) ← R1:R0 None - In Port Rd ← P None 1 1 Rd, P #Clocks OUT P, Rr Out Port P ← Rr None PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK ← Rr None 2 POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd ← STACK None 2 MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS NOP No Operation None 1 SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1 WDR BREAK Watchdog Reset Break (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) For On-chip Debug Only None None 1 N/A 433 7593K–AVR–11/09 34. Ordering Information 34.1 AT90USB646 Speed(MHz) Power Supply(V) Ordering Code(2) USB Interface Package(1) Operating Range 20(3) 2.7-5.5 AT90USB646-AU AT90USB646-MU Device MD PS Industrial (-40° to +85°C) Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 400. MD PS 434 64 - Lead, 14x14 mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness 0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64 - Lead, 9x9 mm Body Size, 0.50mm Pitch Quad Flat No Lead Package (QFN) AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 34.2 AT90USB647 Speed(MHz) Power Supply(V) Ordering Code(2) USB Interface Package(1) Operating Range 20(3) 2.7-5.5 AT90USB647-AU AT90USB647-MU USB OTG MD PS Industrial (-40° to +85°C) Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 400. MD 64 - Lead, 14x14 mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness 0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) PS 64 - Lead, 9x9 mm Body Size, 0.50mm Pitch Quad Flat No Lead Package (QFN) 435 7593K–AVR–11/09 34.3 AT90USB1286 Speed(MHz) Power Supply(V) Ordering Code(2) USB Interface Package(1) Operating Range 20(3) 2.7-5.5 AT90USB1286-AU AT90USB1286-MU Device MD PS Industrial (-40° to +85°C) Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 400. MD PS 436 64 - Lead, 14x14 mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness 0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64 - Lead, 9x9 mm Body Size, 0.50mm Pitch Quad Flat No Lead Package (QFN) AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 34.4 AT90USB1287 Speed(MHz) Power Supply(V) Ordering Code(2) USB Interface Package(1) Operating Range 20(3) 2.7-5.5 AT90USB1287-AU AT90USB1287-MU Host (OTG) MD PS Industrial (-40° to +85°C) Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 400. MD 64 - Lead, 14x14 mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness 0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) PS 64 - Lead, 9x9 mm Body Size, 0.50mm Pitch Quad Flat No Lead Package (QFN) 437 7593K–AVR–11/09 34.5 438 TQFP64 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 439 7593K–AVR–11/09 34.6 440 QFN64 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 441 7593K–AVR–11/09 35. Errata 36. AT90USB1287/6 Errata. 36.1 AT90USB1287/6 Errata History Silicon Release 90USB1286-16MU First Release Date Code up to 0648 Second Release Date Code from 0709 to 0801 except lots 0801 7H5103* Third Release Lots 0801 7H5103* and Date Code from 0814 90USB1287-16AU Date Code up to 0714 and lots 0735 6H2726* from Date Code 0722 to 0806 except lots 0735 6H2726* Date Code from 0814 90USB1287-16MU Date Code up to 0701 Date Code from 0714 to 0810 except lots 0748 7H5103* Lots 0748 7H5103* and Date Code from 0814 Note ‘*’ means a blank or any alphanumeric string 36.2 AT90USB1287/6 First Release • Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines • USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode • Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption • VBUS Session valid threshold voltage • USB signal rate • VBUS residual level • Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled • High current consumption in sleep mode • Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts 9. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI interrupt flags. Problem fix/workaround Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI and IDTI flags. 8. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting with low-speed signaling. Problem fix/workaround None. 7. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does 442 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption. Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit). Problem fix/workaround USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state. 6. VBUS Session valid threshold voltage The VSession valid threshold voltage is internally connected to VBus_Valid (4.4V approx.). That causes the device to attach to the bus only when Vbus is greater than VBusValid instead of V_Session Valid. Thus if VBUS is lower than 4.4V, the device is detached. Problem fix/workaround According to the USB power drop budget, this may require connecting the device toa root hub or a self-powered hub. 5. UBS signal rate The average USB signal rate may sometime be measured out of the USB specifications (12MHz ±30kHz) with short frames. When measured on a long period, the average signal rate value complies with the specifications. This bit rate deviation does not generates communication or functional errors. Problem fix/workaround None. 4. VBUS residual level In USB device and host mode, once a 5V level has been detected to the VBUS pad, a residual level (about 3V) can be measured on the VBUS pin. Problem fix/workaround None. 3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled 100 ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled. Problem Fix/workaround No known workaround, enable AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of the TWI network. 2. High current consumption in sleep mode If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI instruction. Problem Fix/workaround Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should be disabled. 1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts 443 7593K–AVR–11/09 If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go back in sleep again it may wake up multiple times. Problem Fix/workaround A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until TCNT2>OCR2+1. 444 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 36.3 AT90USB1287/6 Second Release • Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines • USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode • Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption • VBUS Session valid threshold voltage • Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled • High current consumption in sleep mode • Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts 7. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI interrupt flags. Problem fix/workaround Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI and IDTI flags. 6. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting with low-speed signaling. Problem fix/workaround None. 5. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption. Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit). Problem fix/workaround USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state. 4. VBUS Session valid threshold voltage The VSession valid threshold voltage is internally connected to VBus_Valid (4.4V approx.). That causes the device to attach to the bus only when Vbus is greater than VBusValid instead of V_Session Valid. Thus if VBUS is lower than 4.4V, the device is detached. Problem fix/workaround According to the USB power drop budget, this may require connecting the device toa root hub or a self-powered hub. 3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled 100 ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled. 445 7593K–AVR–11/09 Problem Fix/workaround No known workaround, enable AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of the TWI network. 2. High current consumption in sleep mode If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI instruction. Problem Fix/workaround Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should be disabled. 1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go back in sleep again it may wake up multiple times. Problem Fix/workaround A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until TCNT2>OCR2+1. 446 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 36.4 AT90USB1287/6 Third Release • Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines • Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption • Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled • High current consumption in sleep mode • Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts 5. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI interrupt flags. Problem fix/workaround Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI and IDTI flags. 4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does not set the SUSPI bit. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption. Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit). Problem fix/workaround USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state. 3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled 100 ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled. Problem Fix/workaround No known workaround, enable AT90USB64/128 TWI first, before the others nodes of the TWI network. 2. High current consumption in sleep mode If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI instruction. Problem Fix/workaround Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from sleep mode should be disabled. 1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts If the CPU core is in sleep mode and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then goes back into sleep mode, it may wake up multiple times. Problem Fix/workaround 447 7593K–AVR–11/09 A software workaround is to wait beforeperforming the sleep instruction: until TCNT2>OCR2+1. 37. AT90USB647/6 Errata. • Incorrect interrupt routine exection for VBUSTI, IDTI interrupts flags • USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode • Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption • Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled • High current consumption in sleep mode • Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts 6. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI interrupt flags. Problem fix/workaround Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI and IDTI flags. 5. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting with low-speed signaling. Problem fix/workaround None. 4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption. Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit). Problem fix/workaround USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state. 3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled 100 ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled. Problem Fix/workaround No known workaround, enable AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of the TWI network. 2. High current consumption in sleep mode 448 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI instruction. Problem Fix/workaround Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should be disabled. 1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go back in sleep mode again it may wake up several times. Problem Fix/workaround A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until TCNT2>OCR2+1. 449 7593K–AVR–11/09 38. Datasheet Revision History for AT90USB64/128 Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referred to this document. The referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision. 38.1 Changes from 7593A to 7593B 1. Changed default configuration for fuse bytes and security byte. 2. Suppression of timer 4,5 registers which does not exist. 3. Updated typical application schematics in USB section 38.2 Changes from 7593B to 7593C 1. Update to package drawings, MQFP64 and TQFP64. 38.3 Changes from 7593C to 7593D 1. For further product compatibility, changed USB PLL possible prescaler configurations. Only 8MHz and 16MHz crystal frequencies allows USB operation (See Table 6-11 on page 49). 38.4 Changes from 7593D to 7593E 1. Updated PLL Prescaler table: configuration words are different between AT90USB64x and AT90USB128x to enable the PLL with a 16 MHz source. 2. Cleaned up some bits from USB registers, and updated information about OTG timers, remote wake-up, reset and connection timings. 3. Updated clock distribution tree diagram (USB prescaler source and configuration register). 4. Cleaned up register summary. 5. Suppressed PCINT23:8 that do not exist from External Interrupts. 6. Updated Electrical Characteristics. 7. Added Typical Characteristics. 8. Update Errata section. 38.5 Changes from 7593E to 7593F 1. Removed ’Preliminary’ from document status. 2. Clarification in Stand by mode regarding USB. 38.6 Changes from 7593F to 7593G 1. Updated Errata section. 38.7 Changes from 7593G to 7593H 1. Added Signature information for 64K devices. 2. Fixed figure for typical bus powered application 3. Added min/max values for BOD levels 4. Added ATmega32U6 product 5. Update Errata section 6. Modified descriptions for HWUPE and WAKEUPE interrupts enable (these interrupts should be enabled only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode). 450 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 7. Added description to access unique serial number located in Signature Row see “Reading the Signature Row from Software” on page 360. 38.8 Changes from 7593H to 7593I 1. Updated Table 8-2 in “Brown-out Detection” on page 60. Unused BOD levels removed. 38.9 Changes from 7593I to 7593J 1. Updated Table 8-2 in “Brown-out Detection” on page 60. BOD level 100 removed. 2. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 435. 3. Removed ATmega32U6 errata section. 38.10 Changes from 7593J to 7593K 1. Corrected Figure 5-7 on page 33, Figure 5-8 on page 33 and Figure 5-9 on page 34. 2. Corrected ordering information for Section 34.3 ”AT90USB1286” on page 436, Section 34.4 ”AT90USB1287” on page 437 andSection 34.2 ”AT90USB647” on page 435. 3. Removed the ATmega32U6 device and updated the datasheet accordingly. 4. Updated Assembly Code Exemple in “Watchdog Reset” on page 61. 451 7593K–AVR–11/09 Features ..................................................................................................... 1 1 Pin Configurations ................................................................................... 3 1.1 Disclaimer ................................................................................................................4 2 Overview ................................................................................................... 4 2.1 Block Diagram .........................................................................................................5 2.2 Pin Descriptions .......................................................................................................7 3 About Code Examples ............................................................................. 9 4 AVR CPU Core ........................................................................................ 10 4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................10 4.2 Architectural Overview ...........................................................................................10 4.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ...................................................................................11 4.4 Status Register ......................................................................................................12 4.5 General Purpose Register File ..............................................................................13 4.6 Stack Pointer .........................................................................................................14 4.7 Instruction Execution Timing .................................................................................15 4.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling .................................................................................16 5 AVR AT90USB64/128 Memories ........................................................... 19 5.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory ...........................................19 5.2 SRAM Data Memory ..............................................................................................20 5.3 EEPROM Data Memory ........................................................................................23 5.4 I/O Memory ............................................................................................................29 5.5 External Memory Interface ....................................................................................30 6 System Clock and Clock Options ......................................................... 39 6.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution .....................................................................39 6.2 Clock Sources .......................................................................................................40 6.3 Low Power Crystal Oscillator .................................................................................41 6.4 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator ..........................................................................43 6.5 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator ...........................................................................44 6.6 External Clock .......................................................................................................45 6.7 Clock Output Buffer ...............................................................................................46 6.8 Timer/Counter Oscillator ........................................................................................46 6.9 System Clock Prescaler ........................................................................................47 6.10 PLL ......................................................................................................................48 7 452 Power Management and Sleep Modes ................................................. 51 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 7.1 Idle Mode ...............................................................................................................52 7.2 ADC Noise Reduction Mode ..................................................................................52 7.3 Power-down Mode .................................................................................................52 7.4 Power-save Mode ..................................................................................................52 7.5 Standby Mode .......................................................................................................53 7.6 Extended Standby Mode .......................................................................................53 7.7 Power Reduction Register .....................................................................................54 7.8 Minimizing Power Consumption ............................................................................55 8 System Control and Reset .................................................................... 57 8.1 Resetting the AVR .................................................................................................57 8.2 Reset Sources .......................................................................................................57 8.3 Power-on Reset .....................................................................................................58 8.4 External Reset .......................................................................................................59 8.5 Brown-out Detection ..............................................................................................60 8.6 Watchdog Reset ....................................................................................................61 8.7 Internal Voltage Reference ....................................................................................62 8.8 Watchdog Timer ....................................................................................................63 9 Interrupts ................................................................................................ 68 9.1 Interrupt Vectors in AT90USB64/128 ....................................................................68 10 I/O-Ports .................................................................................................. 72 10.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................72 10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O .................................................................................73 10.3 Alternate Port Functions ......................................................................................77 10.4 Register Description for I/O-Ports ........................................................................90 11 External Interrupts ................................................................................. 94 12 Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 Prescalers ... 98 12.1 Internal Clock Source ..........................................................................................98 12.2 Prescaler Reset ...................................................................................................98 12.3 External Clock Source .........................................................................................98 12.4 General Timer/Counter Control Register – GTCCR ............................................99 13 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM .......................................................... 100 13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................100 13.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ...........................................................................101 13.3 Counter Unit ......................................................................................................101 453 7593K–AVR–11/09 13.4 Output Compare Unit .........................................................................................102 13.5 Compare Match Output Unit ..............................................................................104 13.6 Modes of Operation ...........................................................................................105 13.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .......................................................................109 13.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description ..........................................................110 14 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3) ........... 117 14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................117 14.2 Accessing 16-bit Registers ................................................................................119 14.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ...........................................................................122 14.4 Counter Unit ......................................................................................................122 14.5 Input Capture Unit .............................................................................................124 14.6 Output Compare Units .......................................................................................126 14.7 Compare Match Output Unit ..............................................................................127 14.8 Modes of Operation ...........................................................................................129 14.9 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .......................................................................136 14.10 16-bit Timer/Counter Register Description ......................................................138 15 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation ...... 149 15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................149 15.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ...........................................................................150 15.3 Counter Unit ......................................................................................................150 15.4 Output Compare Unit .........................................................................................151 15.5 Compare Match Output Unit ..............................................................................153 15.6 Modes of Operation ...........................................................................................154 15.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .......................................................................158 15.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description ..........................................................160 15.9 Asynchronous operation of the Timer/Counter ..................................................165 15.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler .................................................................................168 16 Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A) ........................................... 170 16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................170 16.2 Description .........................................................................................................170 17 Serial Peripheral Interface – SPI ......................................................... 172 17.1 SS Pin Functionality ..........................................................................................176 17.2 Data Modes .......................................................................................................179 18 USART ................................................................................................... 181 454 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................181 18.2 Clock Generation ...............................................................................................182 18.3 Frame Formats ..................................................................................................185 18.4 USART Initialization ...........................................................................................187 18.5 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter ..................................................188 18.6 Data Reception – The USART Receiver ...........................................................190 18.7 Asynchronous Data Reception ..........................................................................194 18.8 Multi-processor Communication Mode ..............................................................197 18.9 USART Register Description .............................................................................198 18.10 Examples of Baud Rate Setting .......................................................................203 19 USART in SPI Mode ............................................................................. 206 19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................206 19.2 Clock Generation ...............................................................................................207 19.3 SPI Data Modes and Timing ..............................................................................207 19.4 Frame Formats ..................................................................................................208 19.5 Data Transfer .....................................................................................................210 19.6 USART MSPIM Register Description ................................................................212 19.7 AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI ....................................................................214 20 2-wire Serial Interface .......................................................................... 216 20.1 Features ............................................................................................................216 20.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition ................................................................216 20.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format ......................................................................217 20.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization .............................220 20.5 Overview of the TWI Module .............................................................................221 20.6 TWI Register Description ...................................................................................224 20.7 Using the TWI ....................................................................................................227 20.8 Transmission Modes .........................................................................................231 20.9 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration ................................................................244 21 USB controller ...................................................................................... 246 21.1 Features ............................................................................................................246 21.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................246 21.3 Typical Application Implementation ...................................................................247 21.4 General Operating Modes .................................................................................251 21.5 Power modes .....................................................................................................255 21.6 Speed Control ....................................................................................................256 455 7593K–AVR–11/09 21.7 Memory management ........................................................................................257 21.8 PAD suspend .....................................................................................................258 21.9 OTG timers customizing ....................................................................................259 21.10 Plug-in detection ..............................................................................................259 21.11 ID detection .....................................................................................................260 21.12 Registers description .......................................................................................261 21.13 USB Software Operating modes .....................................................................266 22 USB Device Operating modes ............................................................ 267 22.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................267 22.2 Power-on and reset ...........................................................................................267 22.3 Endpoint reset ...................................................................................................267 22.4 USB reset ..........................................................................................................268 22.5 Endpoint selection .............................................................................................268 22.6 Endpoint activation ............................................................................................268 22.7 Address Setup ...................................................................................................269 22.8 Suspend, Wake-up and Resume .......................................................................270 22.9 Detach ...............................................................................................................270 22.10 Remote Wake-up .............................................................................................271 22.11 STALL request .................................................................................................271 22.12 CONTROL endpoint management ..................................................................272 22.13 OUT endpoint management ............................................................................273 22.14 IN endpoint management ................................................................................275 22.15 Isochronous mode ...........................................................................................276 22.16 Overflow ..........................................................................................................277 22.17 Interrupts .........................................................................................................277 22.18 Registers .........................................................................................................278 23 USB Host Operating Modes ................................................................ 290 23.1 Pipe description .................................................................................................290 23.2 Detach ...............................................................................................................290 23.3 Power-on and Reset ..........................................................................................290 23.4 Device Detection ...............................................................................................291 23.5 Pipe Selection ....................................................................................................291 23.6 Pipe Configuration .............................................................................................291 23.7 USB Reset .........................................................................................................293 23.8 Address Setup ...................................................................................................293 456 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 23.9 Remote Wake-Up detection ..............................................................................293 23.10 USB Pipe Reset ...............................................................................................293 23.11 Pipe Data Access ............................................................................................293 23.12 Control Pipe management ...............................................................................294 23.13 OUT Pipe management ...................................................................................294 23.14 IN Pipe management .......................................................................................295 23.15 Interrupt system ...............................................................................................296 23.16 Registers .........................................................................................................297 24 Analog Comparator .............................................................................. 310 24.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input ...............................................................312 25 Analog to Digital Converter - ADC ...................................................... 313 25.1 Features ............................................................................................................313 25.2 Operation ...........................................................................................................314 25.3 Starting a Conversion ........................................................................................315 25.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing ....................................................................316 25.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection .......................................................319 25.6 ADC Noise Canceler .........................................................................................320 25.7 ADC Conversion Result .....................................................................................324 25.8 ADC Register Description ..................................................................................326 26 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System ...................................... 332 26.1 Overview ............................................................................................................332 26.2 Test Access Port – TAP ....................................................................................332 26.3 TAP Controller ...................................................................................................334 26.4 Using the Boundary-scan Chain ........................................................................335 26.5 Using the On-chip Debug System .....................................................................335 26.6 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions .......................................................336 26.7 On-chip Debug Related Register in I/O Memory ...............................................337 26.8 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities .......................................................337 26.9 Bibliography .......................................................................................................337 27 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan ................................................... 338 27.1 Features ............................................................................................................338 27.2 System Overview ...............................................................................................338 27.3 Data Registers ...................................................................................................338 27.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions .......................................................340 27.5 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O Memory ...............................................341 457 7593K–AVR–11/09 27.6 Boundary-scan Chain ........................................................................................342 27.7 AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan Order ............................................................345 27.8 Boundary-scan Description Language Files ......................................................348 28 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming ......... 349 28.1 Boot Loader Features ........................................................................................349 28.2 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections .....................................................349 28.3 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections ............................349 28.4 Boot Loader Lock Bits .......................................................................................352 28.5 Entering the Boot Loader Program ....................................................................353 28.6 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming ...............................................357 28.7 Self-Programming the Flash ..............................................................................358 29 Memory Programming ......................................................................... 366 29.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ...............................................................366 29.2 Fuse Bits ............................................................................................................367 29.3 Signature Bytes .................................................................................................369 29.4 Calibration Byte .................................................................................................369 29.5 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands ...................369 29.6 Parallel Programming ........................................................................................372 29.7 Serial Downloading ............................................................................................380 29.8 Serial Programming Pin Mapping ......................................................................381 29.9 Programming via the JTAG Interface ................................................................385 30 Electrical Characteristics for AT90USB64/128 .................................. 398 30.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* .............................................................................398 30.2 DC Characteristics .............................................................................................398 30.3 External Clock Drive Waveforms .......................................................................400 30.4 External Clock Drive ..........................................................................................400 30.5 Maximum speed vs. VCC ...........................................................................................................................400 30.6 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics ...............................................................401 30.7 SPI Timing Characteristics ................................................................................403 30.8 Hardware Boot EntranceTiming Characteristics ................................................404 30.9 ADC Characteristics ..........................................................................................405 30.10 External Data Memory Timing .........................................................................407 31 AT90USB64/128 Typical Characteristics .......................................... 412 31.1 Input Voltage Levels ..........................................................................................413 31.2 Output Voltage Levels .......................................................................................414 458 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 AT90USB64/128 31.3 Power-down Supply Current ..............................................................................416 31.4 Power-save Supply Current ...............................................................................417 31.5 Idle Supply Current ............................................................................................418 31.6 Active Supply Current ........................................................................................418 31.7 Reset Supply Current ........................................................................................419 31.8 I/O Pull-up Current .............................................................................................419 31.9 Bandgap Voltage ...............................................................................................420 31.10 Internal ARef Voltage ......................................................................................421 31.11 USB Regulator .................................................................................................421 31.12 BOD Levels .....................................................................................................422 31.13 Watchdog Timer Frequency ............................................................................423 31.14 Internal RC Oscillator Frequency ....................................................................424 31.15 Power-On Reset ..............................................................................................425 32 Register Summary ............................................................................... 427 33 Instruction Set Summary ..................................................................... 431 34 Ordering Information ........................................................................... 434 34.1 AT90USB646 .....................................................................................................434 34.2 AT90USB647 .....................................................................................................435 34.3 AT90USB1286 ...................................................................................................436 34.4 AT90USB1287 ...................................................................................................437 34.5 TQFP64 .............................................................................................................438 34.6 QFN64 ...............................................................................................................440 35 Errata ..................................................................................................... 442 36 AT90USB1287/6 Errata. ....................................................................... 442 36.1 AT90USB1287/6 Errata History .........................................................................442 36.2 AT90USB1287/6 First Release .........................................................................442 36.3 AT90USB1287/6 Second Release ....................................................................445 36.4 AT90USB1287/6 Third Release ........................................................................447 37 AT90USB647/6 Errata. ......................................................................... 448 38 Datasheet Revision History for AT90USB64/128 .............................. 450 38.1 Changes from 7593A to 7593B .........................................................................450 38.2 Changes from 7593B to 7593C .........................................................................450 38.3 Changes from 7593C to 7593D .........................................................................450 38.4 Changes from 7593D to 7593E .........................................................................450 459 7593K–AVR–11/09 38.5 Changes from 7593E to 7593F .........................................................................450 38.6 Changes from 7593F to 7593G .........................................................................450 38.7 Changes from 7593G to 7593H .........................................................................450 38.8 Changes from 7593H to 7593I ..........................................................................451 38.9 Changes from 7593I to 7593J ...........................................................................451 38.10 Changes from 7593J to 7593K ........................................................................451 460 AT90USB64/128 7593K–AVR–11/09 Headquarters International Atmel Corporation 2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 USA Tel: 1(408) 441-0311 Fax: 1(408) 487-2600 Atmel Asia Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F BEA Tower, Millennium City 5 418 Kwun Tong Road Kwun Tong, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: (852) 2245-6100 Fax: (852) 2722-1369 Atmel Europe Le Krebs 8, Rue Jean-Pierre Timbaud BP 309 78054 Saint-Quentin-enYvelines Cedex France Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00 Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11 Atmel Japan 9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg. 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551 Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581 Technical Support [email protected] Sales Contact www.atmel.com/contacts Product Contact Web Site www.atmel.com Literature Requests www.atmel.com/literature Disclaimer: T he information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life. © 2009 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. A tmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, AVR® a nd others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others. 7593K–AVR–11/09 ...
View Full Document

This note was uploaded on 01/29/2012 for the course ECE 000 taught by Professor Sabaei during the Spring '11 term at Amirkabir University of Technology.

Ask a homework question - tutors are online